Research On Dialectical Behavior Therapy

profileckayvoe
researchondialecticalbehaviortherapy.zip

A Comparison of MDT and DBT- A Case Study and Analysis.pdf

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

204

A Comparison of MDT and DBT: A Case Study and Analysis Jack A Apsche, Alexander M. Siv, and Susan Matteson

Abstract

This case study examines a 13 year old adolescent male who engages in severe aggression, self- injurious and impulsive behaviors. He was treated with Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) for thirteen months. DBT had limited success in reducing his problem behaviors. He was treated with Mode Deactivation Therapy (MDT) for four months and his problem behaviors were reduced significantly. It appears that in this case study MDT was more effective than DBT in reducing his severe behaviors.

Keywords: MDT, DBT, physical aggression, self injurious behaviors, adolescents, personality disorders. _____________________________________________________________________________________________

Introduction

In this case study a thirteen-year-old adolescent male was treated successfully after MDT was implemented. He had previously been treated for thirteen months, unsuccessfully, with DBT. The DBT therapist was trained in the ten day intensive training offered by the developer of DBT. The MDT therapist was trained by the first author of this case study in an intensive MDT training.

DBT was developed by Linehan (1993) to treat people with Borderline Personality Disorder. Since the inception of DBT, it has been shown to be an effective methodology in treating a variety of disorders. Trupin, Stewart, Beach, and Boesky (2003) demonstrated the effectiveness of DBT with female juvenile offenders. Lynch, Morse, Mendlesen, and Robbins, (2003) demonstrated the effectiveness of DBT with older populations. In these studies DBT has demonstrated its effectiveness with populations other than Borderline Personality Disorder cases.

MDT was shown to be more effective than Cognitive Behavior Therapy and Social Skills Training with aggressive adolescent males with conduct and personality disorders. MDT has been demonstrated to be effective in reducing aggression, personality disorders, beliefs and symptoms of Post Traumatic Stress Disorder (Apsche, Bass, Murphy 2004; Apsche & Ward 2004). This appears to be the first case study that examines the effects of MDT with a youngster who was not successful with DBT.

Case Summary

This case study is a step-by-step case study, with a corresponding theoretical analysis based in mode deactivation therapy (MDT). The methodology known as MDT suggests potential for effective treatment of youngsters with similar backgrounds as William. William is a thirteen-year-old Caucasian American male. He has been diagnosed with Post Traumatic Stress Disorder, Impulse Control Disorder, Reactive Attachment Disorder, Obsessive Compulsive Disorder and Personality Disorder Traits.

William had demonstrated a pattern of continuous disruptive behaviors, lying, social phobias,

hoarding, aggressive and threatening behaviors, property destruction, academic performance problems and school behavior problems, difficulties with peer relationships, enuresis with purposeful urination on furniture and clothing, and sexually inappropriate behaviors, including attempting to have sex with his sister, excessive masturbation with stolen undergarments from his mother and sister, masturbating with animals and in front of other children, early sexual experiences and touching other children.

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

205

Client Family History

William had struggled behaviorally since he was a young boy, and some reports indicate he was as young as a year and a half. William had minimal care as a youngster and grew up in an invalidating environment where he and his sister were responsible for their own care. William’s mother was diagnosed with Hodgkin’s disease during her pregnancy with William and reportedly refused treatment. William was born prematurely and then incubated for one month after his birth to aid in his respiratory development. William’s mother died in 1998. William and his sister visited with a family for approximately one and a half years prior to their adoption in 2001. Although William had behavioral problems prior to adoption, when the adoption was finalized, his behaviors deteriorated rapidly.

William’s biological family was extremely unstable. His parents, never married, met in an orphanage where they grew up. Due to his mother’s illness, he was neglected as an infant. His two younger sisters would eventually take responsibility for William. They did have an aunt who was involved. However, it is reported that due to William’s challenging behaviors early on, she withdrew from their case to protect her children from William’s behavior. It appears that William did not experience a nurturing bond with his mother and did not have anyone to fulfill that need to him to the extent necessary to develop appropriate and trusting attachments.

William and his sisters were left to fend for themselves in their developing years. Although their mother’s illness played a role in their lack of care, it is evident that the neglect was only exacerbated by her illness, not the cause of it. Their father was in and out of their lives. However, when he was there he would become physically and sexually violent toward their mother. He was a substance abuser who never took responsibility for his children. One report indicated that when William was young his father threw him down the stairs. It was reported by an aunt that William and his sister were in bed with their mother while she watched pornographic videos.

Although William had behavior problems since early childhood, these problems severely escalated following his adoption. The Johnsons had other foster children, but due to the severity and potential harm of William’s behaviors, they stopped taking in foster children. The family reported that William needed to be constantly monitored and supervised. Of particular note is William’s apparent targeting of his adoptive mother with his aggressive behaviors. The foster parents locked their bedroom door to prevent William from ransacking their room and stealing. At times he would steal undergarments from his mother and sister and use them as objects for masturbation.

William was referred to a residential program to treat his disruptive behaviors. William presents as an extremely anxious child with obsessive compuls ive features. Reports indicate that he has a history of inappropriate sexual behaviors, as well as aggressive behaviors. Since arriving for residential services thirteen months ago, William has received DBT individual and group therapy. The target goals were to develop skills for managing his emotions and tolerating his distress, and to address his sexually reactive behaviors. This would also address his problematic sexual behaviors, and teach him about appropriate sexuality and relationships. William also participated in therapeutic recreation for further skill building and self-esteem enhancing activities.

William preformed at the normal grade level at school, but he required increased structure and individualized attention. William has a history of repeated violations of school rules and disruption in class. He often was aggressive and frequently cut school.

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

206

Diagnosis Axis I: Impulse Control Disorder Post Traumatic Stress Disorder Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder Type Obsessive Compulsive Disorder Reactive Attachment Disorder Axis II: Personality Disorder, NOS - Mixed Features of borderline, antisocial, histrionic,

avoidant, and narcissistic. Axis III: Premature Birth by report Axis IV: Problems with primary support system, the social environment, educational problems.

Sexual Abuse. Axis V: Highest GAF past year: 40 Current GAF: 50 Admission GAF: 40

Mode Deactivation Therapy (MDT) Case Conceptualization

Case conceptualizations include the presenting problems, test data, cultural issues, history and development, cognitive issues, and behavioral issues (Friedberg & McClure, 2002). The MDT Case Conceptualization takes conceptualizing a case a step further. The MDT Case Conceptualization helps the clinician examine the youth’s underlying fears. These fears serve the function of developing and supporting avoidance behaviors in the youngster. These behaviors usually appear as a myriad of problem behaviors in the milieu. The MDT Case Conceptualization method provides an assessment of the underlying compound core beliefs that are generated by the developing personality disorders; it is known as the Fear Assessment.

Preliminary results suggest that this typology of youngsters has a conglomerate of compound core beliefs associated with personality disorders. These conglomerate of beliefs may be a reason why many youngsters fail in treatment. One cannot treat specific disorders, such as aggression, without gathering these conglomerate beliefs. It is also apparent that these beliefs are not cluster specific as suggested by Beck, Freedman, Davis and Associates, (2004). That is to say, the conglomerate of beliefs and associated behaviors contains beliefs from each cluster that integrate with each other. Because of this complex integration of beliefs, it makes treatment for this typology of youngster more complicated. The conglomerate of compound core beliefs represents protection for the individual from their vulnerability issues, which then may present behaviors that interfere with treatment. The conglomerate of beliefs and behaviors is consistent with schema therapy’s categories of maladaptive modes (Young et al, 2003), although MDT acknowledges the complexities of these modes to allow for more individualized, specific identification by identifying the understanding beliefs and corresponding behaviors for the individual. The conglomerate of beliefs and corresponding behaviors serves to sort out the schemas of each individual. In contrast to Young, et. Al. (2003) schema therapy, MDT does not label the client’s modes. Rather, MDT recognizes that modes are fluid and ever changing and therefore, they are not categorized.

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

207

The attempt to use the usual didactic approaches to treatment, without addressing these beliefs, amounts to treatment interfering behavior on the part of the psychologist, or treating professional, and is not empirically supported and is counter-init iated.

The MDT Case Conceptualization is a schematic representation of A.T. Beck’s (1996) theory of modes combined with Apsche and Ward Bailey’s (2003) interpretation of the applied methodology of Linehan’s (1993) DBT, and Kohlenburg and Tsai’s (1993) FAP. It is intended to provide the blueprint for the treatment for the youngster. The MDT Case Conceptualization provides a functional treatment methodology that integrates into the treatment plan.

The MDT Case Conceptualization also provides a methodology to identify and address the reactive adolescent's emotional dysregulation. The emotional dysregulation refers to the Linehan (1993) model of the Borderline Personality Disorder (BPD) emotional dysregulation, integrated with the Reactive Conduct Disorder (Dodge, et al, 1997).

MDT Case Conceptualization offers a step-by-step methodology to implement MDT. The MDT Case Conceptualization becomes the basis for implementing MDT methodology. Additionally, MDT offers specifically designed assessments, Fear Assessment, Compound Core Belief Questionnaire (CCBQ), and the Typology Survey, which are the basis of completing the MDT Case Conceptualization. All of these assessments have been tested for validity, reliability, and effectiveness. The results of statistical analysis of these assessments will be presented in future articles by the authors of this paper.

William’s Fear Assessment Results

Results from the Fear Assessment suggest that William is an individual who has anxiety and fear relating to external areas or things outside of himself, over which he has little or no control. Endorsed fears indicate that William's behavior is in response or reaction to external stimuli, which he perceives as threats. This appears to validate his history of sexual exposure and possible abuse, and strong family enmeshment. He endorsed fears of being emotionally alone, being home alone, of failing (life), of being emotionally intimate, fear of crowds, being alone, fear of being in a crowded room, fear of being dumb, someone coming up behind him, of being touched by someone that you I don’t know well, confronting his abuser, being physically hurt for no reason, his feelings and emotions, hurting someone and losing control. These fears are matched with corresponding beliefs to complete the Trigger, Fear, Avoids, Beliefs (TFAB) worksheet.

The Compound Core Beliefs Questionnaire (CCBQ) suggests that William has a personality disorder NOS – with mixed features of antisocial, borderline, paranoid, antisocial, histrionic, and narcissistic, and obsessive-compulsive beliefs. He endorsed numerous beliefs of the borderline personality. Many of these beliefs appear to have gone untreated by the previous therapists. Examination of his beliefs indicates that William’s sexual aggression and oppositional behavior are related to his dichotomous borderline beliefs and emotional dysregulation. He endorsed the following compound core beliefs as occurring always: “Whenever I hope, I will be disappointed,” “Other people have hidden motives and want something from me,” “Unless you have a videotape of me, you cannot prove I did it,” “If you criticize me, you are against me,” “When I am angry, my emotions are extreme and out of control,” “If I am afraid something will be unpleasant, I will avoid it,” “When I hurt emotionally, I do whatever it takes to feel better,” “Life at times feels like an endless series of disappointments followed by pain,” “I can not trust others -- they will hurt me,” “If I trust someone today, they will betray me later,” “If I let others know information about me, they’ll use it against me,” “If I act silly and entertain people, they won’t notice my weaknesses,” “When I’m in pain, I’ll do whatever I need to do to feel better,” “I would rather not try something new then fail at something,” “I am happiest when people pay attention to

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

208

me “If I’m afraid something will be unpleasant, I will avoid it,” and “If I’m not on guard, others will take advantage of me.”

Case Conceptualization

The MDT Case Conceptualization is typology driven and individualizes the treatment based on an empirically based assessment. The MDT Case Conceptualization also provides a methodology to address the reactive adolescent and his emotional dysregulation. T hese adolescents often demonstrates aggressive and destructive reactions as responses emotions to threats or perceived threats. The case provides the structure of the conglomerate of beliefs and behaviors to address the dysregulation by balancing the belie fs. The conglomerate of beliefs and behaviors identifies behaviors that correlate with beliefs and is the structure needed to work with the youngster. This provides a method to relate the emotional dysregulation to the beliefs. The goal is to teach the youngster to balance beliefs by recognizing that they activate the emotional and behavioral dysregulation.

Once the information is gathered and the case is formulated, the client and the therapist collaboratively develop the Conglomerate of Beliefs and Behaviors (COBB). The collaborative nature of this process allowed William an opportunity to gain trust in his therapist as well as in himself. By empowering him to actively participate in the development of his MDT Case Conceptualization and the course of his treatment, he became significantly more motivated to participate in his treatment program. William remarked as to the number of his beliefs, which tended to correspond with most of his negative behaviors. He demonstrated insight, recognizing that resolving his compound core beliefs would enable him to address his negative behaviors. He was pleased with this realization and expressed optimism for true change and relief. The Conglomerate of Beliefs and Behaviors (COBB) is the crux of treatment for the client. Once he collaboratively validates the Triggers→Fear→ Avoids→ Compound Core Beliefs (TFAB) and begins this form, he helps validate his behavioral responses that are congruent with his compound core beliefs.

The COBB remains with him throughout treatment and is the basis for all of his work in the MDT Workbook. William recognized that these beliefs could be activated throughout his lifetime and he continually works to deactivate his fears, by balancing his beliefs. The MDT Case Conceptualization includes a situations worksheet, with real life examples, to test the “hypotheses” developed with the COBB and TFAB.

After completing the COBB and TFAB, the MDT Case Conceptualization moves to address the deactivation of the youngsters modes. Following through the mode activation worksheet and inserting the already identified information into the appropriate boxes, William’s experiences became clearer. By providin g a visual representation, the worksheet clearly demonstrates the overwhelming nature of William’s cognitive system (preconscious processing, perceptions, beliefs, motivational schema), physiological system, affective schema, and behavioral schema all activating simultaneously. The deactivation of William’s modes was evident. Addressing his unbalanced, dichotomous beliefs would prevent the rest of the sequence from occurring. This meant that by balancing his beliefs, William could prevent his negative behavior from happening.

If William perceived that he could be in a situation where he may be confronted or reprimanded, his anxiety would increase and he would emotionally shut down. Anticipating the confrontation set in motion the cognitive, affective, behavioral, and physiological processes.

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

209

Although William may not be consciously thinking about confrontation (and may actually be focused on another activity), an attempt to elicit his thought at this point would generate the same information as if he were actively thinking about the anticipated event. He would express anger about the upcoming perceived confrontation or attack on his vulnerability. He would be able to discuss that he has a dichotomous belief that had been activated. He would be able to identify the fear that was endorsed related to his anger and that he perceived physical danger from the perceived upcoming situation.

As the time of the perceived confrontation nears, he would have a conscious fear or threat of being a victim and was also fearful that he would become verbally and/or physically aggressive in order to protect himself. The situation appeared threatening (real or perceived) based on his life experiences. He was fearful of his own actions in this situation and worried that he would later feel humiliated by the outcome of the situation. At a later time, when William is no longer confronted with the dangers of the situation, he is not experiencing the fears of the perceived situation. The distance from the dangerous situation represents the Woody and Rachman, (1994) concept of a “safety signal.” When the parameters of the same situation recur the pattern of fears ↔ avoids beliefs is repeated. Reviewing the fear reaction pattern in William, using A.T. Beck’s (1996) analysis of modes, the activating circumstances are directly related to the anticipated event and the perception of the re- victimization of the meeting. These circumstances are processed through the orienting component of the “primal mode relevant to danger” -- the imagined risk of being victimized, beaten and/or letting someone else control him. As this related fear is activated, the various systems of the mode are also activated and energized. During the physiological manifestation of the activation of the mode, William becomes tense, grinds his teeth, has involuntary muscle movements, has increasingly intense headaches, tightened facial muscles, and his hands and legs shake and move around, his fists may tighten, and his anxiety increases. The actual progression of the mode activates as William nears the time of the group or meeting, i.e., his orienting schemas signal danger ahead. This system is based on the perception of danger of victimization/vulnerability and is sufficient to activate all the systems of the mode. The affective system generates rapid ly increasing levels of anxiety. The motivational system signals the impulse and the flight/fight signal, increasing the attack or avoid response and the responses of his physiological system, including grinding of his teeth, involuntary muscle movements, tachycardia, etc.

William becomes aware of his distressing feelings at this point and he is often unable to activate his own cognitive controls, or “voluntary controls” to override this “primal” reaction and thus be able to mediate the conflict. Once he is able to mediate the fears and avoidance, he is able to participate in a supportive meeting and the anxiety begins to de-escalate.

William’s interpretation of his physiological sensations magnifies his fears of the anticipated physical and psychological re-victimization. Throughout the process of the feedback that he received from his bodily sensations, the flush anxious feelings, the powerful fear of loss of control and the sequel of physiological responses, he responds to these sensations in a fear reaction. This fear is compounded by the events that lead to another fear, which is the fear of feeling humiliated by the perceived threat of victimization/vulnerability and loss of control in the presence of other people.

The final step in the MDT Case Conceptualization is completing the Functionally Based Treatment Development Form. This form literally walks the client through how to balance dysfunctional beliefs and attempts to consider a more functional “healthy belief”. The form is written from left to right demonstrating to the therapist each step in the process of developing competing beliefs for the youngster. First, the therapist identifies the new healthy beliefs, then identifying the thoughts that will reinforce the

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

210

new beliefs, developing compensatory strategies, reinforcement of behaviors, and most importantly, the V-C-R for each new healthy belief. The VCR is simply validation, clarification and redirection to a possible alternative belief. The Functional Treatment development form is implemented right to left, beginning with the V-C-R to develop new thinking, new behaviors, and new beliefs. The therapist breaks the process into the smallest steps necessary, by actually completing a task analysis on the client’s potentially healthy competing beliefs. The therapist and the client have a scripted methodology for the youngster and his parents or staff to follow in aiding him in developing new beliefs, one step at a time.

An integral part of MDT is the concept of validation, clarification, and redirection (VCR). Validation was defined by Linehan (1993), as "the therapist’s ability to uncover the validity within the client’s beliefs." The grain of truth reflects the client’s perception of reality and their current belief. The truth in this reality needs to be validated to clarify the content of his responses, and also to clarify the beliefs that are activated. It is important to understand and agree with the “grain of truth” in the clarification.

There are numerous continuums implemented, as scales from 1 to 10 to evaluate areas such as truth, trust, fear, and beliefs. These continuums are essential to MDT in that they give both the client and the therapist an empirical measure of the client’s measured perception of truth.

Teaching a youth who engages in dichotomous thinking that their perceptions can fall within the range of a continuum on a scale of 1 or a 10 scale is extremely validating and is the basis for a positive redirection to other possibilities for the client. This is a form of MDT mindfulness. The youngster is trained to be aware of how he feels at each movement. Being aware of his feelings is essential for the youngster to accept honesty his behavior in the moment. All of these forms are sequential and found in the clinicians MDT manual. In William’s case, he was able to develop healthier beliefs due to his therapist and all staff members working with him using the V-C-R as described in his treatment plan, originating from his Functionally Based Treatment Development Form. For example, take William’s belief about his inability to trust anyone outside the family. Validating his fears of not trusting anyone outside of the family, clarifying that he could trust one person outside the family at a time, and redirecting him to use the trust scales to objectively measure his level of trust for others, allowed William to open his mind to possibilit ies, thereby balancing his beliefs about trust. The process also taught William how to balance his beliefs for himself. As a result, he developed a new belief, to trust some people some of the time.

Results

William’s residential treatment milieu included DBT skills groups twice a week, individual therapy once a week, and psycho-educational model (PEM) Social Skills Training both during school and on the residential unit. He was in DBT for 13 months for which he averaged 10.92 holds per month, 9.38 incidents of physical aggression per month and 7.61 incidents of self-harming behavior per month. Due to his limited progress, he was then transferred from DBT to MDT individual therapy to address his aggressive behaviors. His transition from DBT to MDT indiv idual therapy was smooth. After six months the inception of MDT, William’s physical holds were reduced to an average 2 holds per month, 1.67 incidents of physical aggression per month and 0.67 incidents of self-harming behavior per month.

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

211

Table 1. Descriptive Statistics

Holds Physical Aggression Self-Harming Behaviors

Mar-04 11 11 8

Apr-04 12 9 7

May-04 11 11 6

Jun-04 12 10 8

Jul-04 13 9 5

Aug-04 12 10 9

Sep-04 11 8 7

Oct-04 10 11 8

Nov-04 11 12 11

Dec-04 12 10 10

Jan-05 15 10 12

Feb-05 12 11 5

Mar-05 13 9 8

avg. DBT 10.92308 9.384615 7.615385

Apr-05 5 3 2

May-05 2 1 1

Jun-05 1 0 0

Jul-05 1 1 1

Aug-05 2 2 0

Sep-05 1 0 0

avg. MDT 2 1.166667 0.666667

Table 3: Post-Treatment Avg. Scores and Percent Reduction Across Treatments

DBT MDT Post- T Avg.

Percent Reduced

Post- T Avg.

Percent Reduced

Holds 10.92 0.69% 2 81.69% Physical Aggression

9.38 14.68% 1.17 87.56%

Self-harming Behavior

7.62 4.80% 0.67 91.24%

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

212

After a year with limited progress in reducing his number of holds and self-harming behavior, William was transferred into MDT. Shortly after starting MDT William’s holds reduced by an average of 82.7 %, per month, along with his physical aggression and self-harming behavior which were reduced by 87.56 % and 91.24 % respectively.

Discussion

This case study suggests that in at least this case, MDT was more effective than DBT in reducing physical aggression and self injurious behaviors. This is not suggesting that MDT is superior to DBT other than in the results of this case study. However, MDT was developed for this typology of youngster and there is data suggesting that MDT is could be an effective psychotherapy for adolescents. The authors hope to continue to develop MDT and conduct randomized studies to test its effectiveness as compared to DBT and other interventions.

References

Alford, B.A. and Beck, A.T. (1997). The integrative power of cognitive therapy. New York: Guilford Press.

Table 4: Post-Treatment Reduction in Rates of

Incidents Across Two Treatment Conditions

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

B as

e lin

e ho

ld s

P os

t t re

at m

en t h

ol ds

B as

e lin

e P hy

si ca

l A gg

re ss

io n

P os

t t re

at m

en t P

hy si

ca l A

gg re

ss io

n

B as

e lin

e S el

f- ha

rm in

g B eh

av io

r

P os

t t re

at m

en t S

el f-

ha rm

in g

B eh

av io

r

N u

m b

e r

o f

In c

id e

n ts

DBT

MDT

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

213

Apsche, J.A. (2005). Beck’s theory of modes. International Journal of Behavioral Consultation and Therapy, 1(1), pp. 27-45.

Apsche, J.A., Bass, C.K., Jennings, J.L., Siv, A.M. (2005). International Journal of Behavior

Consultation and Therapy, 1(1), pp. 27-25. Apsche, J.A., Bass, C.K., Jennings, J.L., Murphy, C.J., Hunter, L.A., Siv, A.M. (2005). International

Journal of Behavior Consultation and Therapy. 1(3). pp 101-113. Spring 2005. Apsche, J.A., Bass, C.K., Murphy, C.J., (2004). A comparison of the effectiveness of Mode deactivation

therapy, Cognitive behavior therapy in adolescents with conduct disorders. The Behavior Analyst Today. 5(4). Winter 2004.

Apsche, J.A., Bass, C.K., Jennings, J.L., Siv, A.M. (2005). International Journal of Behavior

Consultation and Therapy 1(1). Winter 2005. pp-27-46. Apsche, J.A. (1999). Thought Change Workbook. Portsmouth, VA: Alternative Behavioral services. Apsche, J.A., Evile, M.M., and Murphy, C.J. (2004). The thought change system: An empirically based

cognitive behavior therapy for male juvenile sex offenders. A pilot study. Thef Behavior Analysis Today, 5(1), 101-107.

Apsche, J.A. and Ward Bailey, S.R. (2004a). Mode Deactivation Therapy: Cognitive-behavioural

therapy for young people with reactive conduct disorders or personality disorders or traits who sexually abuse. In M.C. Calder (Ed.), Children and Young People who Sexually Abuse: New Theory, Research and Practice Developments, pp. 263-287. Lyme Regis, UK: Russell House Publishing.

Apsche, J.A. and Ward Bailey, S.R. (2003). Mode deactivation therapy: A theoretical case analysis

(Part I). The Behavior Analyst Today, 4(3), 342-353. Apsche, J.A. and Ward Bailey, S.R. (2004b). Mode deactivation therapy: A theoretical case analysis

(Part II). The Behavior Analyst Today, 5(1), 395-434. Apsche, J.A. and Ward Bailey, S.R. (2004c). Mode deactivation therapy: A theoretical case analysis

(Part III). The Behavior Analyst Today, 5(3), 314-332. Beck, A.T. (1996). Beyond belief: A theory of modes, personality and psychopathology. In P.M.

Salkovaskis (Ed.), Frontiers of cognitive therapy, (pp. 1-25). New York: Guilford Press. Beck, A.T. and Freeman, A. (1990). Cognitive therapy of personality disorders. New York: Guilford

Press. Beck, A.T., Freeman, A., Davis, D.D. and Associates. (2004). Cognitive Therapy of Personality

Disorders. New York, Guilford Press. Beck, A.T., Freeman, A., Davis, D.D. and Associates. (2004). Cognitive Therapy of Personality

Disorders. New York, Guilford Press. Boesky, L.M. (2002). Juvenile offenders with mental health disorders: Who are they and what do we do

with them? Lanham, MD: American Correctional Association.

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

214

Dodge, K.A., Lochman, J.E., Harnish, J.D., Petti, G.S. (1997). Reactive and proactive aggression in

school children and psychiatrically impaired chronically assaultive youth. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 106 (1), 37-51.

Freeman, A., Pretzer, J., Fleming, B., and Simon, K.M. (1990). Clinical applications of cognitive therapy.

New York: Plenum. Henggeler, S.W., Schoenwald, S.K., Borduin, C.M., Rowland, M.D. and Cunningham, P.B. (1998).

Multisystemic treatment of antisocial behavior in children and adolescents. New York: Guilford Press.

Johnson, J.G., Cohen, P., Brown, J., Smailes, E.M., and Bernstein, D.P. (1999). Associations between

four types of childhood neglect and personality disorder symptoms during adolescence and early adulthood: Findings of a community-based longitudinal study. Archives of General Psychiatry, 14, 171-120.

Kazdin, A.E. and Weisz, J.R. (2003). Evidenced-based psychotherapies for children and adolescents.

New York: Guilford Press. Koenigsberg, H.W., Harvey, P.D., Mitropoulou, V., Antonia, N.S., Goodman, M., Silverman, J., Serby,

M., Schopick, F. and Siever, L. (2001). Are the interpersonal and identity disturbances in the borderline personality disorder criteria linked to the traits of affective instability and impulsivity? Journal of Personality, 15(4), 358-370.

Kohlenberg, R.J. and Tsai, M. (1993). Functional Analytic Psychotherapy: A behavioral approach to

intensive treatment. In W. O’Donahue and L. Krasner (Ed)., Theories of behavior therapy: Exploring behavior change (pp. 638-640). Washington, D.C.: American Psychological Association.

Linehan, M.M. (1993). Treating Borderline Personality disorder: The dialectical approach. New

York: Guilford Press. Lynch, T.R.,Morse, J.Q., Mendelson, T., Robbins, C.J. (2003). Dialectial behavior therapy for depressed

older adults: A randomized pilot study. American Journal of Geriatric Psychiatry, 11(1). 33-45. Swenson, C.C., Henggeler, S.W., Schoenwald, S.K., Kaufman, K.L., and Randall, J. (1998). Changing the social ecologies of adolescent sexual offenders: Implications of the success of multisystemic therapy in treating serious antisocial behavior in adolescents. Child Maltreatment, 3, 330-339. Trupin,E.W., Stewart, D.G.,Beach, B,Boesky,L. (2002) Effectiveness of a dialectial behavior therapy program for incarcerated female juvenile offenders. Child and Adolescent Mental Health, 7, 121- 127. Young, J.E., Klosko, J.S. and Weishaar, M.E. (2003). Schema therapy: A practitioner’s guide. New

York: Guilford Press. Author Contact Information:

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

International Journal of Behavioral and Consultation Therapy Volume 1, No. 3, Fall, 2005

215

Jack A. Apsche, Ed.D., ABPP. Apsche Center for Evidenced Based Psychotherapy 111 South Main Street, Yardley, PA 19067 [email protected]; [email protected] www.ApscheCenter.com (215) 321- 4072 Alexander M. Siv, M.A. Brightside for Families and Children 2112 Riverdale Street West Springfield, MA 01089 [email protected]; [email protected] (413) 827-4327 Susan C. Matteson, LCSW, ACSW TheraCare Behavioral Health Services 6981 North Park Drive Pennsauken, NJ 08109 [email protected] (856) 371-1325

ADVERTISING IN BAO JOURNALS

The prices for advertising in one issue are as follows:

1/4 Page: $50.00 1/2 Page: $100.00 vertical or horizontal Full Page: $200.00

If you wish to run the same ad in multiple issues for the year, you are eligible for the following discount:

1/4 Pg.: $40 - per issue 1/2 Pg.: $75 - per issue -vertical or horizontal

Full Page: $150.00-per issue

An additional one time layout/composition fee of $25.00 is applicable

For more information, or place an ad, contact Halina Dziewolska by phone at (215) 462-6737 or e -mail at: [email protected]

T hi

s do

cu m

en t i

s co

py ri

gh te

d by

th e

A m

er ic

an P

sy ch

ol og

ic al

A ss

oc ia

tio n

or o

ne o

f i ts

a lli

ed p

ub lis

he rs

. T

hi s

ar tic

le is

in te

nd ed

s ol

el y

fo r t

he p

er so

na l u

se o

f t he

in di

vi du

al u

se r a

nd is

n ot

to b

e di

ss em

in at

ed b

ro ad

ly .

DBT and Female Juvenile Offenders.pdf

E¡ectiveness of a Dialectical Behaviour Therapy Program for Incarcerated Female Juvenile O¡enders

EricW.Trupin1, David G. Stewart1, Brad Beach2 & Lisa Boesky1

1 University of Washington, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, 146 N. Canal Street, Suite 100, Seattle, WA 98103, USA 2 Echo Glen Children’s Center, 33010 SE 99th Street, Snoqualmie, WA 98065, USA

Background: Female offenders incarcerated in Washington State have demonstrated higher rates of mental health needs than boys. Linehan’s (1993a, b) Dialectical Behavioural Therapy (DBT) is an effective treatment for adult women with Borderline Personality Disorder. DBT utilises a combination of skills training, problem solving, and validation to enable patients to reduce self-destructive, impulsive and aggressive behaviours. The prevalence of similar emotional problems among female juvenile offenders suggests that DBT may be an effective strategy for this population. The State of Washington Governor’s Juvenile Justice Advisory Committee sponsored a collaborative project conducted by a research team from the University of Wash- ington and the staff at the Juvenile Rehabilitation Administration’s Echo Glen Children’s Center to evaluate the effectiveness of a DBT intervention. Method: Pre-post intervention records were compared for female offenders from a mental health and a general population unit where DBT was implemented. Youth on a third unit served as a comparison group. Youth behaviour problems, staff punitive responses were compared before and after the intervention period. Results: Youth behaviour problems and use of punitive responses by staff decreased compared to the year prior on one cottage (unit) while no behaviour or staff changes were noted on another. Conclusions: The evaluation demonstrated the efficacy of providing DBT to female offenders in a residential setting and yielded mixed results on behaviour change during the study period that may relate to quality of training and prior youth behaviour problems.

Keywords: Juvenile justice; mental health; juvenile offenders

Introduction

In the United States the juvenile justice system has multiple and at times conflicting responsibilities. These include holding a youth accountable for their delin- quent behaviour, punishing a youth for breaking the law, keeping a youth out of a community to prevent further criminal behaviour and providing rehabilitation so the youth will learn pro-social behaviours inconsis- tent with criminal activities. Accountability, punish- ment, deterrence, restoration, public safety, and rehabilitation are the core obligations of juvenile jus- tice. The system was not designed to provide compre- hensive treatment for youth with mental health and substance abuse disorders.

However, over the past two decades there has been a steady and significant increase of youth exhibiting major psychiatric disorders who come into contact with the juvenile justice system. Numerous studies have demonstrated that at least 20% of all youth entering the justice system exhibit serious mental or emotional problems, with the majority also experiencing a co- occurring substance use disorder (Otto et al., 1992; Loeber & Farrington, 1998; Stewart & Trupin, 2000).

The so-called ‘tough on crime’ policies adopted by state and federal legislatures in the 1980s have lead to a major increase in mandatory sentences of youth to de-

tention facilities. Juvenile judges’ previous capacity to use discretion in sentencing seriously disturbed youth to community-based treatment was significantly reduced. In many communities access to community mental health services for youth who are minorities, have both mental health and substance use disorders, and have delinquent histories were and are non exist- ent. Thus, even in circumstances where diversion to community placements are within the purview of a judge, they often justify sentencing these youth to se- cure detention facilities just so they can receive mental health services.

Mental health issues among female juvenile offenders

A large proportion of juvenile offenders have serious emotional disturbances (Elliot, Huizinga, & Menard, 1989; Loeber, Wung, & Keenan, 1993). Although con- duct disorders appear to be the most prominent diag- noses among youth in juvenile justice settings, studies have shown the prevalence of affective disorders, includingmajordepression,bipolardisorder,dysthymia, and cyclothymia to range from 32 to 78% (McManus et al., 1984; Wierson, Forehand, & Frame, 1992; Edens & Otto, 1997). As many as 70% may have substance

Child and Adolescent Mental Health Volume 7, No. 3, 2002, pp. 121–127

� 2002 Association for Child Psychology and Psychiatry. Published by Blackwell Publishers, 108 Cowley Road, Oxford OX4 1JF, UK and 350 Main Street, Malden, MA 02148, USA

abuse or dependence, and the symptoms – and even the diagnosis –of borderline personality disorder are com- mon among incarcerated adolescents and young adults (McManus et al., 1984; Gibbs, 1982). Yet, criminal justice systems typically do not have the knowledge base or resources to appropriately treat, let alone re- habilitate, these young people. Confinement, alone, does not facilitate improvement in mental health.

As the number of girls entering the juvenile justice system continues to increase, the complexity of their health, educational and treatment needs has been no- ted by a variety of professionals (Timmons-Mitchell et al., 1997). Factors such as abuse/victimisation, substance use/abuse, difficulty in school, and gang related activities have been identified as significant risks for delinquency in girls (Prescott, 1997). A survey over two time periods found girls in juvenile justice fa- cilities displayed an increased need for mental health assistance compared to the boys (84% vs 27%). These girls suffered a significantly higher rate of conduct, mood or substance use disorder. Almost half of the girls had an anxiety disorder (Timmons-Mitchell et al., 1997). Similarly, in a statewide assessment, female of- fenders incarcerated in Washington State have dem- onstrated higher rates of mental health needs than boys (Stewart & Trupin, 2001). In this study, female offend- ers were particularly more likely to report multiple clinically significant mental health symptoms at intake to state custody and were more likely to report signifi- cant traumatic experiences than male offenders. Table 1 summarises the results of that study.

Links between emotional dysregulation and delinquency

The high rates of co-occurring behavioural, emotional and substance use disorders among incarcerated fe- male offenders is not surprising given current devel- opmental theories for each type of disturbance. These theories point to common pathways leading to emotional dysregulation (i.e., mood disturbance, af- fective lability, uncontrolled anger), behavioural dys- control (i.e., violent aggression, self-harm, poor impulse control) and self-destructive substance use, sexual and criminal behaviours in adolescence. Mezzich et al. (1997) reported that in adolescent female substance abusers, behavioural dysregulation, negative affectivity and internalising symptoms were related to violent behaviour. Studies of boys have also shown the rela- tionship between affect dysregulation and antisocial behaviour (Snyder, Schrepferman, & St. Peter, 1997). The co-occurrence of affective dysregulation and aggressive antisocial behaviour is prevalent enough to

lead to the suggestion by some that disruptive beha- viour disorders are a form of affective disorder (Cole & Zahn-Waxler, 1992). In addition to the direct link be- tween emotional dysregulation and antisocial beha- viour, disturbed affect among adolescents increases the potential of suicidal ideation and behaviour (Zlot- nick et al., 1997). Among incarcerated adolescents the consequences of emotional dysregulation, suicidal ideation and aggressive behaviour can include segre- gation from the general population, increased time incarcerated and lack of access to school, vocational and other rehabilitative services. Strategies to reduce the impairment caused by emotional disturbance are therefore important elements in the rehabilitation of juvenile offenders.

A validated treatment for severe emotional dysregulation DBT is, in essence, the application of a wide assortment of cognitive-behavioural strategies combined with a philosophical emphasis on dialectics, the aim being to find the synthesis between two seemingly opposite po- sitions. This translates into accepting patients ‘where they are’ while, at the same time, benevolently de- manding that they change. DBT therapists balance strategies of support and acceptance with confrontation and change. Treatment is focused on validation of pa- tients’ current emotional, cognitive and behavioural responses as understandable in the context of the pa- tient’s skill level. In DBT, the application of skills is encouraged and coached in all aspects of treatment, in an effort to reframe problem behaviours as simply ‘in- effective’ in comparison to a more effective use of skills. The therapist acts as both coach and consultant to the patient, and actively works to cultivate a positive in- terpersonal and collaborative relationship throughout the course of treatment.

Generalising DBT The prevalence of emotional dysregulation including symptoms of BPD among incarcerated female juvenile offenders suggests that DBT may be an effective strat- egy for this population. This study reports the results of a trial of DBT with female juvenile offenders in state custody on two treatment units. The adaptation of an outpatient treatment modality designed for adult wo- men with BPD to a residential population of non-spe- cifically diagnosed female offenders was guided by previous work in generalising and adapting DBT to other settings and populations. Barley et al. (1993) describe the successful adaptation of DBT to an inpa- tient treatment program. Staff who were primarily psychodynamic in orientation were able to implement DBT skill training techniques and reduce rates of parasuicidal behaviour on the inpatient unit. Clinically, DBT has also been adapted to adolescent inpatient and outpatient treatment. These successful adaptations demonstrate that DBT is generalisable across settings (inpatient, forensic), and populations (forensic, adoles- cent, non-specific diagnostic groups). Research has also demonstrated that DBT can be disseminated among clinicians with varying backgrounds and func- tions. Hawkins and Sinha (1998) reported studies of DBT dissemination to mental health staff in a statewide

Table 1. Indicators of mental health needs among incarcerated juvenile offenders

Females (N ¼ 187)

Males (N ¼ 1841)

Report clinically significant levels of symptoms at intake

62% 33%

Significant traumatic experience(s) 78% 52% Prior mental health treatment 79% 72% Substance abuse 70% 66%

122 Eric W. Trupin et al.

program and Linehan and her colleagues have demon- strated the effectiveness of DBT training for clinical teams from a variety of settings.

Adapting DBT for incarcerated female juvenile offenders For the present project four staff from the mental health cottage (unit) of a Juvenile Rehabilitation Administra- tion (JRA) facility, along with two research staff, re- ceived extensive training (80 hours) in DBT from Linehan and colleagues. Staff from a second cottage and the remaining staff from the mental health cottage received 16 hours of introductory training in DBT from Linehan Associates, in addition to 1–2 hours of on-site instruction and case consultation, provided weekly throughout the year.

Following the initial 40 hours of training the mental health cottage staff began the process of adapting DBT to adolescents, and to meet the requirements of a resi- dential, forensic setting. Behavioural targets were changed to reflect the mental health needs of female juvenile offenders. Targetting problem behaviours oc- curring on the unit, and focusing heavily on offense related behaviours in individual sessions are examples of changes we made relative to this specific population and setting.

Specific categories of resident behaviour that were targeted included:

• life-threatening behaviours (suicidality and self- mutilation);

• unit-destructive behaviours (violence, oppositional/ defiance, victimising behaviours);

• treatment-interfering behaviours (excessive de- manding, non-compliance, and non-participation);

• quality of life-interfering behaviours (high-risk sex- ual behaviours, mental health problems, offence related behaviours, and behaviours likely to limit placement options).

A typical youth seen in this facility is described by the following vignette:

Dee was a 17-year-old Caucasian female who was committed to the facility for assaulting a roommate while in foster care. She hit the victim on the head with a rock. Because of a history of psychiatric hospitalisa- tion and Axis I diagnoses (including bipolar disorder, conduct disorder, post traumatic stress disorder) as well as Borderline features, Dee was admitted to the mental health cottage. She was placed on suicide pre- cautions after she cut her arm with a broken pen, an act precipitated by her teacher’s refusal to allow her to lis- ten to the radio.

DBT is unique in its inclusion of strategies to ‘treat the therapist’ by providing support while targeting specific behaviours of staff that are predictive of neg- ative outcomes for residents. These include: extreme rigidity or flexibility, poor interpersonal limits, favour- itism, and extreme irreverence (Linehan, 1993a). Re- ducing the staff’s reliance on punishment, restriction and isolation as the primary response to emotional dysregulation (evidenced by suicide attempt, aggres- sion, and noncompliance) was a primary target of the intervention.

Applying new contingencies to support new behav- iours, DBT skills were taught, coached and actively reinforced, while old ineffective behaviours were put in an extinction schedule. Five categories of skills were taught, including: Core Mindfulness Skills, Interper- sonal Effectiveness Skills, Emotion Regulation Skills, Distress Tolerance Skills, and Self-Management Skills. A detailed description of the skills training procedures is available in the DBT skills training manual (Linehan, 1993b). Each of the five skills was taught over a period of four weeks, utilising a group format. Groups com- prised two staff and up to eight residents, and lasted from 60–90 minutes, once or twice per week. Homework assignments, which were given to residents on a weekly basis, consisted mainly of filling out a daily Diary Card that recorded the frequency at which each skill was attempted. Residents were reinforced for their partici- pation in-group, for practising the skills within the cottage and for soliciting skills coaching from staff. Staff also received reinforcement for reading about and learning DBT, volunteering to co-facilitate skills groups, and for applying DBT interventions on the floor with residents. Through ongoing training and consultation with staff, efforts were made to continuously expand the application of DBT-based interventions and competen- cies within the cottages.

In the case of Dee, the DBT intervention allowed the staff to gain insight into her behaviour and design a program that ultimately eliminated her parasuicidal behaviour and time on suicide precautions. Dee and the staff were able to functionally analyse her para-suicide attempts and identify a clear sequence of emotional and behavioural events that led to these behaviours. The attempt described above, for example, was found to be precipitated not only by the confrontation with the teacher, but also by Dee’s distress over not being able to reach her mother, a sleepless night spent ruminating, and the belief that the teacher’s denial of radio privi- leges was a personal attack. The staff also learned that their reaction to her parasuicidal behaviour, including frequent checks, one-on-one sessions where Dee was encouraged to vent her anger, removal of attention when she calmed down (‘Finally, WE can take a break!’) were reinforcing her behaviour. The combination of staff behaviour change and client skills acquisition allowed Dee to eventually get a job on campus and graduate from the high school, events that were previously unheard of on the mental health unit.

Research questions The overarching goal of the project was to increase staff’s ability to successfully intervene with the most difficult behavioural and emotional problems of incar- cerated female offenders, enabling them to maintain participation in rehabilitation services. The aims of the DBT project are stated below and formed the basis of the evaluation.

1. Do female offenders who receive the DBT interven- tion improve their behaviour while incarcerated?

2. Will staff use of restrictive and punitive actions be reduced by implementation of DBT?

3. Will participants in DBT decrease risk assessment scores compared to matched comparison youth?

Original Article: DBT with Female Juvenile Offenders 123

4. Will youth who receive DBT increase access to rehabilitative services in the institution?

Method

Participants Adolescent females incarcerated at a State of Wash- ington Juvenile Rehabilitation Administration facility were the source of participants in this study. Partici- pants were recruited from three treatment cottages in the centre. DBT was implemented at two of the cottages, one a mental health treatment unit and one a general population unit. The third cottage was a general popu- lation unit that served as a ‘treatment as usual’ com- parison site. All three cottages were locked facilities offering educational, vocational and recreational pro- grams in addition to group meetings to discuss issues of daily living and cottage rules. All cottages used a be- havioural modification program designed to reward compliance with rules and appropriate social interac- tions and to punish rule infractions. Twenty-two par- ticipants were recruited from the Mental Health Cottage (MHC), 23 from the General Population Cottage with DBT (GPCD) and 15 from the General Population Comparison Cottage (GPCC). Records for an additional 30 female offenders were utilised for comparison on baseline offence and mental health screen measures. These records were accessed through JRA, without using names or identifiers.

Measures Intake interviews were conducted with all new residents on the three cottages following informed consent. Initial interviews included the Diagnostic Interview Schedule for Children (DISC: Shaffer, Schwab, & Fisher, 1993) a structured interview assessing DSM-IV psychiatric di- agnoses, the Child and Adolescent Functional Assess- ment Scale (CAFAS: Hodges, 1995), a rating of functional impairment based on staff interview and chart review. Daily Behaviour logs were kept on each cottage for each youth. A staff member, using standar- dised shift reports and charts, noted incidents of room confinement, school suspension, suicide precautions, parasuicidal acts (self-mutilation, suicide attempt, and threatened suicide) classroom disruption, and ag- gressive behaviour each day. For the mental health cottage these behaviour logs were available for the year preceding the DBT project as well as the study period.

Composite variables of youth behaviour problems (i.e., aggression + parasuicidal acts + classroom disruption) and staff punitive actions (i.e., room confinement + suicide precaution levels + classroom suspension) were developed. Community Risk Assessment Scores (CRA), a measure used by JRA for placement and security level, were accessed through JRA’s computer database at intake and at 90 days follow-up. The Massachusetts Youth Screening Instrument (MAYSI; Grisso, 1999), a measure administered by JRA screening youth mental health symptoms, was collected from the JRA computer database at intake and 90 days follow-up.

Results

Participant characteristics are presented in Table 2. While the initial design of the evaluation divided the participants into DBT and non-DBT groups, it became clear early in the project that implementation of DBT at the mental health and general population cottages was not equivalent. The MHC staff received more DBT training than the staff on the GPCD (80 vs 16 hours). In addition, examination of initial comparisons of func- tional impairment revealed significant differences in baseline functioning between female offenders on the three cottages. Despite equivalent demographic char- acteristics, rates of Axis I diagnosis and number of prior offences (Table 2), female offenders on the mental health cottage were significantly more likely to demon- strate impairment in mood disturbance (v2 ¼ 7:78, p ¼ .007), self-harmful actions and ideation (v2 ¼ 3:80, p ¼ .05), and thought disturbance (v2 ¼ 5:72, p ¼ .017) (see Figure 1). DISC results also demonstrated differ- ences among the samples. Girls on the MHC had higher rates of Mood Disturbance (33%), Disruptive Behaviour Disorders (83%) and Substance Use Disorder (62%), while the GPCD youth were more likely to have Anxiety Disorders (58%) and Substance Use Disorder (75%). The differences between youth on the MHC and GPCD, the intervention cottages, suggested that different out- comes might be expected from the intervention. There- fore, analyses were performed separately for youth on the MHC and GPCD.

Do female offenders who receive the DBT intervention improve their behaviour while incarcerated? This question was tested using the composite meas- ures of youth behaviour problems. Behaviour logs from

Table 2. Participant characteristics

Mental Health Cottage-DBT

General Population-DBT

Matched comparison

Number of participants 22 23 45 Age 14.8 15.5 15.2 % White 50 50 59 % African American 15 22 23 % Native American 15 9 9 % Hispanic 10 14 7 % Axis I Diagnosis 78 75 50* # Prior offences 6 5 7 % Extraordinary sentence 57 15 40

* Note: n¼15 for participants in this condition receiving DISCs.

124 Eric W. Trupin et al.

the general population comparison cottage were not included in the analyses due to an absence of reported disruptive behaviour on the cottage. Curve estimation regression analyses were used to estimate the signifi- cance of change in rate of behaviour on the two DBT cottages. Youth on the MHC demonstrated significant reduction in behaviour problems during the 10 months of the DBT study (R2 ¼ :55, p ¼ .01, while youth on the GPCD did not demonstrate a significant reduction in behaviour problems (R2 ¼ :01, p ¼ .77). These trends are illustrated in Figures 2 and 3. Notably, the youth

on the MHC demonstrated significantly higher overall rates of behaviour problems than youth on the GPCD.

Will staff use of restrictive and punitive actions be reduced by implementation of DBT? The impact of DBT on staff use of punitive actions was examined using curve estimation regression analyses with the staff action composite variable. The compar- ison cottage did not report use of restrictive punitive actions such as room confinement and suicide pre- cautions. Staff punitive actions did not demonstrate a reduction during the DBT intervention on the MHC (R2 ¼ :046, p ¼ .55) and actually showed a significant increase on the GPCD (R2 ¼ :74, p ¼ .002).

The availability of behaviour logs for the year prior to DBT on the MHC allowed comparison of pre-post effects of the intervention and additional tests of the questions that DBT would change youth and staff behaviour. A time-series autoregression analysis was used to compare the monthly rates of youth behaviour problems and staff punitive actions during the 10 months of the DBT project and the same 10-month period during the prior year. Results showed that while overall rates of behaviour problems did not differ between the DBT and non-DBT year on the MHC (b ¼ 0:03, T ¼ 1.13, p ¼ .27), staff punitive actions were significantly lower during the DBT year (b ¼ �0:03, T ¼ -2.22, p ¼ .04). The significant decrease in staff punitive actions on the MHC is illustrated in Figure 4.

Will participants in DBT decrease risk assessment scores compared to matched comparison youth? To evaluate the impact of DBT on risk scores a repeated measure analysis of variance was conducted. Initial and follow-up CRA scores were compared for female offenders in the DBT intervention with comparison youth matched for initial mental health and risk-score severity. These results demonstrated no significant difference risk score change by DBT condition (F ¼ .997, p ¼ .37), although there was a significant within subjects decrease in risk scores across groups (F ¼ .17.76, p < :001). The risk change by group dif- ference is illustrated in Figure 5.

Figure 1. Baseline functional impairment scores by treatment condition

Figure 3. Youth behaviour problem composite (agression + classroom disruption) on the general population DBT cottage during the DBT intervention

Figure 2. Youth behaviour problem composite (agression + parasuicide + classroom disruption) on the mental health cottage during the DBT intervention

Original Article: DBT with Female Juvenile Offenders 125

Will youth who receive DBT increase access to rehabilitative services in the institution? This question was examined by comparing rates of participation in various on-campus programs for youth in the MHC, where pre and post DBT data were available. During the DBT intervention the number of youths participating in these rehabilitative services was increased. Nine compared to zero youth from the MHC were employed full time on campus. Six compared to one youth completed a GED and six as opposed to one youth completed a drug and alcohol program. Most significantly, in the year prior to DBT only one youth

had transitioned back to an open cottage from the MHC designed as a crisis stabilisation unit; seven adoles- cants were able to be transitioned back to open campus during the DBT year.

Discussion

This study evaluated the effectiveness of a DBT inter- vention on two units of a state juvenile rehabilitation facility for female juvenile offenders. As expected, youth residing in the designated mental health unit initially demonstrated higher rates of severe mood and thought disturbance as well as higher rates of thought disorder than youth on the general population unit receiving DBT. Female offenders on the MHC demonstrated a significant decrease in serious behaviour problems during the 10-month period of the study. Suicidal acts, aggressive behaviour and class disruption decreased throughout the year but were not significantly reduced compared to the prior year on the same unit. One ex- planation for this mixed result is the frequent transfer of new residents to the MHC who are suicidal and/or aggressive, keeping the overall rates of problem beha- viour on the unit high.

Youth in the general population unit who had signi- ficantly fewer behaviour problems did not show a re- duction during the DBT implementation period. Notable among this group was the absence of suicidal, self- mutilating and parasuicidal behaviour-primary targets of DBT. Youth in the non-DBT comparison group did not demonstrate any severe problem behaviour that met the operational definition.

The second primary target of the DBT was to reduce the staff’s use of restrictive punishment including room confinement, suicide precautions and school removal. The DBT intervention was designed to provide the staff with alternatives to room confinement and other pu- nitive actions as primary behavioural management tools. The efficacy of the intervention was tested there- fore by the staff’s willingness to utilise the DBT methods compared to the methods previously available to them. On the MHC the rates of these interventions remained constant during the 10-month DBT period, driven in large part by youth being transferred to the unit on suicide precautions; however, compared to the previous year, the staff’s use of punitive actions was significantly reduced. On the GPCD the staff’s use of restrictive pu- nitive actions increased significantly during the DBT intervention. The staff on this unit used room confine- ment liberally and tended to increase the use as the DBT study continued. Some of this increase was due to a few staff member’s using room confinement as a group punishment for infringements and is evidence of a lack of adherence to the DBT model. This staff also did not receive the full DBT intensive training. The variab- ility of staff’s discretionary use of room confinement is demonstrated by the complete absence of this punish- ment on the non-DBT comparison unit.

Youth on the MHC were able to participate in insti- tutional services like drug and alcohol treatment, em- ployment and even transfer to other units, due in part to reductions in behaviour problems and restrictions during the DBT intervention. Institutionl staff and ad- ministrators identified this as a significant positive outcome.

Figure 4. Staff punitive actions on the mental health cottage during the year prior to the DBT intervention and during the DBT intervention

Figure 5. Risk score change by treatment condition

126 Eric W. Trupin et al.

The DBT intervention did not result in a significant decrease in risk assessment scores. Multiple items comprising the risk assessment scale are fixed (points for crime, number of prior offences, prior drug and al- cohol use and sex offences) and therefore limit the variance in risk scores.

This study was a preliminary examination of out- comes of a DBT intervention and demonstrated mixed results. It appears that with intensive training, moti- vated staff and a population of female offenders who exhibit the types of parasuicidal and aggressive beha- viour that DBT targets, the intervention can be suc- cessful in reducing behaviour problems and increasing staff’s use of therapeutic rather than restrictive and punitive responses. As a result of this change, female offenders who are segregated on a mental health unit may gain more access to valuable rehabilitative services such as substance abuse treatment and employment.

The effectiveness of a DBT intervention is increased when treatment is matched to appropriate behaviour problems (i.e. suicidal, extremely aggressive and non compliant) and implemented with intensive training. Future studies should examine the implementation of DBT, comparing equally emotionally and behaviourally disturbed youth and equally trained and committed staff who are randomly assigned to DBT vs treatment as usual. Changing institutional behaviour is only a first- step in designing effective interventions. Ultimately, the success of this intervention will be measured by the ability of youth to transition successfully to the com- munity and generalise the skills learned in the DBT program. Families, providers and parole officers should be included in the treatment intervention to ensure that this skill set will be reinforced The authors of this study will test the implementation of DBT skills training within an outpatient multisystemic therapy program for recid- ivist juvenile offenders with co-occurring disorders.

References

Barley, W. D., Buie, S. E. Peterson, E. W., Hollingsworth, A. S., Griva, M., Hickerson, S. C., Lawson, J. E., & Bailey, B. J. (1993). Development of an inpatient cognitive-behavioural treatment program for borderline personality disorder. Journal of Personality Disorders, 7, 232–240.

Cole, P. M., & Zahn-Waxler, C. (1992). Emotional dysregu- lation in disruptive behavior disorders. In D. Cicchetti & S. L. Toth (Eds.), Developmental perspectives on depression. Rochester symposium on developmental psychopathology, 4 (pp. 173–209). Rochester, NY: University of Rochester Press.

Edens, J. F., & Otto, R. K. (1997). Prevalence of mental disor- ders among youth in the juvenile justice system: Focal point. A National Bulletin of Family Support and Children’s Mental Health. Portland State University, Research and Training Center.

Elliott, D. S., Huizinga, D., & Menard, S. (1989). Multiple problem youth: Delinquency, substance abuse and mental health problems. New York: Springer-Verlag.

Gibbs, J. T. (1982). Personality patterns of delinquent females: Ethnic and sociocultural variations. Journal of Clinical Psy- chology, 38, 198–206.

Grisso, T. (1999). Juvenile offenders and mental illness. Psychiatry, Psychology and Law, 6, 143–151.

Hawkins, K. A., & Sinha, R. (1998). Can line clinicians master the conceptual complexities of dialectical behavior therapy? An evaluation of a State Department of Mental Health training program. Journal of Psychiatric Research, 32, 379– 384.

Hodges, K. (1995). Child and adolescent functional assessment scale. Nashville, TN: Vanderbilt Child Mental Health Servi- ces Evaluation Project.

Linehan, M. M. (1993a). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of borderline personality disorder. New York: Guilford Press.

Linehan, M. M. (1993b). Skills training manual for treating borderline personality disorder. New York: Guilford Press.

Loeber, R., & Farrington, D. P. (1998). Never too early, never too late: Risk factors and successful interventions for ser- ious and violent juvenile offenders. Studies on Crime and Crime Prevention, 7, 7–30.

Loeber, R., Wung, P., & Keenan, K. (1993). Developmental pathways in disruptive child behavior. Development and Psychopathology, 5, 103–133.

McManus, M., Alessi, N. E., Grapentine, W. L., & Brickman, A. (1984). Psychiatric disturbance in serious delinquents. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry, 23, 602–615.

Mezzich, A. C., Giancola, P. R., Tarter, R. E., Lu, S., Parks, S. M., & Barrett, C. M. (1997). Violence, suicidality, and alcohol/drug use involvement in adolescent females with a psychoactive substance use disorder and controls. Alco- holism: Clinical and Experimental Research, 21, 1300– 1307.

Otto, R. K., Greenstein, J. J., Johnson, M. K., & Friedman, R. M. (1992). Prevalence of mental disorders among youth in the juvenile justice system. In J. J. Cocozza. (Ed.), Responding to the mental health needs of youth in the juvenile justice system (pp. 7–48). Seattle, WA: The Na- tional Coalition for the Mentally Ill in the Criminal Justice System.

Prescott, L. (1997). Adolescent girls with co-occurring disorders in the juvenile justice system. Delmar, NY: The National GAINS Center for People with Co-Occurring Disorders in the Justice System.

Shaffer, D., Schwab, M. S., & Fisher, W. P. (1993). The Diag- nostic Interview Schedule for Children (DISC R): Prepara- tion, field testing, interrater reliability, and acceptability. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 32, 643–650.

Snyder, J., Schrepferman, L., & St. Peter, C. (1997). Origins of antisocial behavior: Negative reinforcement and affect dys- regulation of behavior as socialization mechanisms in family interaction. Behavior Modification, 21, 187–215.

Stewart, D. G., & Trupin, E. W. (2000, March). Identifying serious mental and emotional disturbance with the MAYSI. In A. Kavanaugh & D. Peuschold (chairs), The Massachu- setts Youth Screening Inventory. Symposium presented at meeting of the American Psychology-Law Society, New Orleans.

Timmons-Mitchell, J., Brown, C., Schultz, S. C., Webster, S. E., Underwood, L. A., & Semple, W. E. (1997). Final report: Results of a three year collaborative effort to assess the mental health needs of youth in the Juvenile justice system in Ohio (unpublished report). Columbus, OH: Ohio Department of Youth Services.

Wierson, M., Forehand, R. L., & Frame, C. L. (1992). Epide- miology and treatment of mental health problems in juvenile delinquents. Advances in Behavior Therapy, 14, 93–120.

Zlotnick, C., Donaldson, D., Spirito, A., & Pearlstein, T. (1997). Affect regulation and suicide attempts in adolescent inpatients. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 36, 793–798.

Original Article: DBT with Female Juvenile Offenders 127

effectivenes of dbt incarcerated female juveniles.pdf

E¡ectiveness of a Dialectical Behaviour Therapy Program for Incarcerated Female Juvenile O¡enders

EricW.Trupin1, David G. Stewart1, Brad Beach2 & Lisa Boesky1

1 University of Washington, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, 146 N. Canal Street, Suite 100, Seattle, WA 98103, USA 2 Echo Glen Children’s Center, 33010 SE 99th Street, Snoqualmie, WA 98065, USA

Background: Female offenders incarcerated in Washington State have demonstrated higher rates of mental health needs than boys. Linehan’s (1993a, b) Dialectical Behavioural Therapy (DBT) is an effective treatment for adult women with Borderline Personality Disorder. DBT utilises a combination of skills training, problem solving, and validation to enable patients to reduce self-destructive, impulsive and aggressive behaviours. The prevalence of similar emotional problems among female juvenile offenders suggests that DBT may be an effective strategy for this population. The State of Washington Governor’s Juvenile Justice Advisory Committee sponsored a collaborative project conducted by a research team from the University of Wash- ington and the staff at the Juvenile Rehabilitation Administration’s Echo Glen Children’s Center to evaluate the effectiveness of a DBT intervention. Method: Pre-post intervention records were compared for female offenders from a mental health and a general population unit where DBT was implemented. Youth on a third unit served as a comparison group. Youth behaviour problems, staff punitive responses were compared before and after the intervention period. Results: Youth behaviour problems and use of punitive responses by staff decreased compared to the year prior on one cottage (unit) while no behaviour or staff changes were noted on another. Conclusions: The evaluation demonstrated the efficacy of providing DBT to female offenders in a residential setting and yielded mixed results on behaviour change during the study period that may relate to quality of training and prior youth behaviour problems.

Keywords: Juvenile justice; mental health; juvenile offenders

Introduction

In the United States the juvenile justice system has multiple and at times conflicting responsibilities. These include holding a youth accountable for their delin- quent behaviour, punishing a youth for breaking the law, keeping a youth out of a community to prevent further criminal behaviour and providing rehabilitation so the youth will learn pro-social behaviours inconsis- tent with criminal activities. Accountability, punish- ment, deterrence, restoration, public safety, and rehabilitation are the core obligations of juvenile jus- tice. The system was not designed to provide compre- hensive treatment for youth with mental health and substance abuse disorders.

However, over the past two decades there has been a steady and significant increase of youth exhibiting major psychiatric disorders who come into contact with the juvenile justice system. Numerous studies have demonstrated that at least 20% of all youth entering the justice system exhibit serious mental or emotional problems, with the majority also experiencing a co- occurring substance use disorder (Otto et al., 1992; Loeber & Farrington, 1998; Stewart & Trupin, 2000).

The so-called ‘tough on crime’ policies adopted by state and federal legislatures in the 1980s have lead to a major increase in mandatory sentences of youth to de-

tention facilities. Juvenile judges’ previous capacity to use discretion in sentencing seriously disturbed youth to community-based treatment was significantly reduced. In many communities access to community mental health services for youth who are minorities, have both mental health and substance use disorders, and have delinquent histories were and are non exist- ent. Thus, even in circumstances where diversion to community placements are within the purview of a judge, they often justify sentencing these youth to se- cure detention facilities just so they can receive mental health services.

Mental health issues among female juvenile offenders

A large proportion of juvenile offenders have serious emotional disturbances (Elliot, Huizinga, & Menard, 1989; Loeber, Wung, & Keenan, 1993). Although con- duct disorders appear to be the most prominent diag- noses among youth in juvenile justice settings, studies have shown the prevalence of affective disorders, includingmajordepression,bipolardisorder,dysthymia, and cyclothymia to range from 32 to 78% (McManus et al., 1984; Wierson, Forehand, & Frame, 1992; Edens & Otto, 1997). As many as 70% may have substance

Child and Adolescent Mental Health Volume 7, No. 3, 2002, pp. 121–127

� 2002 Association for Child Psychology and Psychiatry. Published by Blackwell Publishers, 108 Cowley Road, Oxford OX4 1JF, UK and 350 Main Street, Malden, MA 02148, USA

abuse or dependence, and the symptoms – and even the diagnosis –of borderline personality disorder are com- mon among incarcerated adolescents and young adults (McManus et al., 1984; Gibbs, 1982). Yet, criminal justice systems typically do not have the knowledge base or resources to appropriately treat, let alone re- habilitate, these young people. Confinement, alone, does not facilitate improvement in mental health.

As the number of girls entering the juvenile justice system continues to increase, the complexity of their health, educational and treatment needs has been no- ted by a variety of professionals (Timmons-Mitchell et al., 1997). Factors such as abuse/victimisation, substance use/abuse, difficulty in school, and gang related activities have been identified as significant risks for delinquency in girls (Prescott, 1997). A survey over two time periods found girls in juvenile justice fa- cilities displayed an increased need for mental health assistance compared to the boys (84% vs 27%). These girls suffered a significantly higher rate of conduct, mood or substance use disorder. Almost half of the girls had an anxiety disorder (Timmons-Mitchell et al., 1997). Similarly, in a statewide assessment, female of- fenders incarcerated in Washington State have dem- onstrated higher rates of mental health needs than boys (Stewart & Trupin, 2001). In this study, female offend- ers were particularly more likely to report multiple clinically significant mental health symptoms at intake to state custody and were more likely to report signifi- cant traumatic experiences than male offenders. Table 1 summarises the results of that study.

Links between emotional dysregulation and delinquency

The high rates of co-occurring behavioural, emotional and substance use disorders among incarcerated fe- male offenders is not surprising given current devel- opmental theories for each type of disturbance. These theories point to common pathways leading to emotional dysregulation (i.e., mood disturbance, af- fective lability, uncontrolled anger), behavioural dys- control (i.e., violent aggression, self-harm, poor impulse control) and self-destructive substance use, sexual and criminal behaviours in adolescence. Mezzich et al. (1997) reported that in adolescent female substance abusers, behavioural dysregulation, negative affectivity and internalising symptoms were related to violent behaviour. Studies of boys have also shown the rela- tionship between affect dysregulation and antisocial behaviour (Snyder, Schrepferman, & St. Peter, 1997). The co-occurrence of affective dysregulation and aggressive antisocial behaviour is prevalent enough to

lead to the suggestion by some that disruptive beha- viour disorders are a form of affective disorder (Cole & Zahn-Waxler, 1992). In addition to the direct link be- tween emotional dysregulation and antisocial beha- viour, disturbed affect among adolescents increases the potential of suicidal ideation and behaviour (Zlot- nick et al., 1997). Among incarcerated adolescents the consequences of emotional dysregulation, suicidal ideation and aggressive behaviour can include segre- gation from the general population, increased time incarcerated and lack of access to school, vocational and other rehabilitative services. Strategies to reduce the impairment caused by emotional disturbance are therefore important elements in the rehabilitation of juvenile offenders.

A validated treatment for severe emotional dysregulation DBT is, in essence, the application of a wide assortment of cognitive-behavioural strategies combined with a philosophical emphasis on dialectics, the aim being to find the synthesis between two seemingly opposite po- sitions. This translates into accepting patients ‘where they are’ while, at the same time, benevolently de- manding that they change. DBT therapists balance strategies of support and acceptance with confrontation and change. Treatment is focused on validation of pa- tients’ current emotional, cognitive and behavioural responses as understandable in the context of the pa- tient’s skill level. In DBT, the application of skills is encouraged and coached in all aspects of treatment, in an effort to reframe problem behaviours as simply ‘in- effective’ in comparison to a more effective use of skills. The therapist acts as both coach and consultant to the patient, and actively works to cultivate a positive in- terpersonal and collaborative relationship throughout the course of treatment.

Generalising DBT The prevalence of emotional dysregulation including symptoms of BPD among incarcerated female juvenile offenders suggests that DBT may be an effective strat- egy for this population. This study reports the results of a trial of DBT with female juvenile offenders in state custody on two treatment units. The adaptation of an outpatient treatment modality designed for adult wo- men with BPD to a residential population of non-spe- cifically diagnosed female offenders was guided by previous work in generalising and adapting DBT to other settings and populations. Barley et al. (1993) describe the successful adaptation of DBT to an inpa- tient treatment program. Staff who were primarily psychodynamic in orientation were able to implement DBT skill training techniques and reduce rates of parasuicidal behaviour on the inpatient unit. Clinically, DBT has also been adapted to adolescent inpatient and outpatient treatment. These successful adaptations demonstrate that DBT is generalisable across settings (inpatient, forensic), and populations (forensic, adoles- cent, non-specific diagnostic groups). Research has also demonstrated that DBT can be disseminated among clinicians with varying backgrounds and func- tions. Hawkins and Sinha (1998) reported studies of DBT dissemination to mental health staff in a statewide

Table 1. Indicators of mental health needs among incarcerated juvenile offenders

Females (N ¼ 187)

Males (N ¼ 1841)

Report clinically significant levels of symptoms at intake

62% 33%

Significant traumatic experience(s) 78% 52% Prior mental health treatment 79% 72% Substance abuse 70% 66%

122 Eric W. Trupin et al.

program and Linehan and her colleagues have demon- strated the effectiveness of DBT training for clinical teams from a variety of settings.

Adapting DBT for incarcerated female juvenile offenders For the present project four staff from the mental health cottage (unit) of a Juvenile Rehabilitation Administra- tion (JRA) facility, along with two research staff, re- ceived extensive training (80 hours) in DBT from Linehan and colleagues. Staff from a second cottage and the remaining staff from the mental health cottage received 16 hours of introductory training in DBT from Linehan Associates, in addition to 1–2 hours of on-site instruction and case consultation, provided weekly throughout the year.

Following the initial 40 hours of training the mental health cottage staff began the process of adapting DBT to adolescents, and to meet the requirements of a resi- dential, forensic setting. Behavioural targets were changed to reflect the mental health needs of female juvenile offenders. Targetting problem behaviours oc- curring on the unit, and focusing heavily on offense related behaviours in individual sessions are examples of changes we made relative to this specific population and setting.

Specific categories of resident behaviour that were targeted included:

• life-threatening behaviours (suicidality and self- mutilation);

• unit-destructive behaviours (violence, oppositional/ defiance, victimising behaviours);

• treatment-interfering behaviours (excessive de- manding, non-compliance, and non-participation);

• quality of life-interfering behaviours (high-risk sex- ual behaviours, mental health problems, offence related behaviours, and behaviours likely to limit placement options).

A typical youth seen in this facility is described by the following vignette:

Dee was a 17-year-old Caucasian female who was committed to the facility for assaulting a roommate while in foster care. She hit the victim on the head with a rock. Because of a history of psychiatric hospitalisa- tion and Axis I diagnoses (including bipolar disorder, conduct disorder, post traumatic stress disorder) as well as Borderline features, Dee was admitted to the mental health cottage. She was placed on suicide pre- cautions after she cut her arm with a broken pen, an act precipitated by her teacher’s refusal to allow her to lis- ten to the radio.

DBT is unique in its inclusion of strategies to ‘treat the therapist’ by providing support while targeting specific behaviours of staff that are predictive of neg- ative outcomes for residents. These include: extreme rigidity or flexibility, poor interpersonal limits, favour- itism, and extreme irreverence (Linehan, 1993a). Re- ducing the staff’s reliance on punishment, restriction and isolation as the primary response to emotional dysregulation (evidenced by suicide attempt, aggres- sion, and noncompliance) was a primary target of the intervention.

Applying new contingencies to support new behav- iours, DBT skills were taught, coached and actively reinforced, while old ineffective behaviours were put in an extinction schedule. Five categories of skills were taught, including: Core Mindfulness Skills, Interper- sonal Effectiveness Skills, Emotion Regulation Skills, Distress Tolerance Skills, and Self-Management Skills. A detailed description of the skills training procedures is available in the DBT skills training manual (Linehan, 1993b). Each of the five skills was taught over a period of four weeks, utilising a group format. Groups com- prised two staff and up to eight residents, and lasted from 60–90 minutes, once or twice per week. Homework assignments, which were given to residents on a weekly basis, consisted mainly of filling out a daily Diary Card that recorded the frequency at which each skill was attempted. Residents were reinforced for their partici- pation in-group, for practising the skills within the cottage and for soliciting skills coaching from staff. Staff also received reinforcement for reading about and learning DBT, volunteering to co-facilitate skills groups, and for applying DBT interventions on the floor with residents. Through ongoing training and consultation with staff, efforts were made to continuously expand the application of DBT-based interventions and competen- cies within the cottages.

In the case of Dee, the DBT intervention allowed the staff to gain insight into her behaviour and design a program that ultimately eliminated her parasuicidal behaviour and time on suicide precautions. Dee and the staff were able to functionally analyse her para-suicide attempts and identify a clear sequence of emotional and behavioural events that led to these behaviours. The attempt described above, for example, was found to be precipitated not only by the confrontation with the teacher, but also by Dee’s distress over not being able to reach her mother, a sleepless night spent ruminating, and the belief that the teacher’s denial of radio privi- leges was a personal attack. The staff also learned that their reaction to her parasuicidal behaviour, including frequent checks, one-on-one sessions where Dee was encouraged to vent her anger, removal of attention when she calmed down (‘Finally, WE can take a break!’) were reinforcing her behaviour. The combination of staff behaviour change and client skills acquisition allowed Dee to eventually get a job on campus and graduate from the high school, events that were previously unheard of on the mental health unit.

Research questions The overarching goal of the project was to increase staff’s ability to successfully intervene with the most difficult behavioural and emotional problems of incar- cerated female offenders, enabling them to maintain participation in rehabilitation services. The aims of the DBT project are stated below and formed the basis of the evaluation.

1. Do female offenders who receive the DBT interven- tion improve their behaviour while incarcerated?

2. Will staff use of restrictive and punitive actions be reduced by implementation of DBT?

3. Will participants in DBT decrease risk assessment scores compared to matched comparison youth?

Original Article: DBT with Female Juvenile Offenders 123

4. Will youth who receive DBT increase access to rehabilitative services in the institution?

Method

Participants Adolescent females incarcerated at a State of Wash- ington Juvenile Rehabilitation Administration facility were the source of participants in this study. Partici- pants were recruited from three treatment cottages in the centre. DBT was implemented at two of the cottages, one a mental health treatment unit and one a general population unit. The third cottage was a general popu- lation unit that served as a ‘treatment as usual’ com- parison site. All three cottages were locked facilities offering educational, vocational and recreational pro- grams in addition to group meetings to discuss issues of daily living and cottage rules. All cottages used a be- havioural modification program designed to reward compliance with rules and appropriate social interac- tions and to punish rule infractions. Twenty-two par- ticipants were recruited from the Mental Health Cottage (MHC), 23 from the General Population Cottage with DBT (GPCD) and 15 from the General Population Comparison Cottage (GPCC). Records for an additional 30 female offenders were utilised for comparison on baseline offence and mental health screen measures. These records were accessed through JRA, without using names or identifiers.

Measures Intake interviews were conducted with all new residents on the three cottages following informed consent. Initial interviews included the Diagnostic Interview Schedule for Children (DISC: Shaffer, Schwab, & Fisher, 1993) a structured interview assessing DSM-IV psychiatric di- agnoses, the Child and Adolescent Functional Assess- ment Scale (CAFAS: Hodges, 1995), a rating of functional impairment based on staff interview and chart review. Daily Behaviour logs were kept on each cottage for each youth. A staff member, using standar- dised shift reports and charts, noted incidents of room confinement, school suspension, suicide precautions, parasuicidal acts (self-mutilation, suicide attempt, and threatened suicide) classroom disruption, and ag- gressive behaviour each day. For the mental health cottage these behaviour logs were available for the year preceding the DBT project as well as the study period.

Composite variables of youth behaviour problems (i.e., aggression + parasuicidal acts + classroom disruption) and staff punitive actions (i.e., room confinement + suicide precaution levels + classroom suspension) were developed. Community Risk Assessment Scores (CRA), a measure used by JRA for placement and security level, were accessed through JRA’s computer database at intake and at 90 days follow-up. The Massachusetts Youth Screening Instrument (MAYSI; Grisso, 1999), a measure administered by JRA screening youth mental health symptoms, was collected from the JRA computer database at intake and 90 days follow-up.

Results

Participant characteristics are presented in Table 2. While the initial design of the evaluation divided the participants into DBT and non-DBT groups, it became clear early in the project that implementation of DBT at the mental health and general population cottages was not equivalent. The MHC staff received more DBT training than the staff on the GPCD (80 vs 16 hours). In addition, examination of initial comparisons of func- tional impairment revealed significant differences in baseline functioning between female offenders on the three cottages. Despite equivalent demographic char- acteristics, rates of Axis I diagnosis and number of prior offences (Table 2), female offenders on the mental health cottage were significantly more likely to demon- strate impairment in mood disturbance (v2 ¼ 7:78, p ¼ .007), self-harmful actions and ideation (v2 ¼ 3:80, p ¼ .05), and thought disturbance (v2 ¼ 5:72, p ¼ .017) (see Figure 1). DISC results also demonstrated differ- ences among the samples. Girls on the MHC had higher rates of Mood Disturbance (33%), Disruptive Behaviour Disorders (83%) and Substance Use Disorder (62%), while the GPCD youth were more likely to have Anxiety Disorders (58%) and Substance Use Disorder (75%). The differences between youth on the MHC and GPCD, the intervention cottages, suggested that different out- comes might be expected from the intervention. There- fore, analyses were performed separately for youth on the MHC and GPCD.

Do female offenders who receive the DBT intervention improve their behaviour while incarcerated? This question was tested using the composite meas- ures of youth behaviour problems. Behaviour logs from

Table 2. Participant characteristics

Mental Health Cottage-DBT

General Population-DBT

Matched comparison

Number of participants 22 23 45 Age 14.8 15.5 15.2 % White 50 50 59 % African American 15 22 23 % Native American 15 9 9 % Hispanic 10 14 7 % Axis I Diagnosis 78 75 50* # Prior offences 6 5 7 % Extraordinary sentence 57 15 40

* Note: n¼15 for participants in this condition receiving DISCs.

124 Eric W. Trupin et al.

the general population comparison cottage were not included in the analyses due to an absence of reported disruptive behaviour on the cottage. Curve estimation regression analyses were used to estimate the signifi- cance of change in rate of behaviour on the two DBT cottages. Youth on the MHC demonstrated significant reduction in behaviour problems during the 10 months of the DBT study (R2 ¼ :55, p ¼ .01, while youth on the GPCD did not demonstrate a significant reduction in behaviour problems (R2 ¼ :01, p ¼ .77). These trends are illustrated in Figures 2 and 3. Notably, the youth

on the MHC demonstrated significantly higher overall rates of behaviour problems than youth on the GPCD.

Will staff use of restrictive and punitive actions be reduced by implementation of DBT? The impact of DBT on staff use of punitive actions was examined using curve estimation regression analyses with the staff action composite variable. The compar- ison cottage did not report use of restrictive punitive actions such as room confinement and suicide pre- cautions. Staff punitive actions did not demonstrate a reduction during the DBT intervention on the MHC (R2 ¼ :046, p ¼ .55) and actually showed a significant increase on the GPCD (R2 ¼ :74, p ¼ .002).

The availability of behaviour logs for the year prior to DBT on the MHC allowed comparison of pre-post effects of the intervention and additional tests of the questions that DBT would change youth and staff behaviour. A time-series autoregression analysis was used to compare the monthly rates of youth behaviour problems and staff punitive actions during the 10 months of the DBT project and the same 10-month period during the prior year. Results showed that while overall rates of behaviour problems did not differ between the DBT and non-DBT year on the MHC (b ¼ 0:03, T ¼ 1.13, p ¼ .27), staff punitive actions were significantly lower during the DBT year (b ¼ �0:03, T ¼ -2.22, p ¼ .04). The significant decrease in staff punitive actions on the MHC is illustrated in Figure 4.

Will participants in DBT decrease risk assessment scores compared to matched comparison youth? To evaluate the impact of DBT on risk scores a repeated measure analysis of variance was conducted. Initial and follow-up CRA scores were compared for female offenders in the DBT intervention with comparison youth matched for initial mental health and risk-score severity. These results demonstrated no significant difference risk score change by DBT condition (F ¼ .997, p ¼ .37), although there was a significant within subjects decrease in risk scores across groups (F ¼ .17.76, p < :001). The risk change by group dif- ference is illustrated in Figure 5.

Figure 1. Baseline functional impairment scores by treatment condition

Figure 3. Youth behaviour problem composite (agression + classroom disruption) on the general population DBT cottage during the DBT intervention

Figure 2. Youth behaviour problem composite (agression + parasuicide + classroom disruption) on the mental health cottage during the DBT intervention

Original Article: DBT with Female Juvenile Offenders 125

Will youth who receive DBT increase access to rehabilitative services in the institution? This question was examined by comparing rates of participation in various on-campus programs for youth in the MHC, where pre and post DBT data were available. During the DBT intervention the number of youths participating in these rehabilitative services was increased. Nine compared to zero youth from the MHC were employed full time on campus. Six compared to one youth completed a GED and six as opposed to one youth completed a drug and alcohol program. Most significantly, in the year prior to DBT only one youth

had transitioned back to an open cottage from the MHC designed as a crisis stabilisation unit; seven adoles- cants were able to be transitioned back to open campus during the DBT year.

Discussion

This study evaluated the effectiveness of a DBT inter- vention on two units of a state juvenile rehabilitation facility for female juvenile offenders. As expected, youth residing in the designated mental health unit initially demonstrated higher rates of severe mood and thought disturbance as well as higher rates of thought disorder than youth on the general population unit receiving DBT. Female offenders on the MHC demonstrated a significant decrease in serious behaviour problems during the 10-month period of the study. Suicidal acts, aggressive behaviour and class disruption decreased throughout the year but were not significantly reduced compared to the prior year on the same unit. One ex- planation for this mixed result is the frequent transfer of new residents to the MHC who are suicidal and/or aggressive, keeping the overall rates of problem beha- viour on the unit high.

Youth in the general population unit who had signi- ficantly fewer behaviour problems did not show a re- duction during the DBT implementation period. Notable among this group was the absence of suicidal, self- mutilating and parasuicidal behaviour-primary targets of DBT. Youth in the non-DBT comparison group did not demonstrate any severe problem behaviour that met the operational definition.

The second primary target of the DBT was to reduce the staff’s use of restrictive punishment including room confinement, suicide precautions and school removal. The DBT intervention was designed to provide the staff with alternatives to room confinement and other pu- nitive actions as primary behavioural management tools. The efficacy of the intervention was tested there- fore by the staff’s willingness to utilise the DBT methods compared to the methods previously available to them. On the MHC the rates of these interventions remained constant during the 10-month DBT period, driven in large part by youth being transferred to the unit on suicide precautions; however, compared to the previous year, the staff’s use of punitive actions was significantly reduced. On the GPCD the staff’s use of restrictive pu- nitive actions increased significantly during the DBT intervention. The staff on this unit used room confine- ment liberally and tended to increase the use as the DBT study continued. Some of this increase was due to a few staff member’s using room confinement as a group punishment for infringements and is evidence of a lack of adherence to the DBT model. This staff also did not receive the full DBT intensive training. The variab- ility of staff’s discretionary use of room confinement is demonstrated by the complete absence of this punish- ment on the non-DBT comparison unit.

Youth on the MHC were able to participate in insti- tutional services like drug and alcohol treatment, em- ployment and even transfer to other units, due in part to reductions in behaviour problems and restrictions during the DBT intervention. Institutionl staff and ad- ministrators identified this as a significant positive outcome.

Figure 4. Staff punitive actions on the mental health cottage during the year prior to the DBT intervention and during the DBT intervention

Figure 5. Risk score change by treatment condition

126 Eric W. Trupin et al.

The DBT intervention did not result in a significant decrease in risk assessment scores. Multiple items comprising the risk assessment scale are fixed (points for crime, number of prior offences, prior drug and al- cohol use and sex offences) and therefore limit the variance in risk scores.

This study was a preliminary examination of out- comes of a DBT intervention and demonstrated mixed results. It appears that with intensive training, moti- vated staff and a population of female offenders who exhibit the types of parasuicidal and aggressive beha- viour that DBT targets, the intervention can be suc- cessful in reducing behaviour problems and increasing staff’s use of therapeutic rather than restrictive and punitive responses. As a result of this change, female offenders who are segregated on a mental health unit may gain more access to valuable rehabilitative services such as substance abuse treatment and employment.

The effectiveness of a DBT intervention is increased when treatment is matched to appropriate behaviour problems (i.e. suicidal, extremely aggressive and non compliant) and implemented with intensive training. Future studies should examine the implementation of DBT, comparing equally emotionally and behaviourally disturbed youth and equally trained and committed staff who are randomly assigned to DBT vs treatment as usual. Changing institutional behaviour is only a first- step in designing effective interventions. Ultimately, the success of this intervention will be measured by the ability of youth to transition successfully to the com- munity and generalise the skills learned in the DBT program. Families, providers and parole officers should be included in the treatment intervention to ensure that this skill set will be reinforced The authors of this study will test the implementation of DBT skills training within an outpatient multisystemic therapy program for recid- ivist juvenile offenders with co-occurring disorders.

References

Barley, W. D., Buie, S. E. Peterson, E. W., Hollingsworth, A. S., Griva, M., Hickerson, S. C., Lawson, J. E., & Bailey, B. J. (1993). Development of an inpatient cognitive-behavioural treatment program for borderline personality disorder. Journal of Personality Disorders, 7, 232–240.

Cole, P. M., & Zahn-Waxler, C. (1992). Emotional dysregu- lation in disruptive behavior disorders. In D. Cicchetti & S. L. Toth (Eds.), Developmental perspectives on depression. Rochester symposium on developmental psychopathology, 4 (pp. 173–209). Rochester, NY: University of Rochester Press.

Edens, J. F., & Otto, R. K. (1997). Prevalence of mental disor- ders among youth in the juvenile justice system: Focal point. A National Bulletin of Family Support and Children’s Mental Health. Portland State University, Research and Training Center.

Elliott, D. S., Huizinga, D., & Menard, S. (1989). Multiple problem youth: Delinquency, substance abuse and mental health problems. New York: Springer-Verlag.

Gibbs, J. T. (1982). Personality patterns of delinquent females: Ethnic and sociocultural variations. Journal of Clinical Psy- chology, 38, 198–206.

Grisso, T. (1999). Juvenile offenders and mental illness. Psychiatry, Psychology and Law, 6, 143–151.

Hawkins, K. A., & Sinha, R. (1998). Can line clinicians master the conceptual complexities of dialectical behavior therapy? An evaluation of a State Department of Mental Health training program. Journal of Psychiatric Research, 32, 379– 384.

Hodges, K. (1995). Child and adolescent functional assessment scale. Nashville, TN: Vanderbilt Child Mental Health Servi- ces Evaluation Project.

Linehan, M. M. (1993a). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of borderline personality disorder. New York: Guilford Press.

Linehan, M. M. (1993b). Skills training manual for treating borderline personality disorder. New York: Guilford Press.

Loeber, R., & Farrington, D. P. (1998). Never too early, never too late: Risk factors and successful interventions for ser- ious and violent juvenile offenders. Studies on Crime and Crime Prevention, 7, 7–30.

Loeber, R., Wung, P., & Keenan, K. (1993). Developmental pathways in disruptive child behavior. Development and Psychopathology, 5, 103–133.

McManus, M., Alessi, N. E., Grapentine, W. L., & Brickman, A. (1984). Psychiatric disturbance in serious delinquents. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry, 23, 602–615.

Mezzich, A. C., Giancola, P. R., Tarter, R. E., Lu, S., Parks, S. M., & Barrett, C. M. (1997). Violence, suicidality, and alcohol/drug use involvement in adolescent females with a psychoactive substance use disorder and controls. Alco- holism: Clinical and Experimental Research, 21, 1300– 1307.

Otto, R. K., Greenstein, J. J., Johnson, M. K., & Friedman, R. M. (1992). Prevalence of mental disorders among youth in the juvenile justice system. In J. J. Cocozza. (Ed.), Responding to the mental health needs of youth in the juvenile justice system (pp. 7–48). Seattle, WA: The Na- tional Coalition for the Mentally Ill in the Criminal Justice System.

Prescott, L. (1997). Adolescent girls with co-occurring disorders in the juvenile justice system. Delmar, NY: The National GAINS Center for People with Co-Occurring Disorders in the Justice System.

Shaffer, D., Schwab, M. S., & Fisher, W. P. (1993). The Diag- nostic Interview Schedule for Children (DISC R): Prepara- tion, field testing, interrater reliability, and acceptability. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 32, 643–650.

Snyder, J., Schrepferman, L., & St. Peter, C. (1997). Origins of antisocial behavior: Negative reinforcement and affect dys- regulation of behavior as socialization mechanisms in family interaction. Behavior Modification, 21, 187–215.

Stewart, D. G., & Trupin, E. W. (2000, March). Identifying serious mental and emotional disturbance with the MAYSI. In A. Kavanaugh & D. Peuschold (chairs), The Massachu- setts Youth Screening Inventory. Symposium presented at meeting of the American Psychology-Law Society, New Orleans.

Timmons-Mitchell, J., Brown, C., Schultz, S. C., Webster, S. E., Underwood, L. A., & Semple, W. E. (1997). Final report: Results of a three year collaborative effort to assess the mental health needs of youth in the Juvenile justice system in Ohio (unpublished report). Columbus, OH: Ohio Department of Youth Services.

Wierson, M., Forehand, R. L., & Frame, C. L. (1992). Epide- miology and treatment of mental health problems in juvenile delinquents. Advances in Behavior Therapy, 14, 93–120.

Zlotnick, C., Donaldson, D., Spirito, A., & Pearlstein, T. (1997). Affect regulation and suicide attempts in adolescent inpatients. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 36, 793–798.

Original Article: DBT with Female Juvenile Offenders 127

dbtsummaryofdata.pdf

RESEARCH ON DIALECTICAL BEHAVIOR THERAPY: SUMMARY OF THE DATA TO DATE

Dimeff, L., Koerner, K., & Linehan, M.M. (2001). Summary of Research on DBT. THE BEHAVIORAL TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER GROUP. Seattle, WA, 98105 Please do not distribute without author permission.

ABSTRACTS OF PUBLISHED RANDOMIZED CONTROLLED TRIALS

Linehan,M.M.; Armstrong,H.E.; Suarez,A.; Allmon,D.; Heard,H.L. (1991). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of chronically parasuicidal borderline patients [see comments]. Archives of General Psychiatry, 48, 1060-1064. A randomized clinical trial was conducted to evaluate the effectiveness of a cognitive -behavioral therapy, i.e., dialectical behavior therapy, for the treatment of chronically parasuicidal women who met criteria for borderline personality disorder. The treatment lasted 1 year, with assessment every 4 months. The control condition was "treatment as usual" in the community. At most assessment points and during the entire year, the subjects who received dialectical behavior therapy had fewer inc idences of parasuicide and less medically severe parasuicides, were more likely to stay in individual therapy, and had fewer inpatient psychiatric days. There were no between-group differences on measures of depression, hopelessness, suicide ideation, or reasons for living although scores on all four measures decreased throughout the year. Linehan,M.M.; Heard,H.L.; Armstrong,H.E. (1993). Naturalistic follow-up of a behavioral treatment for chronically parasuicidal borderline patients. Archives of General Psychiatry, 50, 971-974. BACKGROUND: A randomized clinical trial was conducted to evaluate whether the superior performance of dialectical behavior therapy (DBT), a psychosocial treatment for borderline personality disorder, compared with treatment-as-usual in the community, is maintained during a 1 -year post treatment follow-up. METHODS: We analyzed 39 women who met criteria for borderline personality disorder, defined by Gunderson's Diagnostic Interview for Borderline Personality Disorder and DSM-III-R criteria, and who had a history of parasuicidal behavior. Subjects were randomly assigned either to 1 year of DBT, a cognitive behavioral therapy that combines individual psychotherapy with group behavioral skills training, or to treatment-as-usual, which may or may not have included individual psychotherapy. Efficacy was measured on parasuicidal behavior (Parasuicide History Interview), psychiatric inpatient days (Treatment History Interview), anger (State-Trait Anger Scale), global functioning (Global Assessment Scale), and social adjustment (Social Adjustment Scale--Interview and Social Adjustment Scale--Self-Report). Subjects were assessed at 6 and 12 months into the follow-up year. RESULTS: Comparison of the two conditions revealed that throughout the follow-up year, DBT subjects had significantly higher Global Assessment Scale scores. During the initial 6 months of the follow-up, DBT subjects had significantly less parasuicidal behavior, less anger, and better self-reported social adjustment. During the final 6 months, DBT subjects had significantly fewer psychiatric inpatient days and better interviewer-rated social adjustment. CONCLUSION: In general, the superiority of DBT over treatment-as-usual, found in previous studies at the completion of 1 year of treatment, was retained during a 1- year follow-up. Linehan,M.M.; Tutek,D.A.; Heard,H.L.; Armstrong,H.E. (1994). Interpersonal outcome of cognitive behavioral treatment for chronically suicidal borderline patients. American Journal of Psychiatry, 151, 1771-1776. OBJECTIVE: This study reports the efficacy of a cognitive behavioral outpatient treatment on interpersonal outcome variables for patients diagnosed with borderline personality disorder. METHOD: In a 1 -year clinical trial, 26 female patients with borderline personality disorder were randomly assigned to either dialectical behavior therapy or a treatment-as-usual comparison condition. All subjects met criteria of DSM -III-R and Diagnostic Interview for Borderline Patients for borderline personality disorder and were chronically suicidal. RESULTS: In both the intent-to-treat and treatment completion groups, dialectical behavior therapy subjects had significantly better scores on measures of anger, interviewer-rated global social adjustment, and the Global Assessment Scale and tended to rate themselves better on overall social adjustment than treatment-as-usual subjects. CONCLUSIONS: These results suggest that dialectical behavior therapy is a promising psychosocial intervention for improving interpersonal functioning among severely dysfunctional patients with borderline personality disorder. Linehan,M.M.; Schmidt,H.; Dimeff,L.A.; Craft,J.C.; Kanter,J.; Comtois,K.A. (1999). Dialectical behavior therapy for patients with borderline personality disorder a nd drug-dependence. American Journal on Addiction, 8, 279- 292. A randomized clinical trial was conducted to evaluate whether Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT), an effective cognitive - behavioral treatment for suicidal individuals with borderline personality disorder (BPD), would also be effective for drug- dependent women with BPD when compared with treatment-as-usual (TAU) in the community. Subjects were randomly assigned to either DBT or TAU for a year of treatment. Subjects were assessed at 4, 8, and 12 months, and at a 16-month follow-up. Subjects assigned to DBT had significantly greater reductions in drug abuse measured both by structured interviews and urinalyses throughout the treatment year and at follow-up than did subjects assigned to TAU. D BT also maintained subjects in treatment better than did TAU, and subjects assigned to DBT had significantly greater gains in global and social adjustment at follow-up than did subjects assigned to TAU. DBT has been shown to be more effective than treatment-as-usual in treating drug abuse in this study, providing more support for DBT as an effective treatment for

RESEARCH ON DIALECTICAL BEHAVIOR THERAPY: SUMMARY OF THE DATA TO DATE

Dimeff, L., Koerner, K., & Linehan, M.M. (2001). Summary of Research on DBT. THE BEHAVIORAL TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER GROUP. Seattle, WA, 98105 Please do not distribute without author permission.

severely dysfunctional BPD patients across a range of presenting problems. Evans,K.; Tyrer,P.; Catalan,J.; Schmidt,U.; Davidson,K.; Dent,J.; Tata,P.; Thornton,S.; Barber,J.; Thompson,S.(1999). Manual-assisted cognitive-behavior therapy (MACT): A randomized controlled trial of a brief intervention with bibliotherapy in the treatment of recurrent deliberate self-harm. Psychological Medicine, 29, 19-25. Investigated the effectiveness of a new manual-based treatment for recurrent deliberate self-harm that varied from bibliotherapy (6 self-help booklets) alone to 6 sessions of cognitive therapy linked to the booklets, which contained elements of dialectical behavior therapy. Thirty-four patients, aged 16-50 yrs, seen after an episode of deliberate self-harm, with personality disturbance within the flamboyant cluster and a previous parasuicide episode within the past 12 months, were randomly assigned to treatment with MACT (18 Ss) or treatment as usual (TAU; 16 Ss). Assessments of clinical symptoms and social function were made at baseline and repeated at 6 months. The number and rate of all parasuicide attempts, time to next episode and costs of care were also determined. Thirty-two patients (18 MACT; 14 TAU) were seen at follow- up and 10 patients in each group (56% MACT and 71% TAU) had a suicidal act during the 6 months. The rate of suicidal acts per month was lower with MACT (median 0.17/mo MACT; 0.37/mo TAU) and self-rated depressive symptoms also improved. The treatment involved a mean of 2.7 sessions and the observed average cost of care was 46% less with MACT. Results suggest that this new form of cognitive-behavior therapy is promising in its efficacy and feasible in clinical practice. Koons, C.R., Robins, C.J., Tweed, J.L, Lynch, T.R, Gonzalez, A.M, G.K., Morse, J.Q., Bishop, G.K., Butterfield, M.I., & Bastian, L.A. (2001). Efficacy of dialectical behavior therapy in women veterans with borderline personality disorder. Behavior Therapy, 32, 371-390. Twenty women veterans who met criteria for borderline personality disorder (BPD) were randomly assigned to Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) or to treatment as usual (TAU) for 6 months. Compared with patients in TAU, those in DBT reported significantly greater decreases in suicidal ideation, hopelessness, depression, and anger expression. In addition, only patients in DBT demonstrated significant decreases in number of parasuicidal acts, anger e xperienced but not expressed, and dissociation, and a strong trend on number of hospitalizations, although treatment group differences were not statistically significant on these variables. Patients in both conditions reported significant decreases in depressive symptoms and in number of BPD criterion behavior patterns, but no decrease in anxiety. Results of this pilot study suggest that DBT can be provided effectively independent of the treatment’s developer, and that larger efficacy and effectiveness studies are warranted. Telch, C.F., Agras, W.S., & Linehan, M.M. (in press). Dialectical behavior therapy for binge eating disorder: A promising new treatment. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology. This study evaluated the use of Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) adapted for binge eating disorder (BED). Forty-four women with BED were randomly assigned to group DBT or a wait-list control condition and administered the Eating Disorder Examination in addition to measures of weight, mood, and affe ct regulation at baseline and post-treatment. Treated women evidenced significant improvement on measures of binge eating and eating pathology compared to controls, and 89% of the women receiving DBT had stopped binge eating by the end of the treatment. Abstinence rates were reduced to 56% at the six-month follow-up. Overall, the findings on the measures of weight, mood, and affect regulation were not significant. These results support further research into DBT as a treatment of BED. Linehan, M.M., Dimeff, L.A., Reynolds, S.K., Comtois, K.A., Shaw Welch, S., Heagerty, P., & Kivlanhan, D.R. (in press). Dialectical Behavior Therapy versus Comprehensive Validation Plus 12-Step for the Treatment of Opioid Dependent Women Meeting Criteria for Borderline Personality Disorder. Drug and Alcohol Dependence. A randomized clinical trial was conducted to evaluate whether Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT), a treatment that synthesizes behavioral change with radical acceptance treatment strategies, would be more effective for heroin-dependent women with borderline personality disorder (N=23) than Comprehensive Validation Therapy with 12-Step (CVT +12S), a manualized approach that provided the major acceptance-based strategies used in DBT in combination with parti cipation in 12-Step programs. There were three major findings. First, results of urinalyses indicated that both treatments—when combined with LAAM replacement medication—were effective in reducing opiate use relative to baseline. At 16 months post-randomization (four months post treatment), subjects in both treatment conditions had a low proportion of opiate - positive urinalyses (27% in DBT; 33% in CVT+12S). Second, participants assigned to DBT maintained reductions in mean opiate use through 12 months o f active treatment while those assigned to CVT+12S significantly increased opiate use during the last four months of treatment. Second, CVT+12S was remarkably effective in maintaining subjects in treatment: 100% stayed for the entire year, compared to 64% in DBT. Third, at both post-treatment and at the 16-month follow-up assessment, subjects in both treatment conditions showed significant overall reductions in level of psychopathology relative to baseline. A noteworthy secondary finding was that subjects assigned to DBT were significantly more accurate in self- reporting opiate use than were those assigned to CVT+12S.

RESEARCH ON DIALECTICAL BEHAVIOR THERAPY: SUMMARY OF THE DATA TO DATE

Dimeff, L., Koerner, K., & Linehan, M.M. (2001). Summary of Research on DBT. THE BEHAVIORAL TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER GROUP. Seattle, WA, 98105 Please do not distribute without author permission.

SUMMARY OF RESEARCH FINDINGS IN DBT DIMEFF, L., KOERNER, K., & LINEHAN, M.M. (2001)

Dimeff, L., Koerner, K., & Linehan, M.M. (2001). Summary of Research on DBT. THE BEHAVIORAL TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER GROUP. Seattle, WA, 98105 Please do not distribute without author permission.

Authors Subjects/Setting Design Adherence to Standard DBT

Outcomes and Comments

Linehan, Armstrong, Suarez, Allmon, & Heard (1991).

Chronically suicidal women with BPD between 18-45 years of age; outpatient clinic.

Randomized controlled trial comparing DBT (n=24) to community -based treatment-as- usual (n=23). Treatment was 12 months in duration. Following completion of treatment, Ss were assessed at six -month intervals for one year.

Comprehensive DBT program with individual psychotherapy, 150-minute group skills training including didactic and homework review, and consultation team. Ss were exposed to all skills twice within this 12-month trial.

Ss assigned to DBT showed statistically significant reductions in parasuicidal behavior, were significantly more likely to start treatment (100% vs. 73%) and were significantly more likely to complete treatment (83% vs. 42%). DBT Ss had significantly fewer inpatient hospital days compared to TAU Ss. These findings were largely maintained throughout the post-treatment follow up year. During the one-year post-treatment follow -up, parasuicide repeat rate was significantly lower for DBT Ss com pared to TAU (26% vs. 60%).

Linehan, Heard, & Armstrong, (1993).

Chronically suicidal women with BPD. Ss were currently undergoing outpatient individual psychotherapy in the community.

Ss already in psychotherapy with therapist in the community were matched and randomly assigned to DBT group skills training condition as an add-on to existing individual therapy (n=11) or assessment only condition (n=8).

Ss in DBT condition only were exposed to DBT group skills training.

Despite strong prediction that adding DBT skills training group to ongoing individual psychotherapy would enhance treatment outcomes, no such effects emerged.

Barley, Buie, Peterson, Hollingsworth, Griva, Hickerson, Lawson, & Bailey (1993).

Mostly female (79%) on an inpatient personality disorders unit. M age = 30 years (range=16-57). Length of stay in hospital: M = 106 days (range=3-629 days).

Quasi-experimental study (N=130). Study compares outcomes between Ss during three phases of integrating DBT onto unit: (1) no DBT; (2) phasing in/introducing DBT to unit; (3) full DBT program. To control for effects of time, investigators compared changes in parasuicide episodes across three intervals to changes in parasuicide rates across intervals on another psychiatric unit within hospital during same period of time.

Program was evolving from sole psychodynamic focus to incorporation of DBT; psychodynamic continued to inform case conceptualization and aspects of treatment with DBT skills training group as an adjunct to psychodynamic treatment. Included DBT skills training group, a separate “homework group” using problem -solving strategies when Ss didn’t complete homework, and “fundamentals” group for new patients to provide general overview of skills and extensive exposure to crisis survival skills.

Mean monthly parasuicide rate on the personality disorders unit was significantly lower following the implementation of DBT on the unit. Rates of parasuicide on the general psychiatric unit were not significantly different at any of the three time periods. Results suggest that once incorporated onto the unit, use of DBT skills reduces parasuicidal behavior among Ss on a personality disorders unit. Because this study lacks randomization, other competing hypotheses for these findings are not eliminated. Its obvious strengths include its naturalistic setting on an inpatient unit.

Miller, Rathus, & Leigh (AABT, 1996, Nov).

Suicidal teens (M age=16); outpatient services in the Bronx, NY. 22% were male. Ethnicity: 68% Latino; 17% African American. DBT Ss met following inclusion criteria: BPD or BPD features plus current suicidal ideation or engaged in parasuicidal behavior within past 16 weeks.

Non-randomized control quasi-experimental pilot study comparing DBT for adolescents to treatment as usual. Of total (N=111), most severe teens were referred to DBT program. Ss in DBT received twice weekly individual and multi -family skills training; TAU Ss received twice weekly individual and family sessions.

Modifications to standard DBT included: inclusion of as-needed family therapy (added onto individual therapy) and inclusion of family members in group. Skills handouts modified for ease with teens and number of skills in modules reduced. Core mindfulness skills were taught 3 times, other modules were taught only once each. Treatment length was 12 weeks.

Ss in DBT group were significantly more likely to complete treatment than TAU Ss (62% vs. 40%). Ss in DBT had significantly fewer psychiatric hospitalizations (13% hospitalized in TAU vs. 0% in DBT -A). No significant differences in parasuicidal behaviors were observed. However, since Ss in DBT were recruited for this condition because of their suicidal behaviors, no difference between conditions on this outcome variable is noteworthy. Additional outcome measures from DBT (pre/post within DBT group): significant decreases in suicidal ideation, significant reductions in global severity index and positive symptoms distress index, and significant changes on SCL-90: anxiety, depression, interpersonal sensitiv ity, and obsessive compulsive, and trend toward significance on paranoid scale; reductions on Life Problems Inventory in total LPI scores as well as four problem areas: confusion about self, impulsivity, emotion dysregulation, and interpersonal difficulties.

Stanley, Ivanoff, Brodsky, Oppenheim, & Mann (AABT, 1998, Nov).

All Ss were females with BPD.

Non-randomized pilot project comparing efficacy for patients in standard DBT with a matched group of patients receiving TAU in the community.

This study included all components of standard, comprehensive DBT but was provided for a shorter treatment duration (six months) than Linehan’s original trial. Hence, all skills were taught one time only.

Statistically significant reductions in self-mutilation behav iors, self-mutilation urges, suicidal ideation, and suicidal urges were observed favoring DBT. No differences in self-reported psychopathology were observed. There were no suicide attempts in either group during the duration of the study.

SUMMARY OF RESEARCH FINDINGS IN DBT DIMEFF, L., KOERNER, K., & LINEHAN, M.M. (2001)

Dimeff, L., Koerner, K., & Linehan, M.M. (2001). Summary of Research on DBT. THE BEHAVIORAL TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER GROUP. Seattle, WA, 98105 Please do not distribute without author permission.

Authors

Subjects/Setting Design Adherence to

Standard DBT Outcomes and Comments

Evans, Tyrer, Catalan, Schmidt, Davidson, Dent, Tata, Thornton, Barber, & Thompson (1999).

Ss ranging in age from 16-50 with recent episode of deliberate self-harm as well as at leas t 1 other episode of parasuicidal behavior in the past year. All Ss had a personality disturbance in Cluster B.

Randomized controlled trial (N=34) comparing a manual-assisted cognitive-behavioral brief intervention (MACT) to treatment-as-usual. Following baseline, Ss were assessed at six months. Exposure to MACT ranged on a continuum from 2 to 6 sessions of problem - focused psychotherapy along with bibliotherapy (a manual of six short chapters covering problem -solving and basic cognitive techniques to manage emotions and negative thinking and relapse prevention strategies). Substance dependent clients were excluded from this study.

In contrast to comprehensive DBT, MACT constitutes a very brief treatment, up to six sessions of psychotherapy. Ss in MACT were instructed how to conduct a behavioral chain analysis using materials developed by Linehan and used in DBT and encouraged to conduct a chain analysis on their last episode of parasuicidal behavior. Ss were taught DBT crisis survival skills, including pros and cons and encouraged to practice these skills during the week.

During the six month assessment period, 10 Ss (56% MACT; 71% TAU) engaged in parasuicidal behavior. The rate of parasuicidal acts per month was lower with MACT than in TAU (median 0.17/month vs. 0.37/month, respectively). This finding was not statistically significant (p=0.11), which may be due to lack of statistical power. A statistically significant difference between conditions was noted on self-report of depression favoring MACT. The observed average cost of care was 46% less with MACT.

Linehan, Schmidt, Dimeff, Craft, Kanter, & Comtois (1999).

Substance dependent, multi -disordered women with BPD between 18- 45 years of age; outpatient clinic.

Randomized controlled trial (N=28) comparing DBT to community -based treatment-as-usual. Ss assessed at 4, 8, 12 months and at a 16 month follow -up.

Ss received yearlong treatment, including individual psychotherapy and group skills training. Each skills training module was reviewed twice during the duration of the year. Therapists attended a weekly one hour consultation team meeting.

Statistically significant reduction in substance abuse among DBT Ss compared to TAU Ss among both intent-to-treat and treated samples; findings corroborated by urinalyses (between-group mean effect sizes varied between .6 and 1.1). DBT more effectively retained subjects in therapy, with a 64% retention of DBT Ss compared to 27% of TAU Ss that remained in treatment with their primary therapist for the duration of treatment. Statistically significant improvements in social and global adjustment in DBT Ss were observed at follow -up when compared to TAU Ss. Within DBT condition, clients of therapists who consistently adhered to the DBT treatment manual had better outcomes than clients of non-adhering therapists suggesting therapist adherence to DBT manual and therapist competence may be important predictors of outcome.

Bohus, Haaf, Stiglmayr, et al. (2000).

BPD female Ss in an inpatient setting; had at least two parasuicide episodes in past two years.

Using a pre-post study design, Ss were assessed at admission to hospital and at one- month post-discharge.

All DBT Ss received DBT individual psychotherapy as well as DBT group skills training for the durati on of their hospital stay. Additionally, skills coaching was provided in the milieu to further strengthen skills.

Significant decreases in the number of parasuicidal acts post-treatment as well as significant improvements in ratings of depression, dissociation, anxiety and global stress.

Springer, Lohr, Buchtel, & Silk, (1996).

General inpatient unit. M length of stay = 13 days. Ss were selected for group on the basis of having a personality disorder.

Quasi-experimental study where investigators compared outcomes of Ss assigned to a treatment group that included DBT skills in a Creative Coping Group (CC) to a treatment as usual lifestyles and wellness discussion group.

Creative coping group format where Ss were encouraged to discuss parasuicidality in group. Ss only exposed to a limited number of DBT skills from three of four modules (emotion regulation, distress tolerance, and interpersonal effectiveness).

Ss in both conditions attended an average of six sessions and improved during their hospital stay. Ss in the CC treatment group were significantly more likely to believe that the lessons learned in group would help them manage their lives better upon discharge from the hospital. Investigators also note that Ss in the modified treatment group engaged in significantly more “acting out” behaviors during their hospital stay which they attribute to “discussing parasuicidality in the CC (creative coping) group and listening to patients describe their self-mutilative behaviors or fantasies.” Two of the six individuals who engaged in self-mutilative acts while in the CC group had no prior history of such behavior. Authors conclude that adaptation of DBT to a short-term inpatient setting may not be in the patient’s best interest because of possible contagion effect. This finding validates an important DBT principle described in Linehan’s Skills Training manual: with chronically parasuicidal patients, do not encourage discussion of parasuicidal acts in a group setting because of contagion effects (p.24).

SUMMARY OF RESEARCH FINDINGS IN DBT DIMEFF, L., KOERNER, K., & LINEHAN, M.M. (2001)

Dimeff, L., Koerner, K., & Linehan, M.M. (2001). Summary of Research on DBT. THE BEHAVIORAL TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER GROUP. Seattle, WA, 98105 Please do not distribute without author permission.

Authors Subjects/Setting Design Adherence to

Standard DBT Outcomes and Comments

McCann & Ball, (1996). McCann, Ball, & Ivanoff (in review).

Primarily male forensic inpatients on medium & intermediate security wards; most committed violent crimes. 50% with BPD; 50% with ASPD. Recruited from 5 wards.

Quasi-experimental study comparing DBT (n=21) to treatment as usual (n=14) over 20 months. TAU was described as “individualized supportive care” that combined psychotropic medications, individual and group therapy.

DBT ward assumed DBT philosophy and patient assumptions. Individuals in DBT ward received DBT individual therapy, DBT group skills training, as well as skills coaching on the ward. Inpatients were encouraged to conduct a chain analysis of w ard-interfering behavior, as well as therapy - interfering behavior.

In comparison to TAU, DBT Ss had a significant decrease in depressed and hostile mood, paranoia, and psychotic behaviors. Furthermore, DBT Ss had a significant decrease in several maladaptive interpersonal coping styles and an increase in adaptive coping in comparison to TAU. Finally, a trend towards reduction in staff burn-out was reported, again favoring DBT.

Telch, Agras, & Linehan (2000).

Female Ss between 18 and 65 years of age in outpatient treatment program for Binge Eating Disorder.

Small preliminary pre-post design (N=11) adapting DBT to treatment of Binge Eating Disorder. 20 session-group format that includes skills training as well as behavioral chain analysis.

Ss only received DBT group skills training. With the exception of the interpersonal effective module, all DBT modules were taught. Additionally, chain analysis was taught as a self-management skill within group and Ss were instructed to conduct a chain analysis using specifically developed behavioral targets for mindful eating. Skill modules taught once, although a review of all skills in a particular module was provided at the end of each module.

Both the number of binge episodes and binge days decreased significantly from baseline to post-treatment and included weight loss. Three and six - month post-treatment assessment data showed strong continued abstinence from binge eating and maintenance of lower weight. No treatment drop outs were reported and attendanc e was strong.

Koons, Robins, Tweed, Lynch, et al. (2001).

BPD women recruited from Veterans’ Administration clinic. Ss not required to have history of parasuicidal behavior.

Randomized controlled trial comparing DBT(n=10) to treatment-as-usual (n=10) in outpatient setting. Length of treatment was six months. Ss were assessed at baseline, treatment midpoint (3 months), and at treatment completion (six months).

This study included all components of standard DBT. Because of shorter treatment duration (six months), all skills were taught one time only.

Ss in the DBT condition showed statistically greater reductions in suicidal ideation, depression, hopelessness, and anger compared to TAU Ss at post-treatment. Upon treatment completion, 3 of 10 DBT Ss continued to meet criteria for BPD compared to 5 of 10 in TAU. This study differs from Linehan’s original trial in its shortened duration of treatment (from 12 months to 6 months). Additionally, this study did not include current or past history of paras uicidal behaviors as criteria for inclusion.

Trupin, Stewart, Beach, Boesky (in press).

Juvenile female offenders in a mental health cottage in a correctional facility.

Quasi-experimental study comparing pre-post outcomes. Compared outcomes from cottage implementing DBT to a treatment as usual cottage with comparable characteristics.

Application primarily of DBT skills as well as consultation team. Each skills module taught over four week period in 60-90 minute groups occurring 1 to 2 times weekly. Skills strengthening occurred through coaching in the milieu.

Behavioral problems (aggression, parasuicide, and class disruption) were significantly higher within the experimental cottage at pretreatment and decreased significantly during intervention compared to other cottage. Following the DBT intervention, staff in the DBT cottage used fewer restrictive punitive responses. Following the DBT intervention, youth showed significantly improved transition to and participation in on-campus therapeutic, educational and vocational services.

Lynch, Morse, Mendelson, & Robins (under review)

Ss of depressed individuals age 60 and older; outpatient treatment

Randomized controlled trial (N=34) comparing DBT to treatment as usual plus clinical management in 28 w eek treatment. All Ss received anti -depressant medications. Ss assessed at baseline, 28 weeks, and at 6- month follow up.

Ss only received DBT group skills training mode of treatment, in addition to anti -depressant medications. Targets modified to emphasize treating depression in elderly population. Skills modules taught once.

Between group analyses revealed one significant difference. The DBT condition showed significantly less maladaptive Pleasing Others compared to TAU. The number of individuals with clinically significant minimal depression at posttreatment using the BDI were similar across condition, but favored DBT at follow -up. For the HAMD, 67% of DBT patients met criteria for being both significantly improved and asymptomatic at posttreatment, as opposed to 50% of TAU patients. At the 6-month follow -up, 73% of DBT patients and 40% of TAU patients were within the asymptomatic range. Analyses revealed a number of significant changes over time within group on secondary measures of functional status and coping style, with the vast majority favoring the DBT condition.

SUMMARY OF RESEARCH FINDINGS IN DBT DIMEFF, L., KOERNER, K., & LINEHAN, M.M. (2001)

Dimeff, L., Koerner, K., & Linehan, M.M. (2001). Summary of Research on DBT. THE BEHAVIORAL TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER GROUP. Seattle, WA, 98105 Please do not distribute without author permission.

Authors Subjects/Setting Design Adherence to

Standard DBT Outcomes and Comments

Linehan, Dimeff, Reynolds, Comtois, Shaw Welch, Heagerty, & Kivlahan (submitted)

Opiate-addicted BPD women, 18 to 45 years old; outpatient clinic.

Randomized controlled trial (N=23) comparing DBT to Comprehensive Validation Therapy (CVT) with 12-Step. Ss assessed at 4, 8, 12 months and at a 16 month follow -up. All subjects (experimental and control) received a maintenance dose of opiate-replacement medication (i.e., ORLAAM or methadone). Ss transferred to methadone maintenance program following completion of treatment for ongoing drug replacement therapy.

DBT Ss received comprehensive DBT, modified for substance abusers with BPD. Modes of treatment included weekly individual psychotherapy, 90 minute group skills training (didactic only) and 30- minute individual skills coaching (homework review) homework review, as -needed case management, pharmacotherapy, and consultation team. Ss were exposed to all skills twice within this 12-month trial. Modes of CVT included weekly psychotherapy, weekly therapist supervision, as needed case management, pharmacotherapy, and optional 12-step sponsor meeting and standard 12- step meeting.

In contrast to DBT, CVT+12S was focused on validating the client and her experiences in a warm and supportive, non-directive atmosphere. Clients were encouraged to develop their confidence in themselves as capable, individuals worthy of therapists’ respect, and reinforcing self-verification. Validation of public and private behaviors occurred only when the behavior was valid (e.g., effective in terms of the client’s long term goals, was logically consistent with actual data or consistent with normative behavior). Major findings are three-fold: First, Ss in both conditions significantly reduced opiate use over time; at the 16 month assessment, subjects in both treatments had a low proportion of opiate-positive UA (27% DBT; 33% CVT ). Secondly, CVT was remarkably effective in maintaining Ss in treatment (100% remained the entire treatment year, compared to 64%in DBT). Finally, Ss in both conditions showed a significant reduction in psychopathology over time.

Turner, Ralph M. Ss recruited from ER after suicide attempts; outpatient

Randomized controlled trial (N=24) comparing DBT-oriented therapy to client-centered therapy (session range: 49-84 sessions). Ss assessed at baseline and at 6- and 12-month follow -ups. Ss received

Psy chodynamic techniques added to standard DBT to conceptualize Ss’ emotions and cognitions. To keep treatment conditions equal with regard to clinical contact hours, DBT skills training took place during individual therapy sessions, not in a separate group. Both treatment conditions received six sessions of group focusing on significant persons in the Ss environment.

Modifications to standard DBT made at theoretical and applied level, including incorporating of psychodynamic strategies and elimination of distinct DBT skills training mode. Results support efficacy of DBT -oriented treatment. At 6- and 12-month follow -up, Ss in DBT condition showed statistically significant gains in suicide/self-harm behavior compared to CCT Ss. At 12-month follow -up, DBT Ss showed significantly less anger, impulsivity, and depression than CCT Ss, as well as significantly improved global mental health functioning. At both 6-and 12-month follow - ups, DBT -oriented therapy significantly reduced hospitalization stays.

SUMMARY OF RESEARCH FINDINGS IN DBT DIMEFF, L., KOERNER, K., & LINEHAN, M.M. (2001)

Dimeff, L., Koerner, K., & Linehan, M.M. (2001). Summary of Research on DBT. THE BEHAVIORAL TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER GROUP. Seattle, WA, 98105 Please do not distribute without author permission.

REFERENCES

Barley, W.D., Buie, S.E., Peterson, E.W., Hollingsworth, A.S., Griva, M., Hickerson, S.C., Lawson, J.E., & Bailey, B.J. (1993). The development of an inpatient cognitive-behavioral treatment program for borderline personality disorder. Journal of Personality Disorders, 7, 232-240.

Bohus, M., Haaf, B., & Stiglmayr, C., et al. (2000). Evaluation of inpatient dialectical-behavioral therapy for borderline personality disorder - a prospective study. Behavior Research and Therapy , 38, 875-887.

Evans,K.; Tyrer,P.; Catalan,J.; Schmidt,U.; Davidson,K.; Dent,J.; Tata,P.; Thornton,S.; Barber,J.; Thompson,S.(1999). Manual-assisted cognitive- behavior therapy (MACT): A randomized controlled trial of a brief intervention with bibliotherapy in the treatment of recurrent deliberate self-harm. Psychological Medicine, 29, 19-25.

Koons, C.R., Robins, C.J., Tweed, J.L, Lynch, T.R, Gonzalez, A.M, G.K., Morse, J.Q., Bishop, G.K., Butterfield, M.I., & Bastian, L.A. (2001). Efficacy of dialectical behavior therapy in women veterans with borderline personality disorder. Behavior Therapy, 32, 371-390.

Linehan, M.M., Armstrong, H.E., Suarez, A., Allmon, D., & Heard, H.L. (1991). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of chronically parasuicidal borderline patients. Archives of General Psychiatry, 48, 1060-1064.

Linehan, M.M., Heard, H.L., & Armstrong, H.E. (1993). Naturalistic follow up of a behavioral treatment for chronically parasuicidal borderline patients. Archives of General Psychiatry, 50, 971.

Linehan, M.M., Schmidt, H., Dimeff, L.A., Craft, J.C., Kanter, J., & Comtois, K.A. (1999). Dialectical behavior therapy for patients with borderline personality disorder and drug-dependence. American Journal on Addiction, 8, 279-292.

Linehan, M.M., Dimeff, L.A., Reynolds, S.K., Comtois, K.A., Shaw Welch, S., Heagerty, P., Kivlahan, D.R. (submitted). Dialectical behavior therapy versus comprehensive validation plus 12-step for the treatment of opioid dependent women meeting criteria for borderline personality disorder.

Lynch, T.R., Morse, J.Q., Mendelson, T., & Robins, C.J. (under review). A randomized trial of dialectical behavior therapy for depressed older adults: Post-treatment and six month follow-up.

McCann, R., & Ball, E.M. (1996, November). Using dialectical behavior therapy with an inpatient forensic population. Workshop presented at the 1st annual meeting of the International Society for the Improvement and Teaching of Dialectical Behavior Therapy (ISITDBT), New York, NY.

McCann, R., Ball, E.M., & Ivanoff, A. (in review). The effectiveness of dialectical behavior therapy in reducing burnout among forensic staff.

Miller, AL, Rathus, JH, Leigh, E., and Landsman, M. (1996, November). A pilot study: Dialectical behavior therapy adapted for suicidal adolescents. Poster presented at the 1st annual meeting of the International Society for the Improvement and Teaching of Dialectical Behavior Therapy (ISITDBT), New York, NY.

Safer, DL., Telch, CF, & Agras, WS. (2001). Dialectical behavior therapy for bulimia nervosa. American Journal of Psychiatry, 158, 632-634.

Safer, DL., Telch, CF, & Agras, WS. (2001). Dialectical behavior therapy for bulimia: A case report. International Journal of Eating Disorders, 30, 101-106.

Springer, T., Lohr, N.E.; Buchtel, H.A.; Silk, K.R. (1996). A preliminary report of short-term cognitive-behavioral group therapy for inpatients with personality disorders. Journal of Psychotherapy Practice and Research, 5, 57-71.

Stanley, B., Ivanoff, A., Brodsky, B., Oppenheim, S., & Mann, J. (1998). Comparison of DBT and "treatment as usual" in suicidal and self-mutilating behavior. Proceedings of the 32nd Association for the Advancement of Behavior Therapy Convention, Washington, D.C.

Telch, C.F., Agras, W.S., & Linehan, M.M. (2000). Group dialectical behavior therapy for binge eating disorder: A preliminary uncontrolled trial. Behavior Therapy , 31, 569-582.

Telch, C.F., Agras, W.S., & Linehan, M.M. (in press). Dialectical behavior therapy for binge eating disorder: A promising new treatment. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology.

Trupin, E.W., Stewart, D.G., Beach, B., & Boesky, L. (in press). Effectiveness of a dialectical behavior therapy program for incarcerated female juvenile offenders. Child Psychology and Psychiatric Review.

Wiser, S., & Telch, CF. (1999). DBT for Binge-Eating Disorder. Journal of Clinical Psychology , 55, 755-768.

Effectiveness of Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) versus Standard Therapeutic Milieu (STM) in a Cohort of Adolescents Receiving Residential Treatment.pdf

Organizations that would like to evaluate the effectiveness of different therapy methods are often forced to use existing outcomes measures and to match subjects that received one form of treatment compared to another.

This study of adolescents compared two different forms of treatment used in two dif- ferent states. One state used Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT), and the other used Standard Therapeutic Milieu (STM). Data were abstracted from the hospital system and adolescents were matched on age, gender, and primary Axis I diagnosis, yielding a pri- mary “perfect” match sample (n = 14), and a secondary match sample (n = 24) where the secondary Axis I diagnosis was used. Outcomes were measured by the BPRS-C, which is the standard outcome measure used by KidsPeace Lee Salk Center for Research.

Results indicated that DBT was clinically and statistically more effective than STM for the Depression subscale of the BPRS-C. In addition, Organicity symptoms were eliminated by DBT treatment. STM demonstrated greater efficacy on the Psychomotor Excitation subscale, but the power of the statistical model was low.

Key words: outcomes; dialectical behavior therapy; BPRS-C; residential care and treatment

Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) was developed for the treatment and control of behavioral issues (Rakfeldt, 2005) that lead to self-injurious or suicidal acts, specif- ically in adult (Miller, Glinski, Woodberry, Mitchell, & Indik, 2002) Borderline Personality Disorder (Miller, Rathus, & Linehan, 2007; Rakfeldt, 2005). Rakfeldt

Effectiveness of Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) versus Standard Therapeutic Milieu (STM) in a Cohort of Adolescents Receiving Residential Treatment

Thomas Wasser, Rachael Tyler, Krista McIlhaney, Renee Taplin, and Lorrie Henderson

Thomas Wasser, PhD, MEd, is research operations director for HealthCore, Inc. in Wilmington, Delaware, and a dean at KidsPeace Lee Salk Center for Research, National Headquarters, in Sch- necksville, Pennsylvania. Rachael Tyler, LCSW, is a clinical supervisor at KidsPeace, Graham Lake Campus, in Ellsworth, Maine. Krista McIlhaney, MA, is a clinical systems analyst at KidsPeace Lee Salk Center for Research, National Headquarters, in Schnecksville. Renee Taplin, LCSW, is a social worker at KidsPeace, Graham Lake Campus, in Ellsworth. Lorrie Henderson, PhD, is chief operat- ing officer at KidsPeace National Headquarters in Schnecksville.

© 2008 Lyceum Books, Inc., Best Practices in Mental Health, Vol. 4, No. 2, Summer 2008

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 114

(2005) provides an excellent review of efficacy studies prior to about 2004, as well as reports on the results of a small study conducted on a residential sample. Other research describes the use of DBT outside of the self-injury and suicide diagnosis groups or has made an effort to define the mechanisms within DBT that make it effective (Lynch, Chapman, Rosenthal, Kuo, & Linehan, 2006); and still other research reports on long-term (two-year) follow-up with clients treated with DBT (Linehan et al., 2006).

The use of DBT has also been extended to different diagnostic groups. These groups include Oppositional Defiant Disorder (Nelson-Gray et al., 2006), HIV pre- vention (Lescano, Brown, Puster, & Miller, 2004), eating disorders (Wisniewski & Ben-Porath, 2005), and others. In addition, DBT delivery methods have been examined for use in, among others, family therapy (Miller, Glinski, Woodberry, Mitchell, & Indik, 2002), telephone therapy (Wisniewski & Ben-Porath, 2005), and hospitalized inpatients’ therapy (Katz, Cox, Gunasekara, & Miller, 2004; Swenson, Sanderson, Dulit, & Linehan, 2001). The combined use of DBT and antipsychotic medication has been investigated as well (Soler et al., 2005).

Of the studies reviewed, several used pre-test and post-test measurement designs, and different outcomes measures with small samples. Rakfeldt (2005) found effectiveness of DBT on quality-of-life indicators in a small (n = 7) sample of DBT clients compared to a control. Soler et al. (2005) compared a DBT-and- olanzapine treatment group with a DBT-and-placebo control group in a study of clients with Borderline Personality Disorder. Close examination of the control group data indicates that DBT was effective in significantly reducing symptoms as measured by the Hamilton Depression Rating Scale, the Hamilton Anxiety Rating Scale, and the Clinical Global Impression Severity score. There is also evidence that demonstrates that DBT reduces readmission rates, use of emergency services, and suicide attempts during a two-year period following therapy (Linehan et al., 2006).

A few studies have been conducted specifically on adolescents. Sunseri (2004) found a decreased length of hospitalization for suicidal adolescent girls when DBT was used. Nelson-Gray et al. (2006) used a modified form of DBT in group therapy (n = 32) for Oppositional Defiant Disorder and found DBT to be effective in decreasing negative behavior and increasing positive behavior. An inpatient study (Katz et al., 2004) on sixty-two adolescents with suicide attempts or ideation com- pared baseline, discharge, and one-year follow-up scores on several instruments. Analysis conducted by repeated-measures analysis of variance indicated larger, significant effect sizes on the Beck Depression Inventory (thirteen-item), the Suici- dal Ideation Questionnaire, and the Kazdin Hopelessness Scale for Children.

The study presented here applied the DBT technique with residential adoles- cents in one state who were matched (by age, gender, and Axis I diagnosis) with residential children in another state who received Standard Therapeutic Milieu (STM) consisting of several approaches of both individual and group therapies. This study compares outcomes with the Brief Psychiatric Rating Scale for Children (BPRS-C) tool, which is the standard outcome measure used by KidsPeace Lee Salk Center for Research. The purpose of this research is threefold: first, to examine

Effectiveness of DBT versus STM in a Cohort of Adolescents 115

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 115

the use of the BPRS-C in clients with lower acuity than inpatient hospitalized children; second, to examine the efficacy of DBT as practiced in a purely applied residential setting; and third, to provide study data on a small cohort of clients with mixed diagnosis that will aid decisions about whether to expand DBT services into other KidsPeace therapeutic settings.

Methods

While it is understood that the use of a single outcome measure is not the strongest research design possible in outcomes research, we used the BPRS-C for various reasons. First, the BPRS-C has been the standard outcome measure used at KidsPeace Lee Salk Center for Research since 2003, and it has been shown to be effective in demonstrating outcomes in residential treatment (McIlhaney, Hender- son, Gunn, & Wasser, in press). This research demonstrated the significant efficacy of STM in children receiving residential care using admission versus discharge methodology. Second, there is not a total score that has been validated for the BPRS-C; rather, the tool uses seven, independently validated subscales (Overall & Pfefferbaum, 1981), which in essence provide seven separate indices of psycho- metric evaluation. Also, the method in which KidsPeace applies the tool is inde- pendent of any clinical decision-making process regarding the client. Data for the BPRS-C are completed by the clinical staff and sent to the Lee Salk Center for Research, the evaluation and outcomes-monitoring arm for the KidsPeace organi- zation, where the data are entered and analyzed. This process is not biased as com- pared to a situation where clinical decisions are made on the basis of the outcomes measure. In these situations, the outcomes measures are in essence a self-fulfilling prophecy of the treatment, and so are biased. This study does not suffer from this flawed methodology.

Training and Therapy Definitions

All clinical staff from both states complete training for the BPRS-C through a self-directed learning packet, which contains a competency exam. All clinical staff must satisfactorily complete this training in order for them to enter the BPRS-C questionnaires into the electronic client-record system.

Two of six clinicians were trained in DBT. This training consisted of two full days of on-site training, facilitated by a doctoral student. Additional training was conducted externally at a local hospital and a college of social work. There is cur- rently no certification required to practice DBT. Clients received weekly exposure to DBT for seventeen weeks. The therapy was delivered in skills-training group ses- sions all facilitated by a DBT-trained therapist. These sessions included homework assignments where clients were tracking behavior and skill use daily. Child care staff was also educated about the homework assignments for those clients in group sessions, so that daily “exposure” to material could be prompted or coached. Parents (or guardians) also participated in the group sessions with the clients. This occurred in scheduled four-group sessions where clients attend with their parent or guardian, or where the parents (or guardian) attended every other week for the

116 Best Practices in Mental Health

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 116

duration of the group. The exact exposure of DBT techniques could not be objec- tively or accurately quantified nor fidelity to DBT assessed for this cohort. This is because not all DBT components were offered, and given the complexity of staff scheduling, not all therapy sessions were conducted by a DBT-trained clinician.

Standard Therapeutic Milieu (STM) provided behavioral, group, family, and individual therapy and pharmacotherapy as appropriate to the client’s individual treatment plan. In addition, all clients received continuing education at an on-site

Effectiveness of DBT versus STM in a Cohort of Adolescents 117

Table 1 Comparison between DBT and STM Treatments

Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) Standard Therapeutic Milieu (STM)

Group therapy with concentration: • Heightened focus on Commitment

Strategies in the initial stages of treat- ment (contract, interview, and discus- sion with individual therapist prior to participation in group work)

• Orientation to skills to be learned prior to initial group session (pre-treatment interview)

• Targeted skills training • Psychological education regarding the

probable origin of problematic behaviors • Skills acquisition and strengthening

Family inclusion with: • Orientation of family members to treat-

ment format, philosophies, nonjudg- mental language to describe behaviors, situations, and emotions

• Psycho-education around skills being taught and how parents/families can reinforce skillful behavior use

Presentation of skills training material offered through: • Experiential learning opportunities • Multi-modal teaching (notes, news-

papers, audio, hands-on, etc.)

Self-monitoring: • Homework assignments that require

client to self-monitor target behaviors, emotions, and skill use

• Verbal and written feedback from facili- tators regarding use of skills or problem behavior

Individual therapy sessions that addressed: • Review of content of recent skills train-

ing groups • Exploration of ways to generalize

learned skills to practical situations

Traditional group therapy • Psycho-education model • Curriculum-guided groups • Various skill and issue groups (concen-

tration areas: anger management, healthy sexuality, self-care, personal hygiene, self-concept, social skills, com- munication skills)

• Life-skills development • Positive Youth Environment (PYE)

Family therapy • Focus on family reintegration/reunifica-

tion • Relationship building • Family teaching modules that address

parenting skills and medication under- standing

Recreational Therapy • Therapeutically supervised socialization

activities • Expressive therapy (art, music, dance,

theater, creative writing, etc.)

Client-centered environment with inter- related self-management performance appraisal system • Daily goal reviews • Behavioral evaluations (The STEP system)

Individual Therapy • Life Space Counseling • Behavior modification • Crisis management

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 117

school. Therapy was provided by a multidisciplinary team, which consisted of representatives from psychiatry, psychology, social work, nursing, and recreational therapy. A master’s-level clinician or mental health professional administered all individual and family therapy. Degreed and nondegreed direct-care workers pro- vided group therapy and behavioral therapy. These workers taught the clients to maintain personal control, build relationships, practice safety, and decrease aggres- sive and/or self-injurious behaviors. Structured activities of treatment included the development of social skills through using busy and quiet time. The treatment focus was on comprehensive diagnosis, crisis management, and appropriate treat- ment using many different modes depending on each individual’s needs.

Client Selection

The clinical supervisor identified thirteen clients who had received DBT from one state where KidsPeace has residential treatment facilities. The identification numbers for these clients were transferred to the research center where their elec- tronic data was retrieved. Matching was then conducted on non-DBT clients from another state based on three hierarchical criteria: diagnosis, gender, and age. Using this strategy there was one client who was excluded with a primary Axis I diagnosis of anorexia nervosa; no match could be found for this diagnosis.

Exact matches were found for seven (58%) of the remaining twelve subjects, yielding a sample of fourteen clients for the matched analysis. This sample was an exact match for gender (one girl and six boys) and age (14.29 years with a stan- dard deviation equal to 1.38). The last selection criterion was Axis I diagnosis where there was an exact match on the primary diagnosis as well: three clients with Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder, and one client each with Major Depression, Conduct Disorder, Mood Disorder, and Post-traumatic Stress Disorder (Table 2).

118 Best Practices in Mental Health

Table 2 Demographic Variables

Primary Match Sample Secondary Match Sample (n = 7 per group) (n = 12 per group)

Variable DBT STM p-value DBT STM p-value

Gender 1 Female 1 Female 1.000 3 Female 3 Female 1.000 6 Male 6 Male 9 Male 9 Male

Age 14.29 ± 14.29 ± 1.000 14.67 ± 14.58 ± 0.911 1.38 1.38 1.83 1.78

Length 466.57 ± 370.0 ± 0.231 424.33 ± 325.17 ± 0.091 of Stay 67.02 184.17 119.27 153.80

Diagnosis 3–Attention Deficit Hyperactivity 4–Major Depression 1–Major Depression 3–Attention Deficit Hyperactivity 1–Conduct Disorder 2–Post-traumatic Stress Disorder 1–Mood Disorder 1–Conduct Disorder 1–Post-traumatic Stress Disorder 1–Mood Disorder

1–Oppositional Defiant Disorder

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 118

For the secondary match for the five remaining clients, the DBT client group was matched with clients from the STM group based on the second diagnosis under the Axis I diagnosis category. This strategy was successful and added five subjects to each group (n = 12 pairs, overall n = 24), one Oppositional Defiant Dis- order, three depression (two Major Depression, one Depressive Disorder), and one Post-traumatic Stress Disorder. Goodness-of-fit tests were again conducted on gen- der and age. The sample was an exact match for gender (three girls and nine boys). One client differed by one year in age, but this did not cause a significant difference (p = 0.911). This data as well as length-of-stay data is also presented in Table 2.

Analysis Methods

The analysis consisted of a repeated-measures two-factor Analysis of Variance (ANOVA). The repeated-measures factor was the Time variable, defined as baseline and discharge, and the other factor was Treatment Method, defined as either DBT or STM. One model was constructed for each BPRS-C subscale. The use of these more complex ANOVA statistical models was intended to lower experiment error rate since there were seven subscales to be tested.

For these ANOVA models, only the main effects (time effects and group effects) were relevant in determining the overall success of therapeutic methods. If the ANOVA was significant, post-hoc tests were performed by t tests. To compare base- line and discharge mean scores, paired t tests were used. These tests were per- formed and reported within each therapy method (STM and DBT). Since the design of this study utilized nonrandomized matching, baseline tests were used to ensure that the groups were not statistically different at baseline leading to selec- tion bias. These tests were performed using group t tests. Because of the small sample size and the complications of using an analysis of this nature on small samples, Levine’s variance tests were used to ensure that the variances were equal. Levine’s test was used to either verify the assumption of the t test that group variances were equal or indicate if outliers were present. If the variance tests were significant, separate variance estimates were used to compute the t-value and p-value. All of the results for these tests were reported for each group.

Any statistic was considered to be significant if the calculated p-value was less than 0.05. Because of the exploratory nature of the tests, and the small sample size, trend-significant p-values were considered to be between 0.10 and 0.051. It is important to also note that no statistical corrections were made to control the analysis for multiple comparisons. Since the analysis of this data was exploratory in nature, it was important to identify any factor that demonstrated slight efficacy of treatment. Since this approach might yield more statistical differences, although controlled for using the ANOVA analysis, statistical power (probability of correctly rejecting the null-hypothesis) was computed for each ANOVA model and reported (1-_). The statistics were then interpreted in light of the calculated statistical power of each ANOVA, the significance of the omnibus ANOVA test, and then the results of the post-hoc comparisons. It is thought that this statistical analysis, including the calculated power results, will be useful in light of the small sample size.

Effectiveness of DBT versus STM in a Cohort of Adolescents 119

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 119

Results

Table 3 presents the data for each of the BPRS-C subscales for the primary match sample (n = 7, n = 14 total). Significant omnibus ANOVA within-subjects effects were obtained for Depression (p = 0.004), Psychomotor Excitation (p = 0.029), and Anxiety (p = 0.017) subscales of the BPRS-C. Trend-significant results were obtained for the Withdraw (p = 0.085) and Organicity (p = 0.096) subscales of the BPRS-C. No significant effects were observed for Behavior Prob- lems or Thought Disturbance subscales (p = 0.156 and p = 0.171, respectively).

Baseline comparisons were not significant for any of the seven BPRS-C sub- scales, indicating that there was no selection bias in the sample based on sympto- mology. There was one significant discharge difference between DBT and STM groups for the Psychomotor Excitation subscale (p = 0.034). This difference was in favor of the efficacy of STM over DBT (0.48 ± 0.38 versus 1.33 ± 0.82; mean ± standard deviation). There were no trend significances observed for any other group t test at discharge between DBT and STM groups.

120 Best Practices in Mental Health

Table 3 Results of Two-Way Repeated Measures Analysis of Variance, Including Post-hoc Testing. (Exact match sample n = 7 per group)

BPRS-C Groups Baseline Discharge Paired Omnibus Observed Subscale t test ANOVA Model

p-value p-value Power (within

subjects)

Behavior DBT 2.43 ± 1.56 1.86 ± 1.62 0.474 Problems STM 1.86 ± 0.94 1.00 ± 1.39 0.188 0.156 0.286

p-value 0.423 0.309

Depression DBT 2.19 ± 1.26 0.95 ± 1.01 0.039 STM 2.29 ± 2.07 0.76 ± 0.63 0.053 0.004 0.894

p-value 0.919 0.679

Thought DBT 0.57 ± 1.10 0.05 ± 0.13 0.221 Disturbance STM 1.10 ± 1.92 0.33 ± 0.75 0.375 0.171 0.268

p-value 0.546 0.337

Psychomotor DBT 1.67 ± 1.32 1.33 ± 0.82 0.485 Excitation STM 1.52 ± 0.77 0.48 ± 0.38 0.019 0.029 0.626

p-value 0.809 0.034

Withdraw DBT 1.33 ± 0.94 0.62 ± 0.62 0.130 STM 1.81 ± 0.96 1.00 ± 1.19 0.292 0.085 0.409

p-value 0.367 0.466

Anxiety DBT 2.10 ± 1.12 0.71 ± 0.45 0.076 STM 1.52 ± 1.07 1.05 ± 0.85 0.124 0.017 0.724

p-value 0.348 0.382

Organicity DBT 0.24 ± 0.37 0.00 ± 0.00 0.140 STM 0.29 ± 0.30 0.19 ± 0.26 0.457 0.096 0.383

p-value 0.796 0.103

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 120

Repeated-measures paired t tests found significant improvement on the Depres- sion subscale for DBT (p = 0.039) and a trend-significant improvement for the same subscale for STM (p = 0.053). A statistically significant improvement was also seen for STM on the Psychomotor Excitation subscale (p = 0.019). And a trend-significant improvement was observed for the Anxiety subscale in favor of DBT treatment (p = 0.076). All of these paired post-hoc comparisons were made possible by significant omnibus within subjects ANOVA results.

Table 4 presents the data for each of the BPRS-C subscales for the primary match sample (n = 12, n = 24 total). Omnibus ANOVA within-subjects effects results were statistically significant or trend-significant for all subscales of the BPRS-C. Significant effects were observed for Behavior Problems (p = 0.042), Depression (p = 0.001), Thought Disturbance (p = 0.050), Psychomotor Excita- tion (p = 0.033), and Anxiety (p = 0.010). Trend significance was observed for the other two subscales: Withdraw (p = 0.072) and Organicity (p = 0.069). Based on these levels of significance, it was decided that an examination of all post-hoc comparisons was warranted.

Effectiveness of DBT versus STM in a Cohort of Adolescents 121

Table 4 Results of Two-Way Repeated Measures Analysis of Variance, Including Post-hoc Testing. (Full sample, n = 12 per group)

BPRS-C Groups Baseline Discharge Paired Omnibus Observed Subscale t test ANOVA Model

p-value p-value Power (within

subjects)

Behavior DBT 2.19 ± 1.45 1.81 ± 1.64 0.452 Problems STM 2.36 ± 1.23 1.31 ± 1.35 0.380 0.042 0.540

p-value 0.765 0.423

Depression DBT 2.25 ± 1.82 1.19 ± 0.99 0.009 STM 2.25 ± 1.16 1.11 ± 1.33 0.045 0.001 0.934

p-value 1.000 0.863

Thought DBT 0.61 ± 1.00 0.08 ± 0.21 0.062 Disturbance STM 0.92 ± 1.54 0.31 ± 0.59 0.234 0.050 0.511

p-value 0.571 0.242

Psychomotor DBT 1.31 ± 1.21 1.31 ± 0.74 1.00 Excitation STM 1.53 ± 0.70 0.67 ± 0.59 0.001 0.033 0.583

p-value 0.588 0.029

Withdraw DBT 1.17 ± 0.92 0.58 ± 0.64 0.056 STM 1.47 ± 0.83 1.06 ± 1.03 0.378 0.072 0.440

p-value 0.402 0.192

Anxiety DBT 2.14 ± 1.37 1.39 ± 0.84 0.069 STM 1.64 ± 0.96 0.94 ± 0.90 0.074 0.010 0.770

p-value 0.312 0.223

Organicity DBT 0.19 ± 0.33 0.00 ± 0.00 0.067 STM 0.25 ± 0.29 0.17 ± 0.27 0.463 0.069 0.446

p-value 0.666 0.053

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 121

An exact mean match was observed for the Depression subscale between DBT and STM groups (mean = 2.25, p = 1.00). Discharge group differences were seen for only the Psychomotor Excitation subscale, in favor of STM (p = 0.029), and a trend difference in favor of DBT for the Organicity subscale (p = 0.053).

Repeated-measures paired t tests found significant improvement for both treat- ment groups on the Depression subscale (DBT p = 0.009, STM p = 0.045). The only other statistically significant improvement was for the Psychomotor Excita- tion subscale for the STM cohort (p = 0.001), linked with a mean reduction of symptoms from 1.53 ± 0.70 at baseline to 0.67 ± 0.59 at discharge (mean ± stan- dard deviation). Trend significance was seen for both groups for the Anxiety sub- scale (DBT p = 0.069, STM p = 0.074). The remaining trend effects of treatment were all positive and all in favor of DBT treatment. These trend differences were for Thought Disturbance (0.062), Withdraw (0.056), and Organicity (0.067).

It should be noted that the calculated statistical power (1-_) for all of the sta- tistically significant and trend-significant results was relatively moderate. The only adequate power calculations, those above 80 percent, were for the Depression subscale for both the Primary match sample (89.4%) and also for the Secondary match sample (93.4%).

Conclusion

Organizations that are on the front line of direct delivery of treatments and alternative therapies to their clients are constantly evaluating their available data in order to determine which therapies work best. While the results of this small study are preliminary and not yet conclusive, the KidsPeace organization will con- tinue to collect and evaluate its performance on DBT and all other therapies over time.

The organization’s clinical staff did conclude, however, based on the results of this study, that the use of DBT treatment was worth additional examination, and it was decided to further deploy the treatment to additional residential centers. This will provide additional clients with DBT and provide further outcomes data for a more concrete evaluation. Most encouraging in favor of DBT were the results regarding depression: the high level of statistical significance combined with the high statistical power make these results notable even with the small sample size.

While the range of symptoms as measured by the BPRS-C is not remarkable, it should be noted that the BPRS-C subscales were sensitive enough to capture small changes within these two small samples. The range of possible scores for each BPRS-C subscale is from 0.0, reflecting no observable symptoms, to 6.0, reflecting situations when symptoms are at a maximum. The highest observed subscale score in this study was for the Primary DBT sample (mean = 2.43). This mean does not approach the 50 percent point at which the scale is sensitive. Other notable findings were baseline values for Thought Disturbance in the secondary sample as well as the Organicity subscale for both the primary and secondary samples where observed baseline means were less than 1.0, and, in the case of Organicity, far less.

122 Best Practices in Mental Health

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 122

Even given these low-baseline subscale scores, treatment efficacy was observed, albeit with lower than adequate statistical power. These data for residential treat- ment settings as monitored by the BPRS-C are consistent with McIlhaney et al. (in press), in terms of adolescent residential care severity at baseline.

It should also be noted that each sample yielded consistent results across each subscale, meaning that if one therapy method (DBT or STM) demonstrated greater efficacy on the smaller sample (n = 14), it also demonstrated greater efficacy on the larger sample (n = 24). While the statistical power is low, this finding adds some credibility to the observed findings regarding treatment efficacy. All symp- toms improved over time for both treatment groups on each BPRS-C subscale. This indicates that effective treatment is being delivered, and that both DBT and STM demonstrate some level of efficacy, whether statistically significant or not. In addi- tion, the low mean scores on baseline testing would rule out regression artifacts as an explanation for symptom improvement.

DBT demonstrated statistically significant symptom improvement over STM on the Depression subscale with a model that had excellent statistical power. These observed results would appear to be the most conclusive findings for this study. STM demonstrated greater treatment efficacy than DBT for the Psychomotor Exci- tation symptoms as measured on the BPRS-C; low power for the model, however, prevents this finding from being conclusive. One comment on Organicity is that symptoms were eliminated for the DBT group at discharge. While the levels of baseline symptoms are not remarkable, the floor effect (the elimination of all symptoms as measured on the BPRS-C) for the DBT group decreases the standard deviation to 0.0 (Tables 3 and 4) and will dramatically reduce statistical power.

Power Analysis

Only one ANOVA power analysis was above the 1-_ = 0.80 threshold, indicat- ing a high probability of true treatment efficacy. This was for the Depression sub- scale for both the primary and secondary samples (0.934 and 0.894, respec- tively). All other statistical power values were below the 1-_ = 0.80 threshold. This finding is not uncommon with studies involving small samples, and indicates that the statistically significant results from Tables 2 and 3 should be interpreted cau- tiously, as there is a less than 80 percent chance that the rejections are accurate.

Power was greater for the secondary match over the primary match for all BPRS-C subscales except one, Psychomotor Excitation. Neither power figure was above the 0.80 threshold value (0.583 for the secondary match, and 0.626 for the primary match). This was probably due to the observed means in the secondary match for DBT being exactly the same (mean = 1.31) for both baseline and dis- charge.

Limitations

This study does not compare costs associated with increased length of stay in DBT as compared to STM. This is because, while there was a clinical difference

Effectiveness of DBT versus STM in a Cohort of Adolescents 123

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 123

between the primary and secondary samples, it was not statistically significant (p = 0.231 and p = 0.091, respectively). Because of the lack of significance, it could not be assured that any assigned dollar amounts would be meaningful. While the study’s small sample size is a drawback, it is reflective of the applied set- tings where treatment decisions are made based upon the best available data.

Summary and Recommendations

This study was not able to confirm a shorter length of stay for DBT clients as found by Sunseri (2004). The current study found in the full sample n = 12 a near-statistical difference (p = 0.091) that DBT had a 100-day-longer length of stay than STM. The same pattern was found for the primary sample but less sig- nificantly. DBT was, however, found to be a valid therapeutic method in our study of adolescents receiving standard care in a residential (nonresearch, nonacade- mic) treatment facility. This finding is based on the fact that 1) DBT techniques were not focused on clients by diagnosis group, and 2) that DBT clients were not fully engrossed in DBT techniques (only two of six therapists practiced the model).

DBT was found to be more effective in treating depression symptoms as mea- sured by the BPRS-C than STM. Also, the fact that all observable symptoms were eliminated for organicity for all DBT clients may indicate that DBT is more effec- tive for these symptoms as well; however, this deserves further study. STM was found to be more effective in treating symptoms present with psychomotor excita- tion, yet the observed power was less than adequate.

References Katz, L., Cox, B., Gunasekara, S., & Miller, A. (2004). Feasibility of dialectical

behavior therapy for suicidal adolescent inpatients. Journal of the Ameri- can Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 43(3), 276–282.

Lescano, C., Brown, L., Puster, K., & Miller, P. (2004). Sexual abuse and adoles- cent HIV risk: A group intervention framework. Journal of HIV/AIDS Pre- vention in Children and Youth, 6(1), 43–57.

Linehan, M., Comtois, K., Murray, A., Brown, M., Gallop, R., Heard, H. L., Korslund, K. E., Tutek, D. A., Reynolds, S. K., & Lindenboim, N. (2006). Two-year randomized controlled trial and follow-up of dialectical behav- ior therapy vs therapy by experts for suicidal behaviors and borderline personality disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 63(7), 757–766.

Lynch, T., Chapman, A., Rosenthal, M., Kuo, J., & Linehan, M. (2006). Mecha- nisms of change in dialectical behavior therapy: Theoretical and empiri- cal observations. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 62(4), 459–480.

McIlhaney, K., Henderson, L., Gunn, S., & Wasser, T. (in press). Validity and use of the brief psychiatric rating scale—children (BPRS-C) as an outcomes measure in the residential and foster care setting. Residential Treatment for Children and Youth.

124 Best Practices in Mental Health

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 124

Miller, A., Glinski, J., Woodberry, K., Mitchell, A., & Indik, J. (2002). Family ther- apy and dialectical behavior therapy with adolescents. American Journal of Psychotherapy, 56(4), 568–584.

Miller, A. L., Rathus, J. H., & Linehan, M. M. (2007). Dialectical behavior therapy with suicidal adolescents. New York: The Guilford Press.

Nelson-Gray, R., Keane, S., Hurst, R., Mitchell, J., Warburton, J., Chok, J., & Cobb, A. (2006). A modified DBT skills training program for opposi- tional defiant adolescents: Promising preliminary findings. Behavior Research and Therapy, 44(12), 1811–1820.

Overall, J. E., & Pfefferbaum, B. (1981). The brief psychiatric rating scale for chil- dren. Houston, TX: University of Texas Medical School.

Rakfeldt, J. (2005). Dialectical behavior therapy with transitional youth: Prelimi- nary findings. Best Practices in Mental Health, 1(2), 61–76.

Soler, J., Pascual, J., Campins, J., Barrachina, J., Puigdemont, D., Alvarez, E., & Perez, V. (2005). Double-blind, placebo-controlled study of dialectical behavior therapy plus olanzapine for borderline personality disorder. American Journal of Psychiatry, 162(6), 1221–1224.

Sunseri, P. (2004). Preliminary outcomes on the use of dialectical behavior ther- apy to reduce hospitalization among adolescents in residential care. Resi- dential Treatment for Children and Youth, 21(4), 59–76.

Swenson, C., Sanderson, C., Dulit, R., & Linehan, M. (2001). The application of dialectical behavior therapy for patients with borderline personality dis- order on inpatient units. Psychiatric Quarterly, 79(4), 307–324.

Wisniewski, L., & Ben-Porath, D. (2005). Telephone skill-coaching with eating- disordered clients: Clinical guidelines using a DBT framework. European Eating Disorders Review, 13, 344–350.

Effectiveness of DBT versus STM in a Cohort of Adolescents 125

Chapter 07 7/10/08 12:07 PM Page 125

A Pilot Intervention of Multifamily Dialectical Behavior Group Therapy in a Treatment-Seeking Adolescent Population- Effects on Teens and Their Family Members.pdf

Article

A Pilot Intervention of Multifamily Dialectical Behavior Group Therapy in a Treatment-Seeking Adolescent Population: Effects on Teens and Their Family Members

Amanda A. Uliaszek 1 , Sylia Wilson

2 , Megan Mayberry

3 , Keith Cox

4 ,

and Michael Maslar 5

Abstract This open pilot trial examined the feasibility of a 16-week multifamily dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) skills group adapted for a multifamily context as an addendum to treatment as usual. Psychopathology symptoms in both adolescents (N ¼ 13) and caregivers (N ¼ 16) were assessed pre- and posttreatment using multiple methods and reporters. There was a significant reduction in adolescent borderline and antisocial personality disorder symptoms as assessed by diagnostic interview, as well as a significant decrease in caregiver-reported adolescent internalizing and externalizing behaviors. However, adolescents did not self-report a significant decrease in symptoms. Results suggest that multifamily DBT skills group may be a feasible treatment in this population and speak to the importance of further research examining the implementation and dissemination of DBT with adolescents in a family context.

Keywords adolescence, dialectical behavior therapy, personality disorders, group treatment

Adolescence is an important developmental period charac-

terized by significant cognitive, emotional, interpersonal,

and behavioral changes, as well as a time of increased risk

for the development of psychopathology (Carter & Garber,

2011; Shiner, 2009). The mental health of adolescents is a

major public health concern. Epidemiological research has

found that symptoms of personality disorders (PDs), partic-

ularly borderline PD and antisocial PD, begin early in life

(Cohen, Chen, Crawford, Brook, & Gordon, 2007; Gratz

et al., 2009).

Research focused on effective treatments for this popula-

tion has not been explored as thoroughly as the epidemio-

logical research. If adolescent mental disorders are not

successfully prevented and treated, there is a considerable risk

that they will lead to significant and ongoing mental health

difficulties in adulthood (Cohen et al., 2007; Shiner, 2009).

In the present pilot study, we examined the effectiveness of

a multifamily dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) skills group

for adolescents and their caregivers. This intervention inte-

grates components of DBT and family therapy, is geared

toward adolescents suffering symptoms of borderline PD and

other externalizing symptomatology (i.e., suicidality, self-

harm, emotion dysregulation, aggression, impulsivity), and

was administered to augment treatment as usual.

DBT

DBT (Linehan, 1993) is a cognitive–behavioral treatment with

strong foundations in behavioral principles, Zen Buddhism,

and dialectical theories. In DBT, clients are conceptualized

through a biosocial framework, which focuses on the interac-

tion between an invalidating environment and inherent vulner-

abilities. Full DBT includes individual DBT therapy sessions, a

weekly skills group, telephone coaching, and regular team con-

sultation for the therapist.

There is a growing literature supporting the efficacy of full

DBT in samples of adults with borderline PD (Koons et al.,

2001; Linehan, Armstrong, Suarez, Allmon, & Heard, 1991;

1 Department of Psychology, University of Toronto Scarborough, Toronto,

Ontario, Canada 2 University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN, USA 3 Edward Hines Jr. VA Hospital, Hines, IL, USA

4 Medical University of South Carolina, Charleston, SC, USA

5 The Family Institute at Northwestern University, Evanston, IL, USA

Corresponding Author:

Amanda A. Uliaszek, Department of Psychology, University of Toronto

Scarborough, Toronto, Ontario, Canada MIC1A4.

Email: [email protected]

The Family Journal: Counseling and Therapy for Couples and Families 2014, Vol. 22(2) 206-215 ª The Author(s) 2013 Reprints and permission: sagepub.com/journalsPermissions.nav DOI: 10.1177/1066480713513554 tfj.sagepub.com

at MISSISSIPPI COLLEGE LIBRARY on June 19, 2015tfj.sagepub.comDownloaded from

Linehan et al., 2006; Linehan, Tutek, Heard, & Armstrong,

1994; Stepp, Epler, Jahng, & Trull, 2008; van den Bosch,

Koeter, Stijnen, Verheul, & van den Brink, 2005; Verheul

et al., 2003), adults with comorbid substance use and borderline

PD (Linehan et al., 2002; Linehan et al., 1999), elderly adults

with comorbid depression and PD (Lynch et al., 2007), adoles-

cents with borderline symptoms (James, Taylor, Winmill, &

Alfoadari, 2008; Rathus & Miller, 2002; Woodberry & Pope-

noe, 2008), and incarcerated female juvenile offenders (Trupin,

Stewart, Beach, & Boesky, 2002).

A number of studies also have examined the effects of aug-

menting non-DBT treatments (e.g., medication, traditional cog-

nitive–behavioral therapy [CBT]) with one or more of the

components of the complete DBT protocol, usually skills

group, in samples of adults with borderline PD (Soler et al.,

2009), treatment-resistant depressed adults (Harley, Sprich,

Safren, Jacobo, & Fava, 2008), depressed elderly adults (Lynch

et al., 2007; Lynch, Morse, Mendelson, & Robins, 2003), adults

with bulimia nervosa or binge eating disorder (Safer, Telch, &

Agras, 2001; Telch, Agras, & Linehan, 2000, 2001), adult

female victims of domestic violence (Iverson, Shenk, & Fruz-

zetti, 2009), and adolescents with oppositional defiant disorder

(Nelson-Gray et al., 2006). These studies show promising

results for the effectiveness of DBT skills group.

Family Therapy

Family therapy has gained prominence in the mental health

field as an effective treatment for issues in the larger family

system, as well as in the context of the mental health problems

of an individual family member (see Lebow, 2008; Lebow &

Gurman, 1995). Changing the family environment and shifting

established patterns of interaction between family members can

play an important role in furthering treatment progress and main-

taining positive gains. Given that many psychiatric disorders

onset or worsen during adolescence, a number of family treatment

protocols have been developed for use with adolescents (e.g.,

Sexton & Alexander, 2002; Miller, Rathus, & Linehan, 2007).

The inclusion of families in treatments for varied problems

during adolescence has received considerable support in the

literature. Family treatment protocols have been developed

for adolescents with depression (Asarnow, Tompson, & Berk,

2005; Diamond & Siqueland, 1995), chronic medical illnesses

(Satin, Lagreca, Zigo, & Skyler, 1989), eating disorders

(Brownell, Kelman, & Stunkard, 1983), oppositional and

aggressive behavior (Feldman & Kazdin, 1995), and sub-

stance use (Stanton & Shadish, 1997). Notably, intervention

at the level of the family has been shown to have positive

effects on individual family members’ outcomes (see Dixon

et al., 2001).

Adapting DBT for Use With Adolescents and Their Caregivers

DBT was originally developed for and is primarily used with

adult clients. However, there is increasing recognition of its

potential benefits for adolescents with problems in emotion

dysregulation (see Robins & Chapman, 2004). Traditional

DBT is oriented toward the individual and encourages the cli-

ent to learn how to manage and alter his or her environment and

the people in it. However, Linehan (1993) recognizes the inher-

ent limitations in adolescents’ ability to control and define their

own environments (e.g., familial, school), and thus promotes

environmental interventions as appropriate when working with

adolescent clients.

Researchers have begun to integrate the traditional DBT

protocol with a family systems orientation in order to provide

a coherent framework for intervention within the family

(Fruzzetti, Santisteban, & Hoffman, 2007; Miller, Glinski,

Woodberry, Mitchell, & Indik, 2002; Miller et al., 2007; San-

tisteban, Muir, Mena, & Mitrani, 2003; Woodberry, Miller,

Glinski, Indir, & Mitchell, 2002). From a family systems per-

spective, there is an emphasis on understanding the dynamic

interactions between multiple family members and on struc-

turing a supportive environment that can help foster positive

change. From a behavioral perspective, the inclusion of the

family in treatment can shift contingencies and reinforcement

within the home, help generalize skills learned during therapy

to the home environment, and train parents to act as skills coa-

ches when needed.

Miller, Rathus, and Linehan (2007) adapted the standard

adult DBT protocol described in Linehan (1993) to create a

developmentally appropriate protocol for suicidal adolescents.

Many of the core elements of DBT are preserved, including

individual therapy and skills group sessions. However, there

are several modifications that facilitate its application to ado-

lescents, such as the inclusion of family members in adoles-

cents’ individual treatment as needed, requiring attendance

by at least one caregiver in the skills group, shortening the

duration of the skills group, simplifying the skills training

materials to be more accessible to adolescents, and adding an

additional module geared specifically toward adolescents and

their families.

Overview and Specific Aims of the Present Pilot Study

There is considerable evidence of the efficacy of evidence-

based treatments for specific disorders among adolescents (see

Weisz, Jensen-Doss, & Hawley, 2006, for a meta-analysis).

However, studies often exclude adolescents with multiple

diagnoses and complicated presenting problems. This is pro-

blematic because many adolescents experience chronic and

severe problems, diagnostic comorbidity among adolescents

is high (Angold, Costello, & Erkanli, 1999), and adolescents

in treatment typically come from families experiencing high

levels of parental and family stress (Hammen, Rudolph, Weisz,

Burge, & Rao, 1999).

As reviewed previously, DBT has shown promise with diag-

nostically diverse, high-risk populations. The first aim of the

present pilot study was to examine the effectiveness of a multi-

family DBT skills group as an adjunct to treatment as usual

in reducing symptoms and relevant problem behaviors in a

Uliaszek et al. 207

at MISSISSIPPI COLLEGE LIBRARY on June 19, 2015tfj.sagepub.comDownloaded from

community outpatient sample of adolescents. Although there is

growing support for the efficacy of the standard DBT protocol

as adapted for adolescents (James et al., 2008; Rathus & Miller,

2002; Trupin et al., 2002; Woodberry & Popenoe, 2008), the

implementation of the full model can be labor-, time-, and

cost-intensive. Evidence of the efficacy of a reduced model

could increase accessibility to clinicians who work with high-

risk adolescents, but do not have the means to deliver the com-

plete DBT protocol. Given that the multifamily DBT skills

group is manualized and easily administered to multiple clients

at once, this seems an optimal component to provide as an

adjunctive treatment. Notably, there is support for the efficacy

of the skills group as a stand-alone treatment in samples of

adults and adolescents (Linehan, 1993; Nelson-Gray et al.,

2006; Soler et al., 2009), and evidence that skills acquisition is

a mediator of symptom reduction in adults (Neacsiu, Rizvi, &

Linehan, 2010). In the present study, we required that each ado-

lescent have an individual therapist, but we made no restrictions

as to the modality of their individual treatment (e.g., DBT, CBT,

supportive therapy); this is similar to Harley, Sprich, Safren,

Jacobo, and Fava’s (2008) study, in which clients participated

in skills groups but were allowed to continue with other mental

health treatments as usual.

DBT has primarily been implemented in samples of adoles-

cents with borderline-like symptoms (James et al., 2008;

Rathus & Miller, 2002; Woodberry & Popenoe, 2008), but it

has also shown promise for other problems (Nelson-Gray

et al., 2006; Trupin et al., 2002). In an effort to increase acces-

sibility of treatment to adolescents experiencing multiple, com-

plex, and severe problems, who are commonly seen by

community clinicians, we examined the efficacy of the multi-

family DBT skills group in a sample of adolescents experien-

cing diverse problem behaviors associated with borderline

PD and externalizing symptomatology (e.g., aggression, rule-

breaking)—adolescents did not need to meet current diagnostic

criteria for the particular disorders, but we did require that

they evidence significant dysfunction, as defined by multiple

symptoms and problem behaviors. We specifically recruited

participants characterized by suicidality, self-harm, emotion

dysregulation, aggression, and impulsivity.

The second aim of the present pilot study was to examine

the effects of the multifamily DBT skills group on the care-

givers participating in the group. Although the treatment was

tailored specifically for adolescents, caregivers were included

in all aspects of the DBT skills group—they were expected to

attend and actively participate in group and complete the

same weekly homework assignments as the adolescents.

Caregiver participation was nominally a means of providing

a skills coach outside of the group to help adolescents use and

generalize their newly acquired skills. While no data exist to

date regarding the frequency at which this occurs, anecdotal

evidence suggests that a multifamily group provides a com-

mon language for adolescents and caregivers to use when dis-

cussing problems outside of the therapeutic context. In

addition, there is a specific section of the group dedicated to

parenting and dyadic interactions; this includes the proper use

of reinforcement and punishment, as well as increased valida-

tion in the home.

Family members of individuals with mental health problems

are themselves at high risk. They share genetic and biological

vulnerabilities with the client with a risk of developing their

own symptoms as a result of the stress of caring for an adoles-

cent with mental health problems (Fogelson et al., 1999;

Nickell, Waudby, & Trull, 2002; Skodol et al., 2002; White,

Gunderson, Zanarini, & Hudson, 2003). However, we are

aware of only one other study that has assessed caregiver

functioning following participation in a multifamily DBT

skills group with their adolescent. Woodberry and Popenoe

(2008) reported a significant reduction in caregivers’ self-

reported depressive symptoms following the treatment, which

raises the possibility that skills groups may provide a means of

indirect intervention to participating caregivers.

Method

Participants

Thirteen adolescents and 16 caregivers (mothers, fathers, step-

mothers, stepfathers) from a total of 12 families participated in

the present pilot study. Adolescents were recruited through a

community outpatient clinic in a large metropolitan area. Inclu-

sion criteria were an adolescent between 13 and 17 years seek-

ing treatment for symptoms and behaviors associated with

borderline and externalizing pathology, with at least one care-

giver willing to participate in the multifamily DBT skills

group; exclusion criteria were developmental or intellectual

limitations that would interfere with group participation and

understanding.

All participating adolescents were required to engage in

individual therapy throughout the duration of the DBT skills

group. Six (55%) of the adolescents reported taking psychotro- pic medications at pretreatment. The 13 adolescents consisted

of 11 females and 2 males with a mean age of 15 (SD ¼ 1.63). The racial/ethnic description is as follows: Caucasian ¼ 9 (69%), biracial (Hispanic/Caucasian) ¼ 2 (15%), African Amer- ican ¼ 1 (11%), Asian American ¼ 1 (11%). The 16 caregivers consisted of 10 females and 6 males with a mean age of 47.38

(range 36–63; SD ¼ 6.73). Fifteen (94%) of the caregivers were Caucasian and one (6%) was African American. Two families (two adolescents and three caregivers) discontinued the group

after attending only two to four sessions; one family discontin-

ued because the adolescent did not believe she needed the

group, and one family discontinued because the caregiver

became too emotionally dysregulated during group and no lon-

ger wanted to attend.

Procedure

Pretreatment assessment. After obtaining informed assent and consent from adolescents and participating caregivers, semi-

structured diagnostic interviews were administered to adoles-

cents and caregivers to assess current and past Axis I and

208 The Family Journal: Counseling and Therapy for Couples and Families 22(2)

at MISSISSIPPI COLLEGE LIBRARY on June 19, 2015tfj.sagepub.comDownloaded from

Axis II disorders. In the present study, we focus only on the

interview assessment of borderline PD and antisocial PD, as

symptoms of these diagnoses were most similar to those targeted

by our recruitment criteria (suicidality, self-harm, emotion dys-

regulation, aggression, and impulsivity). Next, adolescents

and caregivers completed a battery of questionnaires regard-

ing their own mental health symptoms and associated beha-

viors. In addition, caregivers reported on their adolescent’s

symptoms. These questionnaire packets were given to the ado-

lescent and caregiver to complete on their own and return at the

first group session.

Multifamily DBT skills group. The skills training format was drawn from Miller et al.’s (2007) adaptation of the standard

skills training format used with adults. The skills consisted of

16 weekly sessions that comprised five skill modules: mindful-

ness (skills to observe, describe, and participate in experiences

in a nonjudgmental and effective way, focusing on one thing at

a time), distress tolerance (skills to tolerate and accept pain or

negative emotions), emotion regulation (labeling emotions;

reducing negative emotions and increasing positive emotions),

interpersonal effectiveness (skills to help increase interpersonal

effectiveness, including attaining a goal, maintaining relation-

ships, and preserving self-respect), and walking the middle

path (skills for validation, behavioral modification, and dialec-

tics). Approximately five families participated at a time; new

families joined during mindfulness modules, so a mixture of

new and returning families typically attended each module.

Each weekly group session lasted 2 hr, with one brief break; all

sessions began with a short mindfulness exercise, followed by

1 hr in which group members reviewed their homework assign-

ments from the previous week with the group leaders, and 1 hr

in which group leaders taught new material, illustrating each

new skill with active and experiential in-group exercises.

Following the standard protocol for DBT skills group atten-

dance (Miller et al., 2007), group members were allowed to

miss no more than four group sessions during the 16-week

group (the family was considered present if the adolescent and

at least one caregiver attended). No participating families

missed more than four group sessions, meaning that the atten-

dance rate was 75% or higher for all families. There were four trained clinical psychology graduate students who were

involved in leading groups throughout this study. For each indi-

vidual group, two to four of these group leaders were present.

In all groups, at least one of the group leaders had previously

coled groups with doctoral level clinicians, completed an inten-

sive DBT training, and had consistently practiced DBT at both

the group and the individual treatment level independent of the

present study. All group leaders attended a weekly DBT team

consultation meeting and were supervised by a doctoral level

clinician with approximately 15 years of experience adminis-

tering DBT and leading skills groups.

Posttreatment assessment. The pretreatment assessment was repeated following the conclusion of the treatment. Diagnostic

interviews were administered to adolescents and caregivers

approximately 1 month after completing the skills group to

assess Axis I and Axis II disorders in the period after group

ended. Adolescents and caregivers also completed and returned

the same battery of questionnaires they had completed at

pretreatment.

Measures

Interview-assessed Axis II disorders. Adolescent and caregiver borderline PD and antisocial PD were assessed using the Interna-

tional Personality Disorder Examination (IPDE; Loranger, 1999;

Loranger et al., 1994). The IPDE is a clinician-administered,

semistructured interview developed to diagnose Axis II disor-

ders according to the Diagnostic Statistical Manual of Mental

Disorders–Fourth Edition (DSM-IV). The IPDE has been used

and validated internationally, and has demonstrated good inter-

rater reliability (Loranger et al., 1994). The IPDE was adminis-

tered in person or via telephone by trained clinical psychology

graduate students enrolled in a formal assessment practicum who

were supervised by doctoral level clinicians. Interrater correla-

tion coefficients for the IPDE were .94 for both antisocial and

borderline PD.

Whether it is appropriate to diagnose adolescents with PDs

is debatable. The diagnosis of a PD requires evidence of long-

standing patterns of personality dysfunction that emerged by

adolescence or early adulthood; when diagnosing a PD prior

to age 18, the features must have been evident for at least 1 year

(American Psychiatric Association, 2000). Because PDs are

increasingly explored as dimensional constructs that can be

linked directly to individual differences in underlying personal-

ity traits (Markon, Krueger, & Watson, 2005), we assessed PD

symptoms, as opposed to frank PD diagnoses.

Caregiver-reported adolescent symptoms and behaviors. The Child Behavior Checklist (CBCL; Achenbach & Edelbrock, 1983)

was used as the caregiver report measure of adolescent symp-

toms and behaviors. It consists of 108 items rated on a

3-point Likert-type scale ranging from 0 to 2. It can be scored

into the same syndromes as the Youth Self-Report (YSR;

Achenbach, 1991). The CBCL is a reliable and valid measure

(see Achenbach & Rescorla, 2001). The present study found

the reliability of the CBCL total problems score at pretreatment

to be high (Cronbach’s a ¼ .99). The present study only exam- ined externalizing, internalizing, aggression, rule-breaking, and

attention problems.

Adolescent self-reported symptoms and behaviors. The YSR (Achenbach, 1991) is a self-report measure of mental health

symptoms specifically targeted to adolescents. It consists of

112 items scored on a 3-point Likert-type scale ranging from

0 to 2 and can be scored to assess anxiety, depression, somati-

zation, social withdrawal, thought disorder, attention problems,

rule breaking, and aggression. It also yields scores for externa-

lizing, internalizing, and total problems. Research has shown

the YSR to be cross-culturally valid (Ivanova et al., 2007) and

reliable (see Achenbach & Rescorla, 2001). The present study

Uliaszek et al. 209

at MISSISSIPPI COLLEGE LIBRARY on June 19, 2015tfj.sagepub.comDownloaded from

found the reliability of the YSR total problems score at pre-

treatment to be high (Cronbach’s a ¼ .98). The present study examines the externalizing and internalizing behavior scores,

as well as the aggression, rule-breaking, and attention problems

subscales. The three subscales were chosen because aggression

and rule breaking were targeted symptoms, and attention prob-

lems were the most frequently reported problematic behaviors

by both the caregivers and the adolescents.

Caregiver self-reported symptoms and behaviors. The Symptom Checklist 90–Revised (SCL-90-R; Derogatis, 1983) is a

self-report measure of various psychopathology symptoms

with 90 items rated on a 5-point Likert-type scale ranging

from 0 to 4. It yields nine scores along the primary symptom

dimensions of somatization, obsessive–compulsive, interper-

sonal sensitivity, depression, anxiety, hostility, phobic anxi-

ety, paranoid ideation, and psychoticism. The present study

focuses on depression, anxiety, hostility, and interpersonal

sensitivity, as those seemed the most appropriate targets for

change in DBT skills group and previous research has found

caregivers reduce depression throughout the course of DBT

skills group (Woodberry & Popenoe, 2008). The SCL-90-R

is effective for psychiatric diagnostics as well as clinical out-

come measurement and has been found to be both reliable and

valid (Hafkenscheid, 1993). Reliability coefficients for the

subscales at pretreatment were generally moderate to high:

interpersonal sensitivity (Cronbach’s a ¼ .88), depression (Cronbach’s a ¼ .95), anxiety (Cronbach’s a ¼ .89), and hos- tility (Cronbach’s a ¼ .66).

Data Analysis

The following results are based on participants with complete

data. Of the 13 adolescents who participated in group, 9 had

complete interview data and 8 had complete questionnaire data.

Concerning the 16 caregivers who participated in the study,

only 10 had full questionnaire data. This was due to two fam-

ilies leaving (two adolescents and three caregivers), as well as

the failure to obtain full assessments on the remaining partici-

pants. Paired samples t-tests were used to assess differences

between pretreatment and posttest assessments. Alpha levels

were conservatively set using an ordered Bonferroni correction

procedure, which sets a distinct a level for each individual

analysis based on the strength of the association and the num-

ber of analyses in the set (Holland & Copenhaver, 1988). This

was done to reduce capitalization on chance by performing

multiple t-tests for each set of analyses. Effect size estimates

were computed using Cohen’s d statistic (Cohen, 1988). Using

conventional standards, a small effect size is .2 to .3, a medium

effect size is .4 to .6, and a large effect size is greater than .6

(Cohen, 1988). Change at the individual participant level was

assessed using the reliable change index (RCI; Jacobson &

Truax, 1991). This is a measure of both statistically and clini-

cally significant change that has been well established in treat-

ment change literature (for review, see Wise, 2004). Thus,

clinically significant change is not an absolute number, but is

based on the reliability of the individual measure and the nor-

mative mean and standard deviation of scores of each scale.

These numbers are entered into an equation and a criterion for

a reliable change is set. This criterion is purported to be largely

independent of changes expected by regression to the mean and

measurement error. If the change found for the individual par-

ticipant is larger than the set criterion, it is considered a clini-

cally significant and reliable change.

Results

t-Tests Examining Pre- to Posttreatment Change

We examined change in caregivers’ reports of adolescent

symptoms and behaviors as measured by the CBCL. Descrip-

tive statistics, effect sizes, and the results of paired samples

t-tests for caregiver-reported adolescent problems are dis-

played in Table 1. There were decreases in all symptoms as

reported by the caregivers. All changes were significant at both

the conventional level (a ¼ .05) and the conservative ordered Bonferroni a levels. In addition, most change demonstrated a large effect size. Next, we examined change in adolescents’

self-reports of their own symptoms and behaviors, as measured

by the YSR. Table 2 shows the descriptive statistics, effect sizes,

and the results of paired samples t-tests for adolescent self-

reported problems. Although there were generally decreases in

symptoms as reported by the adolescents, no changes were sig-

nificant. However, change in externalizing and aggressive beha-

viors did demonstrate a large effect size. We also examined

interview-assessed adolescent borderline and antisocial PD

Table 1. Change in Caregiver-Reported Adolescent Symptoms as Assessed by Mean Item Scores on the Child Behavior Checklist.

Pretreatment Posttreatment Mean Change

t p Value Ordered

Bonferroni a level Effect

Size (d)M (SD) M (SD) (SD)

Externalizing .50 (.24) .30 (.13) �.20 (.16) 3.69 .006* .013 1.04 Internalizing .58 (.23) .36 (.13) �.22 (.24) 2.76 .025* .025 1.18 Aggression .54 (.28) .35 (.15) �.19 (.18) 3.19 .013* .017 0.85 Rule breaking .44 (.22) .22 (.15) �.22 (.15) 4.31 .003* .010 1.17 Attention .76 (.36) .54 (.39) �.22 (.26) 2.49 .038* .050 0.59

Note. n ¼ 8. *Statistically significant at the conservative (ordered Bonferroni) a level.

210 The Family Journal: Counseling and Therapy for Couples and Families 22(2)

at MISSISSIPPI COLLEGE LIBRARY on June 19, 2015tfj.sagepub.comDownloaded from

symptoms, as measured by the IPDE, as these were central

recruiting criteria for our study. The average number of bor-

derline PD symptoms was reduced from 5.10 (SD ¼ 4.04) to 1.10 (SD ¼ 1.66). This change (t ¼ 4.00, p ¼ .003, d ¼ 1.30, p < .025) was significant at the conservative level. On average,

the number of antisocial PD symptoms was reduced from

2.70 (SD ¼ 3.80) to 0.10 (SD ¼ .32). This change (t ¼ 2.27, p ¼ .050, d ¼ .96, p < .05) was significant.

We also examined change in caregivers’ reports of their own

behaviors, as measured by the SCL-90-R. Descriptive statistics,

effect sizes, and the results of paired samples t-tests for caregiver

self-reported depression, anxiety, hostility, and interpersonal

sensitivity are displayed in Table 3. Although there were

decreases in all behaviors as self-reported by the caregivers,

these changes were not significant. However, change in depres-

sion and hostility did demonstrate a medium effect size.

RCI Scores Examining Clinical Significant Change

RCI scores were calculated for each variable based on pretreat-

ment scores for the sample, as well as test–retest reliability

coefficients from previous reliability and validation studies.

Table 4 illustrates the percentage of participants who reported

a clinically significant change from pretreatment to posttreat-

ment in both the desirable and the undesirable directions. For

caregiver-reported adolescent symptoms and behaviors, as

measured by the CBCL, a majority of adolescents had an

improvement in externalizing, internalizing, rule-breaking, and

attention problems as reported by their caregivers. Results also

show an improvement in caregiver-reported aggression prob-

lems for a large minority of adolescents. One participant signif-

icantly deteriorated in terms of caregiver-reported internalizing

and attention problems. For self-reported adolescent symptoms

and behaviors, as measured by the YSR, only a minority

reported an improvement in externalizing, aggression, rule-

breaking, and attention problems, and two participants reported

a significant deterioration in internalizing problems. Concern-

ing the IPDE interview assessment, a majority of participants

demonstrated improvement in both borderline and antisocial

PD symptomatology. Finally, for caregivers’ reports of their

own symptoms and behaviors, as measured by the SCL-90-R,

only a minority reported an improvement in symptoms. No

caregivers reported a significant deterioration in symptoms

over the course of treatment.

Discussion

The present study examined the effectiveness of a multifamily

DBT skills group as an add-on to treatment as usual in a sample

of adolescents. Participants presented for treatment at a com-

munity mental health clinic with symptoms of borderline PD,

externalizing and internalizing behaviors, and attention prob-

lems. At least one caregiver participated in group with each

adolescent. We employed a multimethod assessment approach

to examine change in adolescent symptoms and behaviors,

including diagnostic assessment, self-report, and caregiver report.

We also examined change in caregiver symptoms. Results of this

pilot study indicate that multifamily DBT skills group may be

effective at reducing both internalizing and externalizing beha-

viors in adolescents. Contrary to hypotheses, we did not find a

significant improvement in caregiver symptomatology.

This study examined caregiver-reported adolescent proble-

matic behaviors as an indicator of treatment success. It is

important to consider caregivers’ reports because adolescents

Table 2. Change in Adolescent-Reported Adolescent Symptoms as Assessed by Mean Item Scores on the Youth Self-Report.

Pretreatment Posttreatment Mean Change

t p Value Ordered

Bonferroni a level Effect

Size (d)M (SD) M (SD) (SD)

Externalizing .47 (.19) .33 (.22) �.14 (.22) 1.86 .106 .013 .68 Internalizing .49 (.29) .50 (.41) .01 (.34) �0.08 .941 .050 �.03 Aggression .55 (.23) .36 (.27) �.19 (.23) 2.36 .051 .010 .76 Rule breaking .38 (.20) .29 (.21) �.09 (.23) 1.15 .289 .017 .44 Attention .89 (.37) .75 (.50) �.14 (.35) 1.12 .299 .025 .32

Note. n ¼ 8.

Table 3. Change in Caregiver-Reported Caregiver Symptoms as Assessed by Mean Item Scores on the Symptom Checklist-90–Revised.

Pretreatment Posttreatment Mean Change

t p Value Ordered

Bonferroni a level Effect

Size (d)M (SD) M (SD) (SD)

Depression 1.12 (1.00) .67 (.62) �.45 (.67) 2.10 .065 .017 .54 Anxiety 0.58 (0.66) .42 (.54) �.16 (.33) 1.59 .148 .050 .27 Hostility 0.45 (0.51) .23 (.24) �.22 (.30) 2.25 .051 .013 .55 Interpersonal sensitivity 0.80 (0.77) .59 (.62) �.21 (.46) 1.45 .181 .025 .30

Note. n ¼ 10.

Uliaszek et al. 211

at MISSISSIPPI COLLEGE LIBRARY on June 19, 2015tfj.sagepub.comDownloaded from

are often brought to treatment not of their own suggestion, but

because their caregivers find aspects of the adolescent’s beha-

vior to be distressful or impairing in some way. Thus, in a typ-

ical clinical setting, treatment success is often gauged by the

satisfaction of the caregiver with the adolescent’s progress. The

present results indicated a significant, meaningful change in

externalizing, internalizing, aggression, rule-breaking, and

attention problems in the adolescents as reported by the care-

givers. The decrease in these behaviors was determined to be

a large effect, with all change significant at conservative a lev- els. This is striking considering the small sample size and the

resulting low power available to detect such effects. When

examined at the individual level, a large majority of adoles-

cents improved on these variables.

We assessed behavioral and symptomatic change in adoles-

cents using an interview measure of PD symptoms. There was

statistical and clinically significant change in borderline and

antisocial PD symptoms. Adolescents went from an average

of five borderline PD symptoms to 1 and from three antisocial

PD symptoms to 0. Nearly all adolescents evidencing PD

symptoms at pretreatment experienced a significant reduction

in these symptoms. This suggests that multifamily DBT skills

group may be an effective intervention for the original symp-

toms targeted for inclusion into the study. The results of the

present pilot study are consistent with previous research sug-

gesting that DBT is an appropriate intervention for adolescents

experiencing symptoms of borderline PD (James et al., 2008;

Woodberry & Popenoe, 2008). Moreover, the results add to the

literature by suggesting that DBT also may be appropriate for

adolescents experiencing comorbid symptoms of antisocial

PD and that this intervention could be effective even when

administered at the group-only level. Finally, it highlights the

potential importance of interventions at the family level.

Results did not support a significant change as assessed by

adolescents’ self-reports of their own problematic behaviors.

As assessed by RCIs, only a minority of adolescents self-

reported a significant change in any symptoms. However, there

was a large effect size for both externalizing behaviors and

aggression problems. There are several potential reasons for the

discrepancy between adolescent self-report questionnaire

results and the other two indicators of adolescent symptoms

and behavior (interview and caregiver report). First, it is possi-

ble that we did not have the power to detect a significant

change in adolescent self-report due to the small sample size.

Second, it may be that adolescents were reticent to acknowl-

edge or less aware of problems when thinking about their own

behavior, even though change was noticeable to caregivers and

accurately assessed by interviewers. They may have underre-

ported problematic behavior at the outset or did not take into

account recent behavioral changes when rating themselves at

posttreatment. Third, it is possible that caregivers could be

overreporting changes compared to the actual behavior of the

adolescent. This could be due to adolescents changing their

behavior only when viewable by their parents (i.e., obedience

at home; school attendance; change in appearance), but con-

tinuing to experience negative symptoms in other areas (i.e.,

drug/alcohol use with friends; problematic romantic relations).

In addition, because of the time and effort involved in attending

group, parents may have been more motivated to see its effects

in a positive light. This discrepancy highlights the importance

of multimethod assessment with a focus on family members

when treating adolescents.

It is also important to highlight potential reasons that the

adolescent self-report did not reflect significant changes found

in the interview-assessed measure of borderline PD and antiso-

cial PD. The YSR and the CBCL have similar methods of mea-

surement, behavioral targets, and measure structure; thus,

differences in results are less likely due to measurement differ-

ences as they are to actual reporting differences (as described in

the previous paragraph). The YSR focuses on behavioral indi-

cators of a broad range of symptomatology in general cate-

gories like internalizing, externalizing, and attention, while

the IPDE focuses only on DSM-IV diagnostic symptoms related

to borderline and antisocial PD. In the former assessment

method, participants see statements like ‘‘I cry a lot’’ or ‘‘I dis-

obey my parents’’ which they rate on a 3-point Likert-type

scale in terms of the truth of the statement in regard to their own

behavior. Each item may or may not be directly related to an

actual diagnostic category and the YSR does not provide spe-

cific scales that assess borderline and/or antisocial PDs. The

latter assessment method asked questions related to a specific

diagnostic criteria and the person must demonstrate a clinical

significant level of the symptom in order to be recorded as

Table 4. Summary of Clinically Significant Change Based on Reliable Change Indices (RCIs) for the Child Behavior Checklist, Youth Self- Report, International Personality Disorder Examination, and the Symptom Checklist-90.

Significantly Improved RCI

Significantly Deteriorated RCI

CBCL externalizing 5/9 (56%) 0/9 (0%) CBCL internalizing 8/9 (89%) 1/9 (11%) CBCL aggression 4/9 (44%) 0/9 (0%) CBCL rule breaking 7/9 (78%) 0/9 (0%) CBCL attention 7/9 (78%) 1/9 (11%) YSR internalizing 1/8 (13%) 2/8 (25%) YSR externalizing 2/8 (25%) 0/8 (0%) YSR aggression 3/8 (38%) 0/8 (0%) YSR rule breaking 2/8 (25%) 1/8 (13%) YSR attention 3/8 (38%) 0/8 (0%) IPDE borderline PD 7/10 (70%) 0/10 (0%) IPDE antisocial PD 4/5 (80%) 0/5 (0%) SCL-90 depression 1/10 (10%) 0/10 (0%) SCL-90 anxiety 2/10 (20%) 0/10 (0%) SCL-90 hostility 4/10 (40%) 0/10 (0%) SCL-90 interpersonal sensitivity 2/10 (20%) 0/10 (0%)

Note. CBCL ¼ Child Behavior Checklist; YSR ¼ Youth Self-Report; IPDE ¼ International Personality Disorder Examination; PD ¼ personality disorder; SCL ¼ Symptom Checklist 90-Revised. n for IPDE symptoms is based on the number of adolescents evidencing any symptoms at pretreatment. (CBCL; n ¼ 9); (YSR; n ¼ 8); (IPDE; borderline personality disorder symptoms, n ¼ 10 and antisocial personality disorder symptoms, n ¼ 5); (SCL-90; n ¼ 10).

212 The Family Journal: Counseling and Therapy for Couples and Families 22(2)

at MISSISSIPPI COLLEGE LIBRARY on June 19, 2015tfj.sagepub.comDownloaded from

experiencing the symptom. Thus, the interview method is more

stringent, but also highly specific. For these reasons, it may be

best to look at the IPDE and YSR separately, as they may not be

directly comparable measures.

This is one of the first studies to examine change in care-

giver symptoms as a result of adolescent-focused treatment

(see also Woodberry & Popenoe, 2008). Caregiver change

could have been a direct result of applying skills that they

learned in group or an indirect result from experiencing an

improved home life because of a reduction of adolescent symp-

toms and behaviors. However, results did not support a signif-

icant change from pretreatment to posttreatment for the

caregivers involved in group. A minority of individual care-

givers reported clinically significant change, although we did

find medium effect sizes for change in hostility and depression.

When examining the scores for the caregivers, they appeared to

be quite low in self-reported symptoms at pretreatment, with

average item scores for each examining subscale ranging from

0.45 to 1.12 of a possible score of 5. This may have introduced

a floor effect in the present analyses without the possibility for

much improvement in terms of caregiver symptoms. With less

extreme symptoms and behaviors than the adolescents, care-

giver change was more subtle.

There are limitations to the present study. First, this was a

pilot study and the study design did not include a control group.

Thus, there is no assurance that results were not due to regression

to the mean, nonspecific therapeutic effects, or simply to the

maturity of the adolescents across 16 weeks. However, RCI

scores account for test–retest reliability in an attempt to adjust

for typical time and regression effects of each measure; that there

were several significant improvements in problematic adoles-

cent symptoms and behaviors suggests that the intervention was

effective. Also, the majority of the participants had been in indi-

vidual therapy for an extended period of time before beginning

our group; thus, it is unlikely that they were experiencing the

typical nonspecific effect of improvement many experience

when beginning therapy (i.e., hope and expectancy effects).

Second, we had a sample size consisting of only 12 families.

This limited the power available to detect specific effects.

Nonetheless, despite the small sample, many of the tested

effects were robust enough to not only be statistically signifi-

cant at a conventional level but at a conservative level as well.

We also utilized alternative statistical techniques that are inde-

pendent of sample size to detect change, such as an RCI to

assess individual participant change and effect size estimates.

Third, because of the small sample size, it is possible that our

lack of findings related to adolescent self-report could be

based on a single adolescent reporting deterioration in any

behavioral domain. We did examine each instance of dete-

rioration and did not find that this was due to a single partici-

pant, but spread out across a few participants. In addition,

some caregivers reported deterioration as assessed by the

CBCL and we were still able to detect significant reductions

in all symptoms for caregiver-reported adolescent symptoms.

For these reasons, we do not believe any single participant

skewed the results of this study.

The results of this pilot study provide support for multifam-

ily DBT skills group as an add-on to treatment as usual for ado-

lescents displaying symptoms and behaviors associated with

borderline PD and externalizing pathology. With the use of a

multimethod assessment approach, results supported a reduc-

tion in externalizing, internalizing, aggression, rule-breaking,

and attention problems, as well as borderline and antisocial

symptoms, over the course of a 16-week multifamily group

therapy intervention. Although there was not a significant

decrease in caregiver symptoms and behaviors, effect size esti-

mates were promising and suggest that future studies with

larger samples may be able to detect these changes. Due to the

limited sample size and lack of control group, we encourage

future studies to more fully examine the hypotheses explored

in the present study. Dissemination and implementation of

multifamily DBT skills group is a promising initiative for com-

munity clinics where the full protocol of standard DBT may not

be feasible.

Declaration of Conflicting Interests

The author(s) declared no potential conflicts of interest with respect to

the research, authorship, and/or publication of this article.

Funding

The author(s) received no financial support for the research, author-

ship, and/or publication of this article.

References

Achenbach, T. (1991). Manual for the youth self-report and 1991

profile. Burlington: Department of Psychiatry, University of Vermont.

Achenbach, T. M., & Edelbrock, C. (1983). Manual for the child

behavior checklist and revised child behavior profile. Burlington:

Department of Psychiatry, University of Vermont.

Achenbach, T. M., & Rescorla, L. A. (2001). Manual for the ASEBA

school-age forms and profiles. Burlington: University of Vermont,

Research Center for Children, Youth, and Families.

American Psychiatric Association. (2000). Diagnostic and statistical

manual of mental disorders (4th ed., Text Rev.). Washington,

DC: Author.

Angold, A., Costello, E. J., & Erkanli, A. (1999). Comorbidity. Journal

of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 40, 57–87.

Asarnow, J. R., Tompson, M. C., & Berk, M. (2005). Adolescent

depression: Family focused treatment strategies. In W. Pinsof &

J. Lebow (Eds.), Family psychology: The art of the science (pp.

425–449). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.

Brownell, K. D., Kelman, J. H., & Stunkard, A. J. (1983). Treatment of

obese children with and without their mothers: Changes in weight

and blood pressure. Pediatrics, 71, 515–523.

Carter, J. S., & Garber, J. (2011). Predictors of the first onset of a

major depressive episode and changes in depressive symptoms

across adolescence: Stress and negative cognitions. Journal of

Abnormal Psychology, 120, 779–796.

Cohen, J. (1988). Statistical power analysis for the behavioral

sciences (2nd ed.). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.

Cohen, P., Chen, H., Crawford, T. N., Brook, J. S., & Gordon, K. (2007).

Personality disorders in early adolescence and the development

Uliaszek et al. 213

at MISSISSIPPI COLLEGE LIBRARY on June 19, 2015tfj.sagepub.comDownloaded from

of later substance use disorders in the general population. Drug and

Alcohol Dependence, 88, 71–84.

Derogatis, L. R. (1983). SCL 90-R: Administration, scoring, and pro-

cedures manual. Towson, MD: Clinical Psychometric Research.

Diamond, G. S., & Siqueland, L. (1995). Family therapy for depressed

adolescents. Psychotherapy: Theory, Research, and Practice, 32,

77–90.

Dixon, L., McFarlane, W. R., Lefley, H., Lucksted, A., Cohen, M., &

Falloon, I., . . . Sondheimer, D. (2001). Evidence-based practices

for services to families of people with psychiatric disabilities. Psy-

chiatric Services, 52, 903–910.

Feldman, J., & Kazdin, A. E. (1995). Parent management training for

oppositional and conduct problem children. The Clinical Psychol-

ogist, 48, 3–5.

Fogelson, D. L., Nuechterlein, K. H., Asarnow, R. F., Payne, D. L.,

Subotnik, K. L., & Giannini, C. A. (1999). The factor structure

of schizophrenia spectrum personality disorders: Signs and symp-

toms in relatives of psychotic patients from the UCLA Family

Members Study. Psychiatry Research, 87, 137–146.

Fruzzetti, A. E., Santisteban, D. A., & Hoffman, P. D. (2007). Dialec-

tical behavior therapy with families. In L. A. Dimeff & K. Koerner

(Eds.), Dialectical behavior therapy in clinical practice (pp.

222–244). New York, NY: Guilford Press.

Gratz, K. L., Tull, M. T., Reynolds, E. K., Bagge, C. L., Latzman, R.

D., Daughters, S. B., & Lejuez, C. W. (2009). Extending extant

models of the pathogenesis of borderline personality disorder to

childhood borderline personality symptoms: The roles of affective

dysfunction, disinhibition, and self- and emotion-regulation defi-

cits. Development and Psychopathology, 21, 1263–1291.

Hafkenscheid, A. (1993). Psychometric evaluation of the Symptom

Checklist (SCL-90) in psychiatric patients. Personality and Indi-

vidual Differences, 14, 751–756.

Hammen, C., Rudolph, K., Weisz, J. R., Burge, D., & Rao, U. (1999).

The context of depression in clinic-referred youth: Neglected areas

in treatment. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Ado-

lescent Psychiatry, 38, 64–71.

Harley, R., Sprich, S., Safren, S., Jacobo, M., & Fava, M. (2008).

Adaptation of dialectical behavior therapy skills training group for

treatment-resistant depression. The Journal of Nervous and Mental

Disease, 196, 136–143.

Holland, B. S., & Copenhaver, M. D. (1988). Improved Bonferroni-

type multiple testing procedures. Psychological Bulletin, 104,

145–149.

Ivanova, M. Y., Achenbach, T. M., Rescorla, L. A., Dumenci, L.,

Almqvist, F., & Bilenberg, N., . . . Verhulst, F. C. (2007). The gen-

eralizability of the youth self-report syndrome structure in 23 soci-

eties. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 75, 729–738.

Iverson, K. M., Shenk, C., & Fruzzetti, A. E. (2009). Dialectical beha-

vior therapy for women victims of domestic abuse: A pilot study.

Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 40, 242–248.

Jacobson, N. S., & Truax, P. (1991). Clinical significance: A statistical

approach to defining meaningful change in psychotherapy

research. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 67,

332–339.

James, A. C., Taylor, A., Winmill, L., & Alfoadari, K. (2008). A pre-

liminary community study of dialectical behaviour therapy (DBT)

with adolescent females demonstrating persistent, deliberate self-

harm (DSH). Child and Adolescent Mental Health, 13, 148–152.

Koons, C. R., Robins, C. J., Tweed, J. L., Lynch, T. R., Gonzalez, A.

M., & Morse, J.Q., . . . Bastian, L. A. (2001). Efficacy of dialecti-

cal behavior therapy in women veterans with borderline personal-

ity disorder. Behavior Therapy, 32, 371–390.

Lebow, J. L. (2008). Couple and family therapy. In J. L. Lebow (Ed.),

Twenty-first century psychotherapies: Contemporary approaches

to theory and practice (pp. 307–346). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley.

Lebow, J. L., & Gurman, A. S. (1995). Research assessing couple and

family therapy. Annual Review of Psychology, 46, 27–57.

Linehan, M. M. (1993). Cognitive behavioral therapy of borderline

personality disorder. New York, NY: Guilford Press.

Linehan, M. M., Armstrong, H. E., Suarez, A., Allmon, D., & Heard, H.

L. (1991). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of chronically suicidal

borderline patients. Archives of General Psychiatry, 48, 1060–1064.

Linehan, M. M., Comtois, K. A., Murray, A. M., Brown, M. Z.,

Gallop, R. J., & Heard, H. L., . . . Lindenboim, N. (2006).

Two-year randomized controlled trial and follow-up of dialecti-

cal behavior therapy vs therapy by experts for suicidal beha-

viors and borderline personality disorder. Archives of General

Psychiatry, 63, 757–766.

Linehan, M. M., Dimeff, L. A., Reynolds, S. K., Comtois, K. A.,

Welch, S. S., Heagerty, P., & Kivlahan, D. R. (2002). Dialectical

behavior therapy versus comprehensive validation therapy plus

12-step for the treatment of opioid dependent women meeting cri-

teria for borderline personality disorder. Drug and Alcohol Depen-

dence, 67, 13–26.

Linehan, M. M., Schmidt, H., III, Dimeff, L. A., Craft, J. C., Kanter, J., &

Comtois, K. A. (1999). Dialectical behavior therapy for patients with

borderline personality disorder and drug-dependence. The American

Journal of Addiction, 8, 279–292.

Linehan, M. M., Tutek, D., Heard, H. L., & Armstrong, H. E. (1994).

Interpersonal outcome of cognitive-behavioral treatment for

chronically suicidal borderline patients. American Journal of Psy-

chiatry, 51, 1771–1776.

Loranger, A. W. (1999). The international personality disorder exam-

ination. Lutz, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources.

Loranger, A. W., Sartorius, N., Andreoli, A., Berger, P., Buchheim, P.,

& Channabasavanna, S. M., . . . Regier, D. A. (1994). The interna-

tional personality disorder examination: The world health organi-

zation/alcohol, drug abuse, and mental health administration

international pilot study of personality disorders. Archives of Gen-

eral Psychiatry, 51, 215–224.

Lynch, T. R., Cheavens, J. S., Cukrowicz, K. C., Thorp, S. R., Bron-

ner, L., & Beyer, J. (2007). Treatment of older adults with co-

morbid personality disorder and depression: A dialectical behavior

therapy approach. International Journal of Geriatric Psychiatry,

22, 131–143.

Lynch, T. R., Morse, J. Q., Mendelson, T., & Robins, C. (2003). Dia-

lectical behavior therapy for depressed older adults: A randomized

pilot study. American Journal of Geriatric Psychiatry, 11, 33–45.

Markon, K. E., Krueger, R. F., & Watson, D. (2005). Delineating the

structure of normal and abnormal personality: An integrative hier-

archical approach. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,

88, 139–157.

214 The Family Journal: Counseling and Therapy for Couples and Families 22(2)

at MISSISSIPPI COLLEGE LIBRARY on June 19, 2015tfj.sagepub.comDownloaded from

Miller, A. L., Glinski, J., Woodberry, K. A., Mitchell, A. G., & Indik, J.

(2002). Family therapy and dialectical behavior therapy with adoles-

cents: Part I: Proposing a clinical synthesis. American Journal of

Psychotherapy, 56, 568–584.

Miller, A. L., Rathus, J. H., & Linehan, M. M. (2007). Dialectical

behavior therapy with suicidal adolescents. New York, NY:

Guilford Press.

Neacsiu, A. D., Rizvi, S. L., & Linehan, M. M. (2010). Dialectical

behavior therapy skills use as a mediator and outcome of treatment

for borderline personality disorder. Behavior Research and Ther-

apy, 48, 832–839.

Nelson-Gray, R. O., Keane, S. P., Hurst, R. M., Mitchell, J. T., War-

burton, J. B., Chok, J. T., & Cobb, A. R. (2006). A modified DBT

skills training program for oppositional defiant adolescents: Pro-

mising preliminary findings. Behaviour Research and Therapy,

44, 1811–1820.

Nickell, A. D., Waudby, C. J., & Trull, T. J. (2002). Attachment, par-

ental bonding and borderline personality disorder features in young

adults. Journal of Personality Disorders, 16, 148–159.

Rathus, J. H., & Miller, A. L. (2002). Dialectical behavior therapy

adapted for suicidal adolescents. Suicide and Life-Threatening

Behaviors, 32, 146–157.

Robins, C. J., & Chapman, A. L. (2004). Dialectical behavior therapy:

Current status, recent developments and future directions. Journal

of Personality Disorders, 18, 73–89.

Safer, D. L., Telch, C. F., & Agras, W. S. (2001). Dialectical behavior

therapy for bulimia nervosa. American Journal of Psychiatry, 158,

632–634.

Santisteban, D. A., Muir, J. A., Mena, M. P., & Mitrani, V. B. (2003).

Integrative borderline adolescent family therapy: Meeting the chal-

lenges of treating adolescents with borderline personality disorder.

Psychotherapy: Therapy, Research, Practice, Training, 40, 251–264.

Satin, W., La Greca, A. M., Zigo, M. A., & Skyler, J. S. (1989). Dia-

betes in adolescence: Effects of multi-family group therapy and

parent simulation of diabetes. Journal of Pediatric Psychology,

14, 259–276.

Sexton, T. L., & Alexander, J. F. (2002). Functional family therapy for

at-risk adolescents and their families. In G. Patterson (Ed.), Com-

prehensive handbook of psychotherapy: Cognitive-behavioral

approaches (pp. 117–140). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley.

Shiner, R. L. (2009). The development of personality disorders: Per-

spectives from normal personality development in childhood and

adolescence. Development and Psychopathology, 21, 715–734.

Skodol, A. E., Siever, L. J., Livesley, W. J., Gunderson, J. G., Pfohl, B.,

& Widiger, T. A. (2002). The borderline personality diagnosis II:

Biology, genetics, and clinical course. Biological Psychiatry, 51,

951–963.

Soler, J., Pascual, J. C., Tiana, T., Cebrı́a, A., Barrachina, J., &

Campins, J., . . . Pérez, V. (2009). Dialectical behavior therapy

skills training compared to standard group therapy in borderline

personality disorder: A 3-month randomized controlled clinical

trial. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 47, 353–358.

Stanton, M. D., & Shadish, W. R. (1997). Outcome, attrition, and

family-couples treatment for drug abuse: A meta-analysis and

review of the controlled, comparative studies. Psychological Bul-

letin, 122, 170–191.

Stepp, S. D., Epler, A. J., Jahng, S., & Trull, T. J. (2008). The effect

of dialectical behavior therapy skills use on borderline personal-

ity disorder features. Journal of Personality Disorders, 22,

549–563.

Telch, C. F., Agras, W. S., & Linehan, M. M. (2000). Group dialecti-

cal behavior therapy for binge-eating disorder: A preliminary,

uncontrolled trial. Behavior Therapy, 31, 569–582.

Telch, C. F., Agras, W. S., & Linehan, M. M. (2001). Dialectical beha-

vior therapy for binge eating disorder. Journal of Consulting and

Clinical Psychology, 69, 1061–1065.

Trupin, E. W., Stewart, D. G., Beach, B., & Boesky, L. (2002). Effec-

tiveness of a dialectical behaviour therapy program for incarcer-

ated female juvenile offenders. Child and Adolescent Mental

Health, 7, 121–127.

van den Bosch, L. M. C., Koeter, M. W. J., Stijnen, T., Verheul, R., &

van den Brink, W. (2005). Sustained efficacy of dialectical beha-

vior therapy for borderline personality disorder. Behaviour

Research and Therapy, 43, 1231–1241.

Verheul, R., van den Bosch, L. M. C., Koeter, M. W. J., de Ridder, M.

A. J., Stijnen, T., & van den Brink, W. (2003). Dialectical beha-

viour therapy for women with borderline personality disorder:

12-Month, randomized clinical trial in the Netherlands. British

Journal of Psychiatry, 182, 135–140.

Weisz, J. R., Jensen-Doss, A., & Hawley, K. M. (2006). Evidence-

based youth psychotherapies versus usual clinical care: A meta-

analysis of direct comparisons. American Psychologist, 61,

671–689.

White, C. N., Gunderson, J. G., Zanarini, M. C., & Hudson, J. I. (2003).

Family studies of borderline personality disorder: A review. Har-

vard Review of Psychiatry, 11, 8–19.

Wise, E. A. (2004). Methods for analyzing psychotherapy outcomes:

A review of clinical significance, reliable change, and recommen-

dations for future directions. Journal of Personality Assessment,

82, 50–59.

Woodberry, K. A., Miller, A. L., Glinski, J., Indik, J., & Mitchell, A.

G. (2002). Family therapy and dialectical behavior therapy with

adolescents: Part II: A theoretical review. American Journal of

Psychotherapy, 56, 585–602.

Woodberry, K. A., & Popenoe, E. J. (2008). Implementing dialectical

behavior therapy with adolescents and their families in a commu-

nity outpatient clinic. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 15,

277–286.

Uliaszek et al. 215

at MISSISSIPPI COLLEGE LIBRARY on June 19, 2015tfj.sagepub.comDownloaded from

<< /ASCII85EncodePages false /AllowTransparency false /AutoPositionEPSFiles true /AutoRotatePages /None /Binding /Left /CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 2.2) /CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-2.1) /CalCMYKProfile (U.S. Web Coated \050SWOP\051 v2) /sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-2.1) /CannotEmbedFontPolicy /Warning /CompatibilityLevel 1.3 /CompressObjects /Off /CompressPages true /ConvertImagesToIndexed true /PassThroughJPEGImages false /CreateJDFFile false /CreateJobTicket false /DefaultRenderingIntent /Default /DetectBlends true /DetectCurves 0.1000 /ColorConversionStrategy /LeaveColorUnchanged /DoThumbnails false /EmbedAllFonts true /EmbedOpenType false /ParseICCProfilesInComments true /EmbedJobOptions true /DSCReportingLevel 0 /EmitDSCWarnings false /EndPage -1 /ImageMemory 1048576 /LockDistillerParams true /MaxSubsetPct 100 /Optimize true /OPM 1 /ParseDSCComments true /ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true /PreserveCopyPage true /PreserveDICMYKValues true /PreserveEPSInfo true /PreserveFlatness false /PreserveHalftoneInfo false /PreserveOPIComments false /PreserveOverprintSettings true /StartPage 1 /SubsetFonts true /TransferFunctionInfo /Apply /UCRandBGInfo /Remove /UsePrologue false /ColorSettingsFile () /AlwaysEmbed [ true ] /NeverEmbed [ true ] /AntiAliasColorImages false /CropColorImages false /ColorImageMinResolution 266 /ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy /OK /DownsampleColorImages true /ColorImageDownsampleType /Bicubic /ColorImageResolution 200 /ColorImageDepth -1 /ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 /ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 1.00000 /EncodeColorImages true /ColorImageFilter /DCTEncode /AutoFilterColorImages false /ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy /JPEG /ColorACSImageDict << /QFactor 0.15 /HSamples [1 1 1 1] /VSamples [1 1 1 1] >> /ColorImageDict << /QFactor 0.76 /HSamples [2 1 1 2] /VSamples [2 1 1 2] >> /JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >> /JPEG2000ColorImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >> /AntiAliasGrayImages false /CropGrayImages false /GrayImageMinResolution 266 /GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy /OK /DownsampleGrayImages true /GrayImageDownsampleType /Bicubic /GrayImageResolution 200 /GrayImageDepth -1 /GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 /GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 1.00000 /EncodeGrayImages true /GrayImageFilter /DCTEncode /AutoFilterGrayImages false /GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy /JPEG /GrayACSImageDict << /QFactor 0.15 /HSamples [1 1 1 1] /VSamples [1 1 1 1] >> /GrayImageDict << /QFactor 0.76 /HSamples [2 1 1 2] /VSamples [2 1 1 2] >> /JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >> /JPEG2000GrayImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >> /AntiAliasMonoImages false /CropMonoImages false /MonoImageMinResolution 900 /MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy /OK /DownsampleMonoImages true /MonoImageDownsampleType /Average /MonoImageResolution 600 /MonoImageDepth -1 /MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 1.00000 /EncodeMonoImages true /MonoImageFilter /CCITTFaxEncode /MonoImageDict << /K -1 >> /AllowPSXObjects false /CheckCompliance [ /None ] /PDFX1aCheck false /PDFX3Check false /PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false /PDFXNoTrimBoxError true /PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox false /PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /PDFXOutputIntentProfile (U.S. Web Coated \050SWOP\051 v2) /PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier (CGATS TR 001) /PDFXOutputCondition () /PDFXRegistryName (http://www.color.org) /PDFXTrapped /Unknown /Description << /ENU <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> >> /Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (1.0) ] /OtherNamespaces [ << /AsReaderSpreads false /CropImagesToFrames true /ErrorControl /WarnAndContinue /FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false /IncludeGuidesGrids false /IncludeNonPrinting false /IncludeSlug false /Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (4.0) ] /OmitPlacedBitmaps false /OmitPlacedEPS false /OmitPlacedPDF false /SimulateOverprint /Legacy >> << /AllowImageBreaks true /AllowTableBreaks true /ExpandPage false /HonorBaseURL true /HonorRolloverEffect false /IgnoreHTMLPageBreaks false /IncludeHeaderFooter false /MarginOffset [ 0 0 0 0 ] /MetadataAuthor () /MetadataKeywords () /MetadataSubject () /MetadataTitle () /MetricPageSize [ 0 0 ] /MetricUnit /inch /MobileCompatible 0 /Namespace [ (Adobe) (GoLive) (8.0) ] /OpenZoomToHTMLFontSize false /PageOrientation /Portrait /RemoveBackground false /ShrinkContent true /TreatColorsAs /MainMonitorColors /UseEmbeddedProfiles false /UseHTMLTitleAsMetadata true >> << /AddBleedMarks false /AddColorBars false /AddCropMarks false /AddPageInfo false /AddRegMarks false /BleedOffset [ 9 9 9 9 ] /ConvertColors /ConvertToRGB /DestinationProfileName (sRGB IEC61966-2.1) /DestinationProfileSelector /UseName /Downsample16BitImages true /FlattenerPreset << /ClipComplexRegions true /ConvertStrokesToOutlines false /ConvertTextToOutlines false /GradientResolution 300 /LineArtTextResolution 1200 /PresetName ([High Resolution]) /PresetSelector /HighResolution /RasterVectorBalance 1 >> /FormElements true /GenerateStructure false /IncludeBookmarks false /IncludeHyperlinks false /IncludeInteractive false /IncludeLayers false /IncludeProfiles true /MarksOffset 9 /MarksWeight 0.125000 /MultimediaHandling /UseObjectSettings /Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (2.0) ] /PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector /DocumentCMYK /PageMarksFile /RomanDefault /PreserveEditing true /UntaggedCMYKHandling /UseDocumentProfile /UntaggedRGBHandling /UseDocumentProfile /UseDocumentBleed false >> ] /SyntheticBoldness 1.000000 >> setdistillerparams << /HWResolution [288 288] /PageSize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice

Dialectical Behavior Therapy for Adolescents- Theory, Treatment Adaptations, and Empirical Outcomes.pdf

Dialectical Behavior Therapy for Adolescents: Theory, Treatment Adaptations, and Empirical Outcomes

Heather A. MacPherson • Jennifer S. Cheavens •

Mary A. Fristad

Published online: 8 December 2012

� Springer Science+Business Media New York 2012

Abstract Dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) was originally

developed for chronically suicidal adults with borderline

personality disorder (BPD) and emotion dysregulation.

Randomized controlled trials (RCTs) indicate DBT is

associated with improvements in problem behaviors,

including suicide ideation and behavior, non-suicidal self-

injury (NSSI), attrition, and hospitalization. Positive out-

comes with adults have prompted researchers to adapt DBT

for adolescents. Given this interest in DBT for adolescents,

it is important to review the theoretical rationale and the

evidence base for this treatment and its adaptations. A solid

theoretical foundation allows for adequate evaluation of

content, structural, and developmental adaptations and

provides a framework for understanding which symptoms

or behaviors are expected to improve with treatment and

why. We first summarize the adult DBT literature,

including theory, treatment structure and content, and

outcome research. Then, we review theoretical underpin-

nings, adaptations, and outcomes of DBT for adolescents.

DBT has been adapted for adolescents with various psy-

chiatric disorders (i.e., BPD, mood disorders, externalizing

disorders, eating disorders, trichotillomania) and problem

behaviors (i.e., suicide ideation and behavior, NSSI) across

several settings (i.e., outpatient, day program, inpatient,

residential, correctional facility). The rationale for using

DBT with these adolescents rests in the common under-

lying dysfunction in emotion regulation among the

aforementioned disorders and problem behaviors. Thus, the

theoretical underpinnings of DBT suggest that this treat-

ment is likely to be beneficial for adolescents with a broad

array of emotion regulation difficulties, particularly und-

erregulation of emotion resulting in behavioral excess.

Results from open and quasi-experimental adolescent

studies are promising; however, RCTs are sorely needed.

Keywords Dialectical behavior therapy � Adolescents � Emotion dysregulation � Treatment adaptation

Introduction

Dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) is a cognitive behav-

ioral treatment originally developed by Linehan (1993a, b)

for the treatment of chronically suicidal individuals, often

with borderline personality disorder (BPD). Positive results

from randomized controlled trials (RCTs) with adults have

prompted researchers to adapt DBT for adolescents who

exhibit similar behavioral and emotional dysregulation.

Given this interest in DBT for adolescents, it is important

to review the theoretical rationale and the evidence base for

this treatment and its adaptations. A solid theoretical

foundation allows for adequate evaluation of content,

structural, and developmental adaptations and provides a

framework for understanding which symptoms or behav-

iors are expected to improve with treatment and why. We

first summarize the adult DBT literature, including theory,

treatment structure and content, and outcome research.

Then, we review theoretical underpinnings, adaptations,

and empirical outcomes of DBT for adolescents. Regarding

the outcome literature of DBT for adolescents, studies of

youth with BPD features, suicide ideation, suicide behav-

ior, and/or non-suicidal self-injury (NSSI) are reviewed in

H. A. MacPherson (&) � M. A. Fristad Department of Psychiatry, The Ohio State University, 1670

Upham Drive, Suite 460, Columbus, OH 43210-1250, USA

e-mail: [email protected]

H. A. MacPherson � J. S. Cheavens � M. A. Fristad Department of Psychology, The Ohio State University,

1835 Neil Avenue, Columbus, OH 43210-1250, USA

123

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

DOI 10.1007/s10567-012-0126-7

Table 1; studies of youth with oppositional defiant disorder

(ODD), bipolar disorder (BD), binge eating disorder

(BED), anorexia nervosa (AN), bulimia nervosa (BN), and

trichotillomania (TTM) are reviewed in Table 2; and

studies that investigated DBT for adolescents in diverse

settings (i.e., correctional facilities, residential treatment

centers, long-term inpatient units, day treatment programs)

are reviewed in Table 3. We conclude with a discussion of

limitations in the adolescent DBT literature and also offer

considerations for future research. Review of research

efforts suggests DBT may be beneficial for adolescents

with a broad array of emotion regulation difficulties, par-

ticularly underregulation of emotion resulting in behavioral

excess. However, RCTs are needed to provide more

definitive evidence for the efficacy of DBT for adolescents.

Dialectical Behavior Therapy for Adults

DBT incorporates aspects of behavioral science, dialectical

philosophy, and Zen practice. Through a balance of change

and acceptance techniques within in a dialectical frame-

work, DBT aims to extinguish maladaptive behaviors and

shape and reinforce adaptive behaviors within a validating

environment, with the goal of helping clients build a life

worth living. The following overview first discusses dia-

lectical and biosocial theoretical underpinnings of DBT

and treatment components, modes, and strategies, as

delineated in the individual therapy and skills training

manuals by Linehan (1993a, b). This section concludes

with a summary of the adult DBT outcome literature.

Theory

Both dialectical philosophy and the biosocial theory underlie

the DBT framework. Dialectical philosophy posits a

worldview emphasizing wholeness, interrelatedness, and

process. It also suggests that there is no absolute truth and

instead emphasizes the existence of opposing forces simul-

taneously (i.e., thesis and antithesis). Dialectical change or

progress comes from the resolution of opposing forces,

through the recognition of the truth or validity in each pole,

into a synthesis. Regarding therapeutic dialog and relation-

ship, dialectics refer to change by persuasion, making use of

oppositions inherent in the therapeutic relationship, and

continually questioning what is being left out of under-

standing, to reduce polarized thoughts and behaviors. In

DBT, dialectics inform a worldview and communication

strategies used to elicit change (e.g., by the therapist high-

lighting opposing viewpoints and simultaneously looking for

truth in each perspective). DBT assumes opposing views can

exist within a person at the same time (e.g., desire to live and

desire to die), which can result in conflict; however,

highlighting and accepting this tension can help both thera-

pist and client move past a treatment standstill and foster

change (Rizvi et al. 2012). The central dialectic in DBT is the

intrinsic tension between acceptance and change (Linehan

1997). For a review of dialectics in DBT, see Fruzzetti and

Fruzzetti (2008).

DBT is a theoretically derived treatment in which skills

and therapeutic techniques were developed to target spe-

cific deficits outlined in Linehan’s (1993a) biosocial theory

of BPD. The biosocial theory suggests that BPD is pri-

marily a dysfunction of emotion regulation (Linehan

1993a), or the ability to monitor, evaluate, and modulate

one’s affective state (i.e., when and what emotions occur,

and how one experiences and expresses those emotions) in

order to accomplish one’s goals (Gross 1998; Thompson

1994). Specifically, the biosocial theory posits that

the emotional, behavioral, interpersonal, cognitive, and

selfdysregulation of individuals with BPD are developed

and maintained through transaction between a biological

tendency toward emotion dysregulation and an invalidating

environment. An early biological vulnerability, expressed

in childhood as impulsivity, has also been identified as a

precursor to the development of BPD (Crowell et al. 2009).

Emotion dysregulation stems in part from emotional vul-

nerability, resulting in frequent and intense emotional

experiences, combined with an inability to adequately

regulate emotions. Characteristics of emotional vulnera-

bility include high sensitivity to emotional stimuli, emo-

tional intensity, and slow return to emotional baseline.

An invalidating environment negates, punishes, and/or

responds erratically and inappropriately to private experi-

ences, punishes emotional displays and intermittently

reinforces emotional escalation, and oversimplifies the ease

of problem solving. Invalidation has also been associated

with increased levels of negative affect and physiological

arousal (Shenk and Fruzzetti 2011). As a result, emotion-

ally vulnerable individuals who experience invalidating

environments have never learned how to label and regulate

emotions, how to tolerate distress, or when to trust their

emotional responses. They tend to invalidate their emo-

tional experiences, look to others for accurate reflections of

reality, and oversimplify the ease of problem solving. From

a biosocial perspective, BPD behaviors resulting from the

transaction between emotional vulnerability and an inval-

idating environment function to regulate emotions or are

consequences of failed emotion regulation. Recent empir-

ical research supports the central role of emotion dysreg-

ulation not only in BPD (Chapman et al. 2008; Glenn and

Klonsky 2009; Gratz et al. 2006; Hughes et al. 2012;

Putnam and Silk 2005; Reeves et al. 2010; Selby and Joiner

2009) but also across broad areas of psychopathology

(Aldao et al. 2010; Kring and Sloan 2010; Nolen-Hoek-

sema 2012).

60 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

Table 1 Studies of dialectical behavior therapy for adolescents with borderline personality disorder symptoms, suicide ideation, suicide behavior, and/or non-suicidal self-injury

Authors Design/Setting N, % Female Age M or Range

Inclusion Criteria % Completed DBT Format Outcomes

Miller et al.

(2000)

Pre–post

Outpatient

33

85 % F of 27

youth with

complete

data

14–19 Self-injury in past

16 weeks or

current suicide

ideation; 3 BPD

symptoms

N/A (only

examined

treatment

completers)

12 weeks: weekly

individual therapy and

multifamily skills group,

telephone coaching,

consultation team

Significant posttreatment

improvement in BPD

symptoms; all skills rated

moderately to extremely

helpful; distress tolerance

(self-soothe) and

mindfulness skills (do

what works, stay focused)

rated most helpful

Woodberry

and

Popenoe

(2008)

Pre–post

Community

clinic

46

89 % F

13–18 History of suicide

attempts, self-

injury, and/or

unstable affect

or relationships

in past

3–6 months

63 % 15 weeks: weekly

individual therapy and

multifamily skills group,

telephone coaching,

consultation team

Significant posttreatment

improvements in

depression (d = 0.76 to 0.84), anger (d = 0.94), dissociation (d = 0.69), overall psychiatric

symptoms and functional

difficulties (d = 0.63), suicide ideation

(d = 0.73), thoughts of NSSI (d = 0.62), parent report of own depression

(d = 0.72); nonsignificant improvements in

internalizing (d = 0.55), externalizing (d = 0.60), total problems (d = 0.65)

James et al.

(2008)

Pre–post with

follow-up

Community

clinic

16

100 % F

15–18 History of

[6 months of severe and

persistent

deliberate self-

harm (all

had C 5 BPD

symptoms)

87.5 % 1 year (2 6-month blocks):

weekly individual

therapy and adolescent

skills group, telephone

coaching

Significant posttreatment

improvements in

depression, hopelessness,

NSSI, general

functioning; gains

maintained at 8-month

follow-up

James et al.

(2011)

Pre–post

Community

clinic

25

88 % F

13–17 History of

[6 months of severe and

persistent

deliberate self-

harm (all

had C 5 BPD

symptoms)

72 % 1 year (2 6-month blocks):

weekly individual

therapy and adolescent

skills group, telephone

coaching, consultation

team, outreach strategies

(e.g., meals,

transportation, caregiver

consultation)

Significant posttreatment

improvements in

depression, hopelessness,

NSSI, general

functioning; findings

maintained with intent-to-

treat analyses

Fleischhaker

et al.

(2011)

Pre–post with

follow-up

Outpatient

12

100 % F

13–19 NSSI or suicide

behavior in past

16 weeks; BPD

diagnosis or C3

BPD symptoms

75 % 16–24 weeks: weekly

individual therapy and

multifamily skills group,

telephone coaching,

consultation team

Significant improvements at

1-year follow-up in

suicide behavior (8 youth

attempted pretreatment;

no attempts during study

or follow-up), NSSI

(d = 0.92), psychosocial adjustment (d = 1.30 to 3.40 for significant

improvements),

psychopathology

(d = 0.54 to 2.14 for significant

improvements), BPD

symptoms (pretreatment

M = 5.8, SD = 1.3; follow-up M = 2.75, SD = 1.9)

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80 61

123

Using dialectical philosophy and biosocial theory,

Linehan (1993a) described common dialectical dilemmas

of individuals with BPD, characterized as six classes of

behaviors that represent the extremes of three continua. At

one end of each continuum is a class of behaviors

hypothesized to be biologically driven, and at the other end

is a class of behaviors thought to be socially determined

and maintained. The first dialectical dilemma, emotional

vulnerability versus self-invalidation, is a tendency to

vacillate between intense, uncontrollable emotional suf-

fering and dismissal, judgment, and invalidation of suf-

fering. Active passivity versus apparent competence, the

second dialectical dilemma, involves passivity in solving

one’s problems while actively engaging others to solve

problems, coupled with the tendency of others to overes-

timate the capabilities of the individual with BPD. Lastly,

unrelenting crises versus inhibited grieving is a tendency to

experience life as a series of extreme problems contrasted

with an inability to experience emotions associated with

trauma or loss. Individuals with BPD are likely to vacillate

between these polarities, causing distress (Linehan and

Schmidt 1995). In line with dialectical philosophy, the

overarching target of treatment is to help patients find the

truth in each end of the dialectic and create a synthesis that

reduces the distress associated with extreme vacillation.

Treatment Functions, Modes, and Strategies

Dialectical philosophy and biosocial theory inform DBT

functions, structure, and strategies. DBT has five functions:

enhancing behavioral capabilities; improving motivation;

assuring generalization of gains to the natural environment;

structuring the environment so it reinforces functional

rather than dysfunctional behaviors; and enhancing

Table 1 continued

Authors Design/Setting N, % Female Age M or Range

Inclusion Criteria % Completed DBT Format Outcomes

Rathus and

Miller

(2002)

Quasi-

experimental

Outpatient

DBT = 29

TAU = 82

93 % F in

DBT

73 % F in

TAU

DBT = 16.1

TAU = 15.0

Suicide attempt

in last

16 weeks or

current suicide

ideation; BPD

diagnosis

or C 3 BPD

symptoms

DBT = 62 %

TAU = 40 %

12 weeks:

DBT = weekly individual

therapy and multifamily

skills group, telephone

coaching, consultation

team

TAU = weekly individual

psychodynamic

psychotherapy and

family therapy

Posttreatment, DBT

adolescents demonstrated

significantly fewer

psychiatric

hospitalizations (0 %

versus 13 %) and higher

treatment completion

compared with TAU; 1

suicide attempt in DBT

versus 7 in TAU; DBT

adolescents demonstrated

significant reductions in

suicide ideation,

depression, anxiety,

general psychiatric

symptoms, global

severity, BPD symptoms

posttreatment (not

measured in or compared

with TAU)

Katz et al.

(2004)

Quasi-

experimental

with follow-

up

Inpatient

DBT = 32

TAU = 30

84 % F in

total

sample

14–17 Recent suicide

attempt or

suicide

ideation;

agreement to

stay in hospital

for the duration

of treatment

N/A

(treatment

completion

required)

2 weeks:

DBT = 4 individual

therapy sessions, 10

adolescent skills group

sessions, consultation

team, DBT milieu

TAU = C1 per week

individual and daily

group psychodynamic

psychotherapy, case

management,

psychodynamic milieu

Posttreatment, DBT

adolescents demonstrated

significant reduction in

number of violent

incidents on unit

compared with TAU;

significant reduction in

total number of violent

incidents on unit

comparing 6-months

before and after DBT;

both groups demonstrated

significant reductions in

NSSI (DBT d = 0.63; TAU d = 0.73), depression (DBT

d = 1.67; TAU d = 1.05), suicide ideation (DBT d = 2.12; TAU d = 1.36) over 1-year follow-up

DBT dialectical behavior therapy, F female, BPD borderline personality disorder, N/A not applicable, NSSI non-suicidal self-injury, TAU treatment as usual

62 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

therapist capabilities and motivation. These functions are

apparent over the course of four stages of treatment, each

with a hierarchy of treatment targets, and four modes of

therapy. In the pretreatment stage, the therapist orients the

individual to treatment and obtains commitment to the

therapist–client relationship and to work on goals. In stage

one, the therapist helps the client attain basic capabilities

(i.e., adding to the skill repertoire) by reducing life-

threatening behaviors (e.g., suicide behavior, self-injury),

therapy-interfering behaviors (e.g., noncompliance, nonat-

tendance), and quality-of-life-interfering behaviors (e.g.,

homelessness, psychiatric disorders), and by increasing

Table 2 Studies of dialectical behavior therapy for adolescents with oppositional defiant disorder, bipolar disorder, eating disorders, and trichotillomania

Authors Design/

Setting

N, % Female Age or

Range

Inclusion Criteria %

Completed

DBT Format Outcomes

Nelson-

Gray

et al.

(2006)

Pre–post

Outpatient

54

15 % F of

32 youth

who

completed

treatment

10–15 Oppositional

defiant disorder

diagnosis

69 %

(5 youth

repeated)

16 weeks: weekly

adolescent skills group

with adaptations to

improve attendance and

homework completion

(e.g., pizza, financial

incentives)

Significant posttreatment

improvements in

positive behaviors (i.e.,

interpersonal strength),

oppositional defiant

disorder and

externalizing behaviors,

depressive symptoms,

internalizing symptoms,

total problem behaviors

Goldstein

et al.

(2007)

Pre–post

Specialty

outpatient

clinic

10

80 % F

14–18 Bipolar I, II, or

NOS diagnosis

with acute

manic, mixed, or

depressive

episode in last

3 months

90 % 1 year: 24 weekly then 12

monthly sessions

alternating individual

therapy with individual

family skills training,

telephone coaching, BD

adaptations (e.g., BD

psychoeducation)

High satisfaction and

significant posttreatment

improvements in suicide

ideation (d = 0.9 and 1.2), emotion

dysregulation (d = 0.3), depression (d = 0.7); nonsignificant

improvement in NSSI

(d = 0.8)

Safer

et al.

(2007)

Case study

with

follow-up

Specialty

outpatient

clinic

1 F 16 Binge eating

disorder

diagnosis

100 % 21 weeks: weekly

individual therapy with

skills, diary card, chain

analyses review, 4 family

sessions, telephone

coaching, ED adaptations

(e.g., DBT model of EDs)

Reduced frequency and

severity of binge

episodes posttreatment

and at 3-month follow-

up

Salbach-

Andrae

et al.

(2008)

Case series

Outpatient

AN = 6

BN = 6

100 % F

12–18 Anorexia nervosa

or bulimia

nervosa

diagnosis

92 % 25 weeks: weekly

individual therapy and

adolescent skills group (8

multifamily groups),

telephone coaching,

consultation team, ED

adaptations (e.g., review

nutrition, body image)

Significant posttreatment

improvements in

restricting (d = 1.2), bingeing (d = 1.9), purging (d = 1.7), general psychopathology

(d = 0.43 to 1.10); AN adolescents

demonstrated significant

improvement in body

mass index (d = -2.6)

Welch

and Kim

(2012)

Case study

with

follow-up

Outpatient

1 F 16 Trichotillomania

diagnosis

100 % 16 weeks: weekly

individual therapy with

skills and chain analyses

review, parent check-in

meetings, TTM

adaptations (e.g., TTM

psychoeducation, habit

reversal, stimulus control)

Improvements in hair

pulling, emotion

regulation, anxiety,

depression

posttreatment; slight

worsening of hair pulling

from posttreatment to

follow-up

DBT dialectical behavior therapy, F female, NOS not otherwise specified, BD bipolar disorder, NSSI non-suicidal self-injury, ED eating disorder, AN anorexia nervosa, BN bulimia nervosa, TTM trichotillomania

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80 63

123

Table 3 Studies of dialectical behavior therapy for adolescents in diverse settings

Authors Design/

Setting

N, % Female Age M or

Range

Inclusion Criteria % Completed DBT Format Outcomes

Trupin

et al.

(2002)

Pre–post

with

control

group

Juvenile

detention

facility

DBT = 45

TAU = 45

100 % F

Mental health

unit = 14.8

General

population

unit = 15.5

TAU = 15.2

Incarcerated

females on

mental health

unit (DBT

n = 22) or

general

population unit

(DBT n = 23;

TAU n = 45)

N/A 10 months:

DBT ? TAU = 1–2

times/week adolescent

skills group

TAU = educational,

recreational,

vocational programs,

group meetings,

behavior modification

Mental health unit

adolescents showed

significant reduction in

behavior problems

(aggression, NSSI,

classroom disruption);

staff on mental health

unit (who received

more DBT training; 80

versus 16 h) showed

significant reduction in

punitive responses

compared to year prior;

no behavior or staff

changes on other units

Shelton

et al.

(2011)

Pre–post

secondary

analyses

Correctional

facility

38

0 % F

16–19 Incarcerated

males with

impulsive

behavior

problems

68 % 16 weeks: weekly

adolescent skills group

Significant posttreatment

improvements in

coping, aggression

impulsive behaviors;

nonsignificant

improvements in

negative affect, self-

control

Sunseri

(2004)

Pre–post

compared

29 months

before and

after DBT

Residential

treatment

facility

68 (n = 42

before DBT;

n = 26 after

DBT)

100 % F

12–18 Resident at

treatment

facility;

commitment to

DBT

N/A 29 months: weekly

individual therapy,

twice weekly

adolescent skills

group, telephone

coaching, consultation

team

After DBT

implementation,

significant reductions

in premature

terminations due to

self-harm or

psychiatric

hospitalization (16.7 %

versus 0 %), number of

days spent in

psychiatric hospitals

due to NSSI (71 days

from 8 youth versus

42 days from 6 youth),

duration of physical

restraints and

seclusions (median of

20 min versus 11 min)

Wasser

et al.

(2008)

Pre–post

with

control

group

(matched)

Residential

treatment

facility

DBT = 12

STM = 12

25 % F

DBT = 14.7

STM = 14.6

Resident at

treatment

facility

N/A (selected youth

who already

completed DBT)

17 weeks:

DBT = weekly

individual therapy and

multifamily skills

group

STM = family, group,

individual, behavioral,

medication treatment

General psychiatric

symptoms improved

posttreatment for both

groups; DBT

adolescents had

significantly greater

reduction in

depression; STM

adolescents had

significantly greater

reduction in

psychomotor

excitation

64 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

behavioral skills. In stage two, the therapist helps the client

replace quiet desperation with normative emotional expe-

riencing by decreasing posttraumatic stress. In stage three,

the therapist helps the client achieve ordinary happiness

and unhappiness and resolve problems in living by

increasing respect for self and achieving individual goals.

Finally, in stage four, the therapist helps the client resolve a

sense of incompleteness and attain the capacity for freedom

and sustained contentment. Most of the empirical research

on DBT has focused on stage one targets; however, flexi-

bility offered by the DBT stages allows for the application

of DBT to individuals with varying degrees of dysfunction

(Lynch et al. 2007b).

Aforementioned functions and stages of treatment are

accomplished via four modes of therapy: weekly individual

therapy; weekly group skills training; as-needed telephone

coaching; and weekly therapist consultation team meetings

(Robins and Rosenthal 2011). The individual therapist is

responsible for addressing motivational problems, treat-

ment planning, working on progress toward goals, and

assessing and problem-solving crises and skill deficits.

Other modes of treatment revolve around the individual

therapy (Linehan 1993a). Individual therapy is organized

around and sequentially targets the aforementioned hier-

archy of behaviors occurring either in session or reported

on the client’s weekly diary card, a monitoring tool on

which clients record daily ratings of emotions, problem

behaviors, and skills use (Rizvi et al. 2012). For example, a

therapist treating a client in stage one would first address

suicide or self-injurious behavior, followed by any forms of

Table 3 continued

Authors Design/

Setting

N, % Female Age M or

Range

Inclusion Criteria % Completed DBT Format Outcomes

McDonell

et al.

(2010)

Pre–post

with

historical

control

group

Long-term

inpatient

unit

DBT = 106

(from 2000 to

2005)

Control = 104

(from 1995 to

1999)

58 % F

12–17 Admitted to

inpatient unit

N/A 1 year: 3 DBT intensity

levels (unknown

frequency) = DBT

milieu (chain analyses,

behavior interventions,

individual skills); DBT

milieu ? adolescent

skills group; DBT

milieu ? adolescent

skills group ?

individual therapy; all

with consultation team

Control = individual

and family therapy as

needed

DBT adolescents

demonstrated

significant

improvement in global

functioning and

significant reduction in

number of

medications; compared

with control, DBT

adolescents

demonstrated

significant reduction in

NSSI

Charlton

and

Dykstra

(2011)

Pre–post

Day

treatment

program

19 Unknown Enrolled in day

treatment

program for

developmental

and behavioral

health needs

52 % moved to less

restrictive setting;

16 % remained in

day program; 19 %

moved to more

restrictive setting;

16 % lost to

follow-up

19 months: weekly

individual therapy,

twice weekly

multifamily skills

group (when family

available), telephone

coaching, consultation

team, adaptations for

intellectual disabilities

(e.g., concrete and

simplified language

and handouts)

Adolescents

demonstrated

increased DBT skills

use, ability to identify

maladaptive emotions,

thoughts, actions;

significant correlation

between problem

behaviors (e.g., argued,

tried to avoid work,

tried to hurt self or

others, attempted

suicide), negative

thoughts, negative

feelings with month

(i.e., as number of

months in program

increased number of

problem behaviors,

negative thoughts,

negative feelings

decreased)

DBT dialectical behavior therapy, TAU treatment as usual, F female, N/A not applicable, NSSI non-suicidal self-injury, STM standard therapeutic milieu

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80 65

123

noncompliance or behaviors interfering with treatment,

followed by Axis I disorders or other life problems, and

finally followed by skill building. Strategies for addressing

problem behaviors are described below.

Clients also participate in weekly group skills training.

Groups are conducted with a primary and coleader and range

from 2 to 2.5 h, with the first half devoted to homework

review and the second half spent teaching new skills (i.e.,

mindfulness, distress tolerance, emotion regulation, inter-

personal effectiveness). Mindfulness involves finding the

synthesis between extremes by orienting to the truth in each

position. These skills also include focusing attention by

observing, describing, and participating in the present

moment without trying to change one’s present experience

and while assuming a nonjudgmental stance, focusing

awareness on one thing at a time, and developing effective-

ness (i.e., doing what is needed to achieve one’s goals).

Mindfulness skills are central to DBT and thus are woven

throughout the other skills modules. Distress tolerance tea-

ches impulse control, distracting, and self-soothing strate-

gies for tolerating aversive contexts, surviving crises, and

radically accepting situations that cannot be changed without

resorting to dysfunctional behavior. Emotion regulation

teaches methods for identifying and describing emotions,

determining whether an emotion is justified by current cir-

cumstances, modulating emotions via acting opposite to the

emotion or problem solving, reducing vulnerability to

unwanted negative emotions, and increasing experience of

positive emotions. Finally, interpersonal effectiveness tea-

ches assertiveness skills aimed to help clients achieve their

objectives in interpersonal interactions while also main-

taining positive relationships and their self-respect. These

skills are taught over 6 months and then repeated. Following

the treatment hierarchy, group skills training targets: ther-

apy-destroying behaviors; skills acquisition, strengthening,

and generalization; and therapy-interfering behaviors.

Clients are encouraged to use as-needed telephone

coaching calls if they are experiencing suicide or self-

injurious urges, if they need help utilizing a skill or do not

know what skill to use, or if there is a rupture in the

therapeutic relationship. These calls are typically of short

duration (5–15 min) and consist of the therapist quickly

assessing the client’s problem and helping to identify the

most effective skill to use in the current situation. How-

ever, clients are prohibited from calling the therapist within

24 h of suicide or self-injurious behaviors in order to avoid

inadvertent reinforcement via therapist attention and

because the client has already used a strategy to relieve

distress (albeit maladaptive) instead of seeking assistance

from the therapist in identifying an adaptive skill. Clients

may call during this 24-h period to receive coaching for

medical attention and/or if the client is having urges to self-

harm again.

Lastly, weekly therapist consultation team meetings

(1–2 h) hold therapists within the therapeutic frame, bal-

ance therapists’ interactions with clients, address problems

that arise in treatment, increase adherence to DBT princi-

ples, and increase therapists’ motivation and capabilities in

delivering DBT. During consultation team, mindfulness is

first practiced and then an agenda is set according to the

aforementioned target hierarchy and therapists’ needs (i.e.,

help with individual clients or support when feeling burned

out). Together, these treatment modalities (i.e., individual

therapy, group skills training, telephone coaching, consul-

tation team meetings) aim to reduce clients’ dysfunctional

behaviors in the presence of dysregulated emotion.

Finally, specific treatment strategies are used within the

four modes of treatment to achieve the functions and tar-

gets outlined in DBT (Robins and Rosenthal 2011). Dia-

lectical strategies foster change by highlighting opposing

viewpoints and simultaneously looking for truth in each

perspective. A dialectical therapeutic relationship is con-

stantly balancing acceptance and change, flexibility and

stability, nurturing and challenging, and a focus on capa-

bilities and deficits, with the goal of achieving syntheses.

Dialectical strategies also target behavioral extremes and

rigidity and highlight contradictions in the client’s thoughts

or behavior by offering alternative viewpoints, encouraging

synthesis between opposing perspectives, and promoting

dialectical thinking and acting. Validation strategies

involve the therapist’s acceptance of the client and serve to

communicate to the client that his or her responses make

sense within the current context or are what would be

expected of almost anyone in a given situation (Linehan

1997). Stylistic strategies refer to style and form of thera-

pist interaction and include both reciprocal (e.g., responsive,

genuine) and irreverent (e.g., matter-of-fact, unexpected)

communication. Together, dialectical and stylistic strategies

produce the movement, speed, and flow characteristic of

therapist–client interactions in DBT.

Problem-solving strategies are the primary change

strategies in DBT and involve first understanding and

labeling a selected problem behavior (e.g., suicide behav-

iors, self-injury) via a behavioral chain analysis that iden-

tifies vulnerabilities, events, thoughts, feelings, sensations,

and behaviors that led up to the problem behavior, as well

as consequences of the behavior. Subsequently, a solution

analysis is conducted to identify points of intervention that

would disrupt the chain of events and prevent the problem

behavior from recurring, with emphasis on rehearsal and

troubleshooting. DBT has four sets of change procedures:

skills training, contingency management, exposure strate-

gies, and cognitive modification. Skills training teaches the

client new skills. Contingency management provides a

consequence that influences the probability of a client’s

behavior occurring again. Exposure provides non-

66 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

reinforced exposure to cues associated previously, but not

currently, with a threat. Cognitive modification changes the

client’s dysfunctional assumptions or beliefs. Finally, when

problems in the client’s environment interfere with func-

tioning or progress, the therapist employs case manage-

ment strategies by either consulting with the client on how

to interact effectively with the environment or intervening

directly when the environmental contingencies are very

powerful. Collectively, these treatment functions, modes,

and strategies aim to reduce problematic behaviors asso-

ciated with dysregulated emotions while shaping and

reinforcing more effective, adaptive behaviors. For a

review of DBT in clinical practice, see Dimeff and Koerner

(2007) and Rizvi et al. (2012).

Empirical Outcomes

Numerous randomized controlled trials (RCTs) with

adults have demonstrated DBT’s efficacy in treating BPD

and a range of other psychiatric disorders across various

settings. Reviewed below are RCTs of DBT for adults,

empirical findings from these studies, and proposed

mechanisms of change. To date, standard outpatient DBT

(including all four modes of therapy) for adults with BPD

has been evaluated in nine RCTs, three of which included

adults with BPD plus substance use disorders. Five RCTs

compared DBT with treatment as usual (TAU; Carter

et al. 2010; Koons et al. 2001; Linehan et al. 1991, 1999;

Verheul et al. 2003), while four RCTs compared DBT

with active treatments (Clarkin et al. 2007; Linehan et al.

2002, 2006; McMain et al. 2009). Active comparison

treatments included comprehensive validation with

12-step (Linehan et al. 2002), community treatment by

experts (primarily psychodynamic treatment; Linehan

et al. 2006), transference-focused therapy or supportive

treatment (Clarkin et al. 2007), and general psychiatric

management (psychodynamic treatment plus medication

management; McMain et al. 2009). A recent meta-anal-

ysis including eight RCTs and eight non-RCTs also

examined the efficacy of standard DBT for adults with

BPD (Kliem et al. 2010).

Two recent RCTs of DBT utilized broader inclusion

criteria than BPD diagnosis. One RCT evaluated DBT

versus TAU in an outpatient publicly funded service setting

for adults with any cluster B personality disorder (i.e.,

borderline, antisocial, narcissistic, histrionic; Feigenbaum

et al. 2012). The other RCT evaluated DBT versus opti-

mized TAU (supervision provided by non-cognitive

behavioral expert) in a college counseling center for stu-

dents who were suicidal, reported at least one lifetime

NSSI or suicide attempt, and endorsed three or more BPD

symptoms (Pistorello et al. 2012).

DBT for adults with BPD has also been evaluated

adjunctive to medication (Linehan et al. 2008; Simpson

et al. 2004; Soler et al. 2005). Though these studies were

RCTs, all participants received DBT and only the medi-

cation condition (active medication versus placebo) dif-

fered between groups.

Nine additional RCTs evaluated adapted DBT for adults

with depression, eating disorders (EDs), attention-deficit/

hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), and BD. Rationale for use

of DBT with these disorders rests in the common under-

lying dysfunction in emotion regulation (Kring and Sloan

2010). Two RCTs evaluated DBT plus antidepressant

medication versus antidepressant medication alone for

depressed older adults (Lynch et al. 2003) and depressed

older adults with at least one comorbid personality disorder

(Lynch et al. 2007a). DBT in these studies consisted of

group skills training and telephone coaching (Lynch et al.

2003) or individual therapy and group skills training

(Lynch et al. 2007a). One RCT for treatment-resistant

depression evaluated DBT group skills training versus

waitlist control (WLC; Harley et al. 2008). Two RCTs for

BED evaluated DBT group skills training versus WLC

(Telch et al. 2001) or an active group therapy comparison

(Safer et al. 2010). Two RCTs evaluated individual DBT

(with some skills training review) versus WLC for BN

(Safer et al. 2001) and binge eating and purging episodes

(Hill et al. 2011). One RCT for ADHD evaluated DBT

group skills training versus structured group discussion

control (Hirvikoski et al. 2011). Lastly, one RCT for BD

evaluated DBT group skills training versus WLC (Van Dijk

et al. 2012).

In addition to outpatient settings, where most of the

aforementioned RCTs were conducted, DBT has been

successfully implemented with adults in inpatient units

(e.g., Bohus et al. 2000, 2004; Kröger et al. 2006, 2010),

community mental health centers (e.g., Comtois et al.

2007; Pasieczny and Connor 2011; Prendergast and

McCausland 2007), and forensic settings (e.g., Berzins and

Trestman 2004; Bradley and Follingstad 2003; Evershed

et al. 2003). However, these studies were not RCTs.

Results from RCTs cumulatively suggest that partici-

pation in DBT is associated with: reduced frequency and

severity of suicide behavior and/or NSSI (Carter et al.

2010; Clarkin et al. 2007; Feigenbaum et al. 2012; Koons

et al. 2001; Linehan et al. 1991, 1993, 1999, 2006, 2008;

McMain et al. 2009, 2012; Pistorello et al. 2012; van den

Bosch et al. 2002, 2005; Verheul et al. 2003) and suicide

ideation (Koons et al. 2001; Linehan et al. 2006); decreased

BPD symptoms (McMain et al. 2009, 2012; Pistorello et al.

2012), substance abuse/dependence (Harned et al. 2008;

Linehan et al. 1999, 2002; van den Bosch et al. 2005), ED

symptoms (Hill et al. 2011; Safer et al. 2001, 2010; Telch

et al. 2001), ADHD symptoms (Hirvikoski et al. 2011),

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80 67

123

hopelessness (Koons et al. 2001), depression (Clarkin et al.

2007; Feigenbaum et al. 2012; Harley et al. 2008; Koons

et al. 2001; Linehan et al. 2006, 2008; Lynch et al. 2003,

2007a; McMain et al. 2009, 2012; Pistorello et al. 2012;

Simpson et al. 2004; Soler et al. 2005; Van Dijk et al.

2012), anger/irritability (Feigenbaum et al. 2012; Koons

et al. 2001; Linehan et al. 1993, 1994, 1999, 2008; McMain

et al. 2009, 2012), aggression (Linehan et al. 2008; Soler

et al. 2005), and affective control (Van Dijk et al. 2012);

reduced health service utilization and/or inpatient psychi-

atric days (Carter et al. 2010; Koons et al. 2001; Linehan

et al. 1991, 1993, 2006; McMain et al. 2009, 2012; Van

Dijk et al. 2012); and improved social and global adjust-

ment (Clarkin et al. 2007; Feigenbaum et al. 2012; Linehan

et al. 1993, 1994, 1999; Pistorello et al. 2012; Simpson

et al. 2004), treatment retention (Linehan et al. 1991, 1999,

2006; Safer et al. 2010; van den Bosch et al. 2002; Verheul

et al. 2003), quality of life (Carter et al. 2010; McMain

et al. 2009, 2012), and interpersonal functioning (McMain

et al. 2009, 2012).

While all RCTs demonstrated DBT improved emotional

and behavioral symptoms following treatment, some

studies conducted by researchers not affiliated with the

treatment developers (e.g., Carter et al. 2010; Feigenbaum

et al. 2012) and studies that compared DBT with active

treatments (especially treatments specifically designed for

individuals with BPD: Clarkin et al. 2007; McMain et al.

2009, 2012) did not always yield significant between-group

differences. Results from the meta-analysis of standard

DBT for adults with BPD by Kliem et al. (2010) also found

good treatment retention (27.3 % drop-out rate), a moder-

ate global effect size, and a moderate effect size for suicide

and self-injurious behaviors. However, this effect size

decreased to small when DBT was compared with BPD-

specific treatments, and a small reduction in effects was

shown at follow-ups. Thus, numerous studies of DBT for

BPD and other psychiatric disorders in various settings

have yielded positive results and suggest efficacy in

improving various emotional and behavioral symptoms in

adults, though not always to a significantly greater degree

than active treatments.

Though growing evidence supports the efficacy of DBT

for various adult psychiatric disorders, mechanisms of

change and necessary components linked with clinical

improvements are not well understood (Robins and Chap-

man 2004). As aforementioned, most RCTs have evaluated

the efficacy of standard DBT for BPD. However, a recent

RCT demonstrated efficacy of 3 months of DBT group

skills training alone versus psychodynamic-oriented group

skills training control among adults with BPD (Soler et al.

2009). Other RCTs have demonstrated efficacy of group

skills training alone among adults with depression (Harley

et al. 2008; Lynch et al. 2003), BED (Safer et al. 2010;

Telch et al. 2001), ADHD (Hirvikoski et al. 2011), and BD

(Van Dijk et al. 2012). In addition, a recent examination of

mediators in three RCTs of DBT for BPD revealed that

DBT skills fully mediated the decrease in suicide attempts

and depression and the increase in control of anger over

time (Neacsiu et al. 2010). DBT skills also partially med-

iated the decrease in NSSI over time. Efficacy of DBT

group skills training in aforementioned studies supports a

skills deficit model of these psychiatric disorders.

However, some RCTs that evaluated adapted DBT for

other psychiatric disorders found support for individual

therapy alone (with some skills training review) among

adults with BN (Safer et al. 2001) and binge eating and

purging episodes (Hill et al. 2011). In addition, a recent

non-RCT found similar positive outcomes among adults

with BPD who received 1 year of standard DBT versus

individual DBT (with incorporated skills training; Andión

et al. 2012). The role of the therapeutic relationship in DBT

has recently been examined using data from a previous

RCT (Linehan et al. 2006). Specifically, relative to com-

munity treatment by experts, DBT participants developed

significantly greater self-affirmation, self-love, self-pro-

tection, and less self-attack (Bedics et al. 2012a). In addi-

tion, DBT participants who perceived their therapist as

affirming and protecting reported less frequent NSSI.

Support has also been demonstrated for therapists’ bal-

ancing of autonomy and control, maintaining a non-

pejorative stance, and using warmth and autonomy (Bedics

et al. 2012b). These studies support the importance of

individual therapy components in DBT (e.g., behavior

therapy strategies, combination of acceptance and change

interventions, dialectical strategies, nonjudgmental

assumptions about patients) and the quality of the thera-

peutic relationship in ensuring positive clinical outcomes.

Thus, while additional research is needed to examine the

utility of specific treatment modes and strategies and their

role in the efficacy of DBT, results from RCTs support the

use standard DBT for adults with BPD, with growing

evidence for adaptations of DBT for other psychiatric

disorders.

Dialectical Behavior Therapy for Adolescents

Given positive outcomes with adults, recent research has

adapted and evaluated DBT for adolescents. The follow-

ing section reviews the theoretical underpinnings

informing use of DBT with adolescents, summarizes

treatment adaptations originally proposed by Miller et al.

(1997, 2007b), and concludes with a review of empirical

studies of DBT for adolescents. Limitations of current

studies and considerations for future research are also

discussed.

68 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

Theory

As reviewed above, DBT has been found to be efficacious

for adults with BPD (www.div12.org/Psychological

Treatments/treatments/bpd_dbt.html). Thus, adaptation of

DBT for adolescents with BPD symptoms or diagnosis may

be warranted and beneficial. Though most evaluations of

DBT for adolescents have included youth with BPD fea-

tures, other studies have targeted youth with various psy-

chiatric disorders (i.e., mood disorders, externalizing

disorders, EDs, TTM) and problem behaviors (i.e., suicide

ideation and behavior, NSSI) across several settings (i.e.,

outpatient, day program, inpatient, residential, correctional

facility). The rationale for using DBT with these adoles-

cents rests in the common underlying dysfunction in

emotion regulation among the aforementioned disorders

and problem behaviors.

Most adolescent DBT studies targeted youth with BPD

features (Fleischhaker et al. 2011; James et al. 2008, 2011;

Miller et al. 2000; Rathus and Miller 2002; Woodberry and

Popenoe 2008). Though somewhat controversial, research

suggests that the prevalence, reliability, and validity of

BPD diagnoses in adolescent samples are largely compa-

rable to those found among adult samples (Miller et al.

2008). Adolescents with BPD present with similar symp-

toms and functional impairment as adults with BPD

(Becker et al. 2002; Chanen et al. 2007). However,

research on the stability of BPD over time is mixed. While

for some severely affected adolescents the diagnosis of

BPD remains stable over time, a less severe subgroup of

youth moves in and out of diagnosis (Miller et al. 2008).

These findings are consistent with research suggesting that

BPD diagnostic status in adults is not particularly stable

(Zanarini et al. 2010). Symptoms related to temperament,

such as abandonment fears, have higher positive predictive

power when making the diagnosis of BPD in adolescents

(Becker et al. 2002) and also endure longer than other BPD

symptoms (e.g., those related to impulsivity) in adult

samples (Zanarini et al. 2007). Thus, research indicates that

the diagnosis of BPD in adolescents is comparable in terms

of symptom constellation, functional impairment, and

temporal stability to the diagnosis when made in adult

samples. Therefore, adaptation of DBT, an evidence-based

treatment for adults with BPD, for adolescents who exhibit

BPD features or diagnosis is a logical extension.

Although most empirical studies of DBT have included

adults with BPD, DBT was originally developed to treat

suicide-related behavior and extreme emotional and

behavioral dysregulation (Robins and Rosenthal 2011). As

such, within the DBT framework, BPD is conceptualized

primarily as a disorder of emotion regulation. Problematic

behaviors are viewed as efforts to regulate extreme emo-

tions or consequences of failed emotion regulation

(Linehan 1993a). Given that adolescents can also present

with similar dysregulated emotions and problematic

behaviors, and emotion dysregulation has been linked with

the development of various forms of psychopathology in

adolescents (McLaughlin et al. 2011), extension of DBT to

a broader group of adolescents (as opposed to just those

with BPD) may be warranted.

All of the behaviors and disorders that have been tar-

geted in studies of DBT for adolescents can be conceptu-

alized by poor emotion regulation. For example, all

evaluations of adolescents with BPD features (Fleischhaker

et al. 2011; James et al. 2008, 2011; Miller et al. 2000;

Rathus and Miller 2002; Woodberry and Popenoe 2008)

and one study of hospitalized adolescents (Katz et al. 2004)

also incorporated suicide ideation, suicide behavior, and/or

NSSI as study inclusion criteria. Indeed, suicide ideation

(Orbach et al. 2007), suicide behavior (Tamás et al. 2007;

Zlotnick et al. 1997), and NSSI (Adrian et al. 2011; Nock

and Prinstein 2004; Nock et al. 2009) have been shown to

be related to emotion dysregulation in youth. For example,

the most common self-reported reasons for adolescent

NSSI are automatic positive reinforcement (i.e., to create a

desirable physiological state) and automatic negative

reinforcement (i.e., to escape from an averse physiological

state; Nock and Prinstein 2004; Nock et al. 2009). In

addition, the automatic negative reinforcement function of

NSSI has been associated with a history of suicide attempts

in adolescents (Nock and Prinstein 2005), thus supporting

an emotion regulation function of suicide ideation, suicide

behavior, and NSSI in adolescents.

Adaptations of DBT for youth with ODD (Nelson-Gray

et al. 2006), BD (Goldstein et al. 2007), BED (Safer et al.

2007), AN (Salbach-Andrae et al. 2008), BN (Salbach-

Andrae et al. 2008), and TTM (Welch and Kim 2012) can

also be tied to a common underlying dysfunction in emo-

tion regulation. For example, the diagnostic criteria for

ODD include emotion dysregulation (e.g., often loses

temper, spiteful and vindictive), interpersonal difficulties

(e.g., argues with adults, annoys others on purpose), and

poor distress tolerance (e.g., easily annoyed, angry and

resentful; Nelson-Gray et al. 2006). In addition, early

emotion dysregulation has been linked with the develop-

ment of ODD (Stingaris et al. 2010), while recent research

suggests that early ADHD and ODD symptoms predict

subsequent development of BPD symptoms (Burke and

Stepp 2012; Stepp et al. 2012). Similarly, research posits

that the core feature of adolescent BD is emotion dysreg-

ulation (Carlson and Meyer 2006; Dickstein and Leibenluft

2006; Leibenluft et al. 2003). In addition, BD in adoles-

cents is associated with suicide behavior (Goldstein et al.

2005), NSSI (Esposito-Smythers et al. 2010), interpersonal

deficits (Goldstein et al. 2006), and treatment noncompli-

ance (Coletti et al. 2005), all of which are DBT targets, and

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80 69

123

DBT has been successfully implemented with adults with

BD in a recent RCT with promising results (Van Dijk et al.

2012). Thus, both ODD and BD in adolescents are asso-

ciated with dysfunction in emotion regulation as well as

other problem behaviors targeted in and responsive to

DBT.

Emotion dysregulation has also been linked to EDs and

TTM. Regarding EDs, an adapted biosocial theory posits

that EDs develop through transaction between an invali-

dating environment and a biological vulnerability to reg-

ulating emotions and/or to the hunger/satiety system

(Wisniewski and Kelly 2003; Wisniewski et al. 2007). ED

behaviors (bingeing, purging, restricting) are viewed as

behavioral attempts to avoid painful emotions, in the case

of AN, or change painful emotions, in the case of BED and

BN. Some empirical evidence also supports the role of

emotion dysregulation in ED symptoms in youth (Sim and

Zeman 2005). In addition, adolescents with EDs commonly

present with suicide ideation, suicide behavior, and NSSI,

which are targets in DBT (Bjarehed and Lundh 2008;

Peebles et al. 2011; Ruuska et al. 2005). Also, DBT has

been adapted for adults with EDs and demonstrated posi-

tive results in RCTs (Hill et al. 2011; Safer et al. 2001,

2010; Telch et al. 2001). Regarding TTM, research with

adults and youth indicates hair pulling is automatic/habit-

ual or functions to regulate emotions, with the latter cued

by negative emotions, intense thoughts or urges, or

attempts to create symmetry (Christenson and Mackenzie

1994; Diefenbach et al. 2008; Flessner et al. 2007, 2008,

2009; Shusterman et al. 2009). Also, DBT has been

adapted for adults with TTM and demonstrated promising

results in a case study (Keuthen and Spirch 2012) and open

trial (Keuthen et al. 2010, 2011). Thus, EDs and TTM in

adolescents are associated with emotion dysregulation and

problem behaviors targeted in DBT, and studies of DBT for

adults with EDs and TTM demonstrated positive findings.

Some researchers have investigated DBT for adoles-

cents in particular settings with a transdiagnostic focus

rather than targeting certain psychiatric disorders or

behavioral problems. Specifically, DBT has been imple-

mented with youth in correctional facilities (Shelton et al.

2011; Trupin et al. 2002), residential treatment facilities

(Sunseri 2004; Wasser et al. 2008), long-term inpatient

units (McDonell et al. 2010), and day treatment programs

(Charlton and Dykstra 2011). Again, rationale for using

DBT with these adolescents is based on the underlying

dysfunction in behavioral and emotional regulation. Youth

who participated in DBT in aforementioned studies pre-

sented with a number of psychiatric diagnoses (e.g., BPD,

substance abuse/dependence, EDs, mood disorders, post-

traumatic stress disorder, ADHD, ODD, conduct disorder)

and impairing behaviors (e.g., suicide ideation and

behavior, NSSI, aggression, impulsivity, disruptive

behavior, running away). Therefore, DBT in these settings

is applied transdiagnostically with the aim of reducing the

myriad symptoms related to behavioral and emotional

dysregulation and that have demonstrated improvement in

adult RCTs of DBT.

Thus, DBT has been adapted for adolescents with BPD,

suicide ideation and behavior, NSSI, ODD, BD, EDs, and

TTM. DBT has also been implemented in diverse settings

with youth who present with varied psychiatric and

behavioral impairment. Rationale for initiating DBT with

these adolescents rests in the common problems in emotion

regulation. Linehan (1993a) conceptualized BPD as a dis-

order of emotion regulation in the initial development of

the treatment, and as such, DBT is comprehensive and

flexible in a way that allows for use with clients presenting

with varied diagnoses, in diverse settings, across a rela-

tively larger age range.

Treatment Adaptations

Miller et al. (1997, 2007b) were the first to propose

adaptations of DBT for adolescents and subsequently

developed a treatment manual. Their adaptations targeted

youth exhibiting suicide ideation and behavior, NSSI, and

BPD features. Subsequent adaptations for other adolescent

presenting problems are modeled after and closely resem-

ble the Miller et al. (2007b) manual. DBT for adolescents

generally follows the same format as standard DBT,

including theoretical framework, functions, treatment tar-

gets, treatment modes, and strategies (Klein and Miller

2011). However, Miller et al. (2007b) introduced modifi-

cations to make DBT more developmentally appropriate

for adolescents and their families. The following summary

provides an overview of the adaptations to DBT for ado-

lescents, as delineated in the DBT manual for suicidal

adolescents by Miller et al. (2007b).

DBT for adolescents includes seven main adaptations of

standard DBT. First, family members, usually parents, are

included in multifamily skills training groups to enhance

generalization and reinforcement of skills and structure

adolescents’ environments (Miller et al. 2007a). In this

way, parents can serve as models and coaches for their

adolescents by utilizing and implementing skills. Parental

participation in skills training is designed to provide a

common vocabulary for therapeutic techniques within

families and enhance parents’ ability to provide validation,

support, and effective parenting. Including family members

in skills groups also offers the added benefits of providing

in vivo opportunities to role play skills, fostering inter-

family support, reducing adolescents’ disruptive behaviors

in group, and enhancing treatment compliance. Family

members may also receive telephone coaching and con-

sultation from the skills group therapist for skills

70 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

generalization, while adolescents receive telephone

coaching from the primary individual therapist (Steinberg

et al. 2011).

Second, family therapy sessions are conducted on an

as-needed basis. Although individual sessions with sig-

nificant others are incorporated into standard DBT for

adults, adapted DBT for adolescents focuses more

explicitly on this mode of treatment (Miller et al. 2002;

Woodberry et al. 2002). Family therapy sessions were

added because much of the turmoil in the lives of suicidal

adolescents involves their primary support system. Family

sessions are conducted when the relationship with a

family member is a central source of conflict or when a

crisis erupts within the family. The therapist may also

initiate family sessions if the treatment would be

enhanced by educating family members about particular

skills or aspects of treatment or if contingencies in the

home are too powerful for the adolescent to ignore and

continue to reinforce dysfunctional behavior. Goals of

family sessions include preparing the adolescent for

family interactions, increasing parental understanding of

adolescent’s emotional vulnerability, addressing parents’

own emotion dysregulation, improving familial commu-

nication, modifying contingencies in the familial envi-

ronment, and crisis management. Typically, selected

family members will attend 3 to 4 sessions out of the

adolescent’s 16 weeks of individual therapy, though more

or fewer sessions can be scheduled as needed.

A third adaptation involves the development and

teaching of three adolescent–family dialectical dilemmas

(Rathus and Miller 2000). Similar to the original dialectical

dilemmas proposed by Linehan (1993a), these adolescent–

family dialectical dilemmas are considered secondary

behavioral targets in DBT. The first dialectical dilemma,

excessive leniency versus authoritarian control, involves

placing too few behavioral demands or limits on the ado-

lescent, or being excessively permissive, versus enacting

coercive parenting methods limiting freedom, autonomy,

and independence. Normalizing pathological behaviors

versus pathologizing normative behaviors, the second

dialectical dilemma, involves viewing developmentally

normal adolescent behaviors as deviant versus failing to

address or perceive deviant adolescent behaviors as such.

Lastly, forcing autonomy versus fostering dependence

involves acting in ways that inhibit an adolescent’s

autonomy (e.g., excessive caretaking, overreliance on

parents) versus parents’ severing ties with the adolescent

such that he or she is prematurely forced to separate and

become self-sufficient. Adolescents and families tend to

vacillate between these polarities, causing extreme distress.

Thus, the central dilemma of treatment is to help adoles-

cents and parents move to a balanced position representing

synthesis.

Fourth, the treatment length was reduced from 1 year to

16 weeks. This may be the biggest change from standard

DBT because the time in treatment is significantly reduced

but the content (e.g., dialectical dilemmas, skills training

modules) is increased. According to Miller et al. (2007b),

treatment length was modified so it would be more

appealing to adolescents, given that suicidal adolescents

tend to complete only a limited number of therapy sessions.

For example, up to 77 % of adolescents who attempt sui-

cide do not attend therapy appointments or fail to complete

treatment (Trautman et al. 1993). Also, Miller et al.

(2007b) aimed to offer a brief treatment because they were

including many clients with first-time NSSI or suicide

attempts, many of whom did not meet full criteria for BPD.

Thus, they believed they could treat many of these ado-

lescents with a short-term treatment and offer optional

additional therapy (i.e., a graduate group or repeat of first

phase of treatment) for those who continued to exhibit

behavioral dyscontrol. Treatment length was also reduced

for pragmatic concerns so that clients who could not afford

extended therapy could still receive meaningful treatment,

which was in line with the current healthcare climate (e.g.,

acceptable to insurance companies).

A fifth adaptation, also involving the structure of DBT,

is a second phase of treatment: a 16 week optional graduate

group (with other treatment modes utilized as needed) for

clients who continue to exhibit difficulties following the

first phase of therapy (Miller et al. 2007a). Youth may

repeat the graduate group as many times as necessary in

order to achieve their identified goals. Both phases of

treatment address only the DBT stage one targets of

reducing life-threatening behaviors, reducing therapy-

interfering behaviors, reducing quality-of-life-interfering

behaviors, and increasing behavioral skills. The graduate

group is designed to address the DBT treatment functions

of improving capabilities, improving motivation, and pro-

moting generalization of skills, but in a way that requires

less intensive adolescent participation and fewer program

resources. The goal of the graduate group is to reinforce

and generalize skills previously taught. Group sessions

involve adolescents reviewing and teaching skills to peers

and consulting and problem solving with group members to

foster peer coaching and support rather than reliance on the

therapist. During this phase, the therapist consultation team

also continues, addressing the functions of treating the

therapist and structuring the environment as needed.

Continuing treatment in a separate, second phase with

reduced intensity allows for clients to feel an increased

sense of mastery without removing structural resources that

may be helping to maintain progress. Further, increasing

the length of treatment with a graduate group offers ado-

lescent clients the opportunity to use the skills that they

learned in the first stage of treatment to broaden treatment

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80 71

123

goals once skills acquisition has occurred. Importantly, this

two-stage approach allows for reallocating staff resources

to ensure that therapists are available for more intensive

treatment of new clients who are beginning DBT.

Sixth, the number of skills taught within each module

was slightly reduced and a fifth adolescent-specific skills

module was added. Most of the original DBT skills were

maintained because there is no theoretical or empirical

basis for which skills to include or eliminate. In addition to

the four original DBT skills modules (i.e., mindfulness,

interpersonal effectiveness, emotion regulation, distress

tolerance), a fifth skills module, walking the middle path,

was developed for adolescents and their families. This

module teaches validation of self and others, behavioral

principles (i.e., how to reinforce, extinguish, punish, and

shape behavior), and three adolescent–family dialectical

dilemmas (described above) with the goal of finding the

middle path, or balanced synthesis, in each dilemma. The

dialectical dilemmas are introduced in the multifamily

skills training groups and are targeted in individual and

family therapy sessions.

Lastly, group skills handouts were modified to improve

their appeal and applicability to adolescents. Modifications

include simplification of terminology, streamlined language,

simplification of visual layout to decrease visual overstim-

ulation (via reduced amount of variability in font size, bold

print, underlining, and italicizing), and addition of adoles-

cent-geared graphics. Other important modifications when

teaching skills include adapting examples of each skill to

make them more applicable to adolescents and utilizing more

experiential and in vivo, rather than didactic, methods.

Thus, DBT for adolescents is based on the same theo-

retical underpinnings and generally follows the same

framework, including functions of treatment, targets,

modes, and strategies, as standard DBT for adults. How-

ever, adaptations involving inclusion of family members in

skills training, addition of family therapy sessions, devel-

opment of new adolescent–family dialectical dilemmas,

reduction of treatment length, addition of an optional

graduate group, implementation of a new skills module,

and modifications to handouts and delivery of content in

skills groups make DBT more applicable and appealing to

adolescents and their families.

Empirical Outcomes

To date, DBT for adolescents has been evaluated in 18

studies published in English-language journals. First, six

studies that targeted youth with BPD features plus suicide

ideation, suicide behavior, and/or NSSI (Fleischhaker et al.

2011; James et al. 2008, 2011; Miller et al. 2000; Rathus

and Miller 2002; Woodberry and Popenoe 2008) and one

study that targeted adolescents hospitalized for suicide

ideation or attempt (Katz et al. 2004) are reviewed. Then,

five studies that adapted DBT for other diagnoses associ-

ated with emotion dysregulation are summarized; specifi-

cally, one study each of youth with ODD (Nelson-Gray

et al. 2006), BD (Goldstein et al. 2007), BED (Safer et al.

2007), both AN and BN (Salbach-Andrae et al. 2008), and

TTM (Welch and Kim 2012). Lastly, six studies that

investigated DBT for adolescents in diverse settings rather

than with specific psychiatric or behavioral problems are

reviewed; including, correctional facilities (Shelton et al.

2011; Trupin et al. 2002), residential treatment centers

(Sunseri 2004; Wasser et al. 2008), long-term inpatient

units (McDonell et al. 2010), and day treatment programs

(Charlton and Dykstra 2011). See also Groves et al. (2012)

for a review of the adolescent DBT outcome literature

through 2008. The review concludes with a discussion of

limitations of current research and considerations for future

directions.

Five open trials of DBT for adolescents with BPD

symptoms plus suicide ideation, suicide behavior, and/or

NSSI demonstrated positive results (Fleischhaker et al. 2011;

James et al. 2008, 2011; Miller et al. 2000; Woodberry and

Popenoe 2008; see Table 1). These studies were conducted

predominantly with females in outpatient or community

clinic settings and most closely followed the DBT for ado-

lescents manual (including all four modes of standard DBT

plus family involvement; Miller et al. 2007b), aside from

variations in treatment length (ranging from 12 weeks

to 1 year). Results indicated improvements in suicide idea-

tion (Woodberry and Popenoe 2008), suicide behavior

(Fleischhaker et al. 2011), NSSI (Fleischhaker et al. 2011;

James et al. 2008, 2011), thoughts of NSSI (Woodberry and

Popenoe 2008), BPD symptoms (Fleischhaker et al. 2011;

Miller et al. 2000), depressive symptoms (James et al. 2008,

2011; Woodberry and Popenoe 2008), hopelessness (James

et al. 2008, 2011), dissociative symptoms (Woodberry and

Popenoe 2008), anger (Woodberry and Popenoe 2008),

overall psychiatric symptoms (Fleischhaker et al. 2011;

Woodberry and Popenoe 2008), general functioning (James

et al. 2008, 2011; Woodberry and Popenoe 2008), and psy-

chosocial adjustment (Fleischhaker et al. 2011). High com-

pletion rates were also reported (63–87.5 %), and in one

study, adolescents rated all skills moderately to extremely

helpful (Miller et al. 2000). Two studies demonstrated

maintenance of gains over 8-month (James et al. 2008)

and 1-year (Fleischhaker et al. 2011) follow-ups. Interest-

ingly, Woodberry and Popenoe (2008) also found signifi-

cant posttreatment improvement in parents’ depressive

symptoms.

Similarly, two quasi-experimental studies (i.e., lacking

random assignment) indicated improvement following

DBT when compared with TAU (psychodynamic psycho-

therapy) for mostly female adolescents with BPD features

72 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

plus suicide ideation or recent suicide attempt (Rathus and

Miller 2002) and adolescents hospitalized on an inpatient

unit for suicide ideation or attempt (Katz et al. 2004; see

Table 1). Rathus and Miller (2002) implemented DBT in

an outpatient setting and closely followed the Miller et al.

(2007b) manual; however, Katz et al. (2004) made adap-

tations to frequency of treatment modes to make DBT more

applicable on an inpatient unit (also, telephone coaching

was not used). Rathus and Miller (2002) found adolescents

who received 12 weeks of DBT demonstrated significantly

fewer psychiatric hospitalizations (0 versus 13 %) and

higher treatment completion (62 versus 40 %) compared

with TAU, despite youth in the DBT group having sig-

nificantly more psychopathology at baseline (i.e., depres-

sive and substance use disorders and BPD). There were no

significant between-group differences in suicide attempts,

likely due to low occurrence in both groups (7.3 %),

though only one DBT participant made an attempt during

the study versus seven in TAU. DBT participants also

demonstrated significant reductions in suicide ideation,

depression, anxiety, general psychiatric symptoms, global

severity, and BPD symptoms posttreatment; however, these

were not measured in the TAU group and thus could not be

compared. Katz et al. (2004) found adolescents who

received 2 weeks of DBT demonstrated a significant

reduction in the number of incidents on the inpatient unit

(e.g., violence toward self and others) when compared to

TAU at posttreatment. In addition, there was a significant

reduction in total number of incidents on the unit when

comparing the 6-month period before and after DBT

implementation. Both groups also demonstrated significant

reductions in NSSI, depression, and suicide ideation over

1-year follow-up.

Studies of DBT for ODD, BD, EDs, and TTM in out-

patient settings similarly demonstrated promising results;

however, these adaptations deviated significantly from the

Miller et al. (2007b) manual and lacked control compari-

sons (see Table 2). An open trial of 16 weeks of adoles-

cent-only group skills training with adaptations to improve

compliance (e.g., pizza, financial incentives) for youth with

ODD (mostly males) found significant posttreatment

improvements in positive behaviors (i.e., interpersonal

strength), ODD and externalizing behaviors, depressive

symptoms, internalizing symptoms, and total problem

behaviors (Nelson-Gray et al. 2006). An open trial of

1 year of DBT for youth (mostly females) with BD con-

sisting of acute treatment and continuation phase with BD

adaptations (e.g., psychoeducation about BD) and indi-

vidual therapy, individual family skills training, and tele-

phone coaching demonstrated high completion and

satisfaction and significant improvements in suicide idea-

tion, emotion dysregulation, and depression, and nonsig-

nificant improvement in NSSI (Goldstein et al. 2007).

One case study and one case series of DBT for youth

with EDs and one case study of DBT for an adolescent with

TTM also provide support for DBT with these populations

(see Table 2). DBT for adolescents with EDs incorporated

adaptations, such as reviewing the DBT model of disor-

dered eating behaviors and their association with dysreg-

ulated emotions, providing nutrition psychoeducation,

dispelling myths about food, and addressing negative body

issues. A case study of a 16-year-old female with BED who

received 21 weeks of individual therapy (with incorporated

skills review), 4 family therapy sessions, and telephone

coaching demonstrated reduced frequency and severity of

binge episodes posttreatment and at 3-month follow-up

(Safer et al. 2007). A case series of 25 weeks of DBT for

females with AN or BN consisting of weekly individual

therapy and adolescent group skills training (parents

attended 8 groups), telephone coaching, and consultation

team meetings found high treatment completion and sig-

nificant posttreatment improvements in behavioral symp-

toms of eating disorders (i.e., restricting, bingeing,

purging) and general psychopathology; AN youth also

demonstrated significant improvement in body mass index

(Salbach-Andrae et al. 2008). A case study of 16 weeks of

DBT for a 15-year-old female with TTM consisting of

weekly individual therapy with parent check-ins, psycho-

education about TTM, self-monitoring, chain analyses,

habit reversal, stimulus control, relapse prevention, and

DBT skills (mindfulness, emotion regulation, distress tol-

erance) found improvements in hair pulling, emotion reg-

ulation, anxiety, and depression by posttreatment, with

slight worsening of hair pulling at follow-up (Welch and

Kim 2012).

Further lending support to the use of DBT with ado-

lescents are six studies that adapted and examined DBT for

youth in specific settings (i.e., correctional facilities, resi-

dential treatment centers, long-term inpatient units, day

treatment programs) rather than with particular psychiatric

or behavioral targets, though many of these youth pre-

sented with numerous and severe psychiatric and behav-

ioral problems (see Table 3). These studies used open

designs, uncontrolled groups, or examination of time

periods before and after DBT implementation. DBT

adaptations also significantly deviated from the DBT for

adolescents manual (Miller et al. 2007b). Two studies in

correctional facilities implemented adolescent-only group

skills training in either a pre–post design with TAU control

and all females over 10 months (Trupin et al. 2002) or an

open design with males over 16 weeks (Shelton et al.

2011). Results indicated improvements in: behavior prob-

lems (e.g., aggression, NSSI, classroom disruption) and

punitive responses (Trupin et al. 2002); and coping,

aggression, impulsive behaviors, negative affect, and self-

control (Shelton et al. 2011). Two studies in residential

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80 73

123

treatment facilities implemented either all four modes of

treatment over 29 months with females (compared

29 months before and after DBT implementation; Sunseri

2004) or individual therapy plus multifamily group skills

training over 17 weeks with mostly males and matched

standard therapeutic milieu control (STM; Wasser et al.

2008). Results demonstrated significant reductions in pre-

mature terminations due to self-harm or psychiatric hos-

pitalization (16.7 versus 0 %), number of days clients spent

in psychiatric hospitals due to NSSI (71 inpatient days

from 8 clients versus 42 inpatient days from 6 clients), and

duration of physical restraints and seclusions (median of

20 min versus 11 min) following implementation of DBT

(Sunseri 2004); and improvement in general psychiatric

symptoms, with DBT having a significantly greater impact

on depression and STM having a significantly greater

impact on psychomotor excitation (Wasser et al. 2008).

McDonell et al. (2010) compared youth receiving DBT

in a long-term inpatient unit to historical controls (who

received individual and family therapy as needed) over

1 year with three levels of DBT intensity (i.e., DBT milieu,

DBT milieu plus group skills training, or DBT milieu plus

group skills training and individual therapy) and found

significant improvement in global functioning and signifi-

cant reduction in number of medications, and significant

reduction in NSSI compared with control. Finally, exami-

nation of 19 months DBT adapted for youth with devel-

opmental and behavioral health needs in a day treatment

program (i.e., individual therapy, group skills training,

consultation team, telephone coaching, milieu behavior

management) found increased DBT skills use, ability to

identify maladaptive emotions, thoughts, and actions, and

significant correlation between problem behaviors (e.g.,

argued, tried to avoid work, tried to hurt self or others,

attempted suicide), negative thoughts, and negative feel-

ings with month (i.e., as number of months in DBT

increased number of problem behaviors, negative thoughts,

and negative feelings decreased; Charlton and Dykstra

2011). Collectively, findings from pre–post, uncontrolled,

and quasi-experimental studies examining DBT for ado-

lescents with a range of psychiatric disorders and problem

behaviors in various settings have yielded promising

results.

Limitations

Despite advances in research on DBT for adolescents,

significant limitations exist. First, although DBT was

originally adapted for adolescents with BPD features and

suicide ideation, suicide behavior, and/or NSSI, only five

open studies and one quasi-experimental trial have exam-

ined the efficacy of DBT for this population. One quasi-

experimental study also evaluated DBT for hospitalized

adolescents with suicide ideation or attempt. Open trials

lacked comparison groups; thus, it is possible that

improvements were due to nonspecific therapeutic factors,

uncontrolled medication use, passage of time, or other

factors unrelated to DBT. Quasi-experimental studies used

TAU control comparisons (psychodynamic psychotherapy)

but lacked random assignment. Thus, systematic differ-

ences between groups may have existed pretreatment and

affected outcome. Indeed, Rathus and Miller (2002) noted

youth who received DBT in their study presented with

significantly greater psychopathology than in the TAU

group.

Studies of DBT for youth with other psychiatric disor-

ders or in specific settings are promising but also have

limitations. First, trials of DBT for ODD and BD were

evaluated via open trials, while adaptations of DBT for

BED and TTM were evaluated in case studies, and DBT for

AN and BN was evaluated in a case series. Lack of com-

parison conditions in these trials limits the conclusions that

can be made about the efficacy of DBT for these disorders

(i.e., improvements may be due to factors unrelated to

DBT). Second, six studies that examined implementation

of DBT for adolescents in specific settings (i.e., correc-

tional facilities, residential treatment centers, long-term

inpatient units, day treatment programs) did not specify

diagnostic or behavioral inclusion criteria. Though these

youth presented with comorbid conditions and significant

impairment, this design creates a heterogeneous sample of

youth with a range of psychiatric and behavioral problems,

some of which may be more responsive to DBT than

others. Also, although four of these studies utilized com-

parison conditions (i.e., pre–post intervention records with

TAU comparison, matched samples across agencies, his-

torical controls, and time periods before and after DBT

implementation), groups were uncontrolled and random

assignment was not used; thus, systematic group differ-

ences may have affected outcome.

Other limitations common to most aforementioned

studies of DBT for adolescents included relatively small

sample sizes consisting mostly of females. Though

McDonell et al. (2010) included 210 youth in their examina-

tion of DBT in a long-term inpatient unit (n = 106) versus

historical controls (n = 104), among outpatient imple-

mentations of DBT with adolescents, which is the recom-

mended form of treatment delivery outlined in both adult

(Linehan 1993a, b) and adolescent (Miller et al. 2007b)

manuals, sample sizes ranged from 1 to 111 (though of

N = 111, only 29 received DBT and 82 received TAU).

Some studies went to great lengths to improve compliance

and retention (e.g., financial incentives, meals, outreach

strategies; James et al. 2011; Nelson-Gray et al. 2006;

Woodberry and Popenoe 2008), which limits the ecological

validity and generalizability of these findings. Also, most

74 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

measures assessed symptoms and functioning through

adolescent self-report. Treatment fidelity was not specifi-

cally measured in any study and treatment length ranged

from 2 weeks to 29 months, with some adaptations devi-

ating considerably from the format and structure of DBT

outlined in manuals (Linehan 1993a, b; Miller et al.

2007b). In addition, only five studies included follow-up

data, and during these periods, treatment was uncontrolled.

Lastly, most trials either did not report medication use, or

this was uncontrolled. As a result of these deviations in

terms of treatment format, structure, and content, the dif-

ferent adolescent psychiatric disorders and problem

behaviors to which DBT was applied, and various study

designs and lengths of follow-up assessments, it is difficult

to synthesize and draw overarching conclusions about the

research on DBT for adolescents.

Future Directions

Given limitations of current studies examining DBT for

adolescents, additional research is needed. Research on

DBT for adolescents is relatively limited (18 studies pub-

lished in English-language journals), and to date, there are

no published RCTs. Given that the RCT design is the gold

standard for determining treatment efficacy (Chambless

et al. 1996, 1998; Chambless and Hollon 1998), multiple

RCTs are needed to evaluate whether DBT can be con-

sidered efficacious for adolescents. Currently, RCTs

examining DBT for adolescents are underway, the results

of which will direct the future of adolescent DBT research

considerably (Groves et al. 2012). Stringent RCTs

employing control comparisons similar to those used in

adult efficacy studies (i.e., starting with WLC or TAU

comparisons, followed by nonbehavioral active treatment

controls) would provide more definitive evidence for the

efficacy of DBT for adolescents. Such RCTs should also be

conducted by diverse research groups, measure and dem-

onstrate adherence to the manual, consider allegiance

effects, include semistructured assessment of adolescent

psychiatric symptoms, and assess functioning at long-term

follow-ups.

Because current empirical evidence is strongest for

adults and adolescents with BPD features plus suicide

ideation, suicide behavior, and/or NSSI, RCTs should first

target youth with these symptoms and behaviors. If efficacy

is demonstrated, additional RCTs examining different

disorders in adolescents with an underlying emotion reg-

ulation dysfunction could be initiated. Similarly, studies in

diverse settings should aim to create more homogenous

samples of youth with similar presenting problems and

defined inclusion/exclusion criteria to test the efficacy of

DBT for a specific disorder or problem behavior. Also,

before mediator, moderator, dismantling, effectiveness, or

dissemination studies are conducted, RCTs are needed to

determine for which adolescent disorders or problem

behaviors DBT is effective.

Miller et al. (2007b) provided a theoretically sound and

developmentally appropriate adaptation of DBT for sui-

cidal adolescents. Future research should aim to evaluate

clinical components and outcomes of this adaptation. For

example, optimal length of treatment should be investi-

gated empirically. Current studies rely on adaptations of

DBT with various lengths, ranging from 2 weeks to

29 months. Though the original manual (Miller et al.

2007b) called for 16 weeks of outpatient treatment with

optional continuation, adolescents with different presenting

problems or in different settings may benefit from alternate

lengths of treatment. In contrast, 16 weeks may indeed be

the optimal length of DBT for adolescents. Empirical

evaluation would provide a more definitive answer to this

question. In addition, evaluation of the most pertinent and

effective DBT components and skills for adolescents and

their families should be considered. Most of the original

DBT treatment modes and skills were maintained in the

adolescent DBT manual (Miller et al. 2007b) because there

is no theoretical or empirical basis for which components

to include or eliminate. However, some adaptations of

DBT for adolescents only included some of the treatment

strategies, modes, and skills. Similarly, particular skills

may be more effective than others for adolescents and their

families. Determination of the most pertinent treatment

components and skills may indicate specific strategies,

modes, and modules to emphasize, which would be espe-

cially informative since treatment of adolescents is typi-

cally much shorter in duration than the original DBT

protocol.

Conclusion

Given positive outcomes among adults with various psy-

chiatric and behavioral impairments, DBT has been adap-

ted for use with adolescents who present with similar

problems. Current adaptations of DBT target youth with

BPD features, suicide ideation and behavior, NSSI, ODD,

BD, EDs, and TTM. DBT has also been applied transdi-

agnostically among youth with varied psychiatric and

behavioral problems in correctional facility, residential,

long-term inpatient, and day treatment settings. Rationale

for using DBT with these adolescents rests in the common

underlying dysfunction in emotion regulation across ages,

diagnoses, and problem behaviors. Treatment adaptations

and length vary depending on the presenting problem and

setting. However, most adaptations are modeled after the

adolescent DBT manual (Miller et al. 2007b) and involve

inclusion of family members in skills training, addition of

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80 75

123

family therapy sessions, inclusion of new adolescent–

family dialectical dilemmas, reduction of length of treat-

ment, addition of optional graduate group, implementation

of a new skills module, and modifications to handouts and

delivery of content in skills groups.

Although DBT for adolescents has been examined in

several studies, the research is still in its infancy. Quasi-

experimental studies demonstrated that, when compared

with TAU, DBT for adolescents was associated with sig-

nificant reductions in inpatient hospitalizations, attrition,

and behavioral incidents (e.g., violence toward self and

others). These studies also found DBT was associated with

significant reductions in suicide ideation, NSSI, BPD

symptoms, depression, anxiety, general psychiatric symp-

toms, and global severity, but improvements in these areas

were either not compared with adolescents receiving TAU

(Rathus and Miller 2002) or significant in both DBT and

TAU groups (Katz et al. 2004). Additional findings from

trials using less rigorous methodology demonstrated that

DBT was associated with significant reductions in disso-

ciative symptoms, ED symptoms, TTM symptoms, anger,

externalizing behaviors, impulsivity, hopelessness, emo-

tion dysregulation, general psychopathology, and medica-

tion usage, and significant improvements in interpersonal

strength, coping, general functioning, and psychosocial

adjustment. Thus, DBT appears to be a promising inter-

vention for adolescents presenting with a broad array of

emotion regulation difficulties; however, RCTs are sorely

needed to provide more definitive evidence for the efficacy

of DBT for adolescents.

References

Adrian, M., Zeman, J., Erdley, C., Lisa, L., & Sim, L. (2011).

Emotional dysregulation and interpersonal difficulties as risk

factors for nonsuicidal self-injury in adolescent girls. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 39, 389–400.

Aldao, A., Nolen-Hoeksema, S., & Schweizer, S. (2010). Emotion-

regulation strategies across psychopathology: A meta-analytic

review. Clinical Psychology Review, 30, 217–237. Andión, Ó., Ferrer, M., Matali, J., Gancedo, B., Calvo, N., Barral, C.,

et al. (2012). Effectiveness of combined individual and group

dialectical behavior therapy compared to only individual

dialectical behavior therapy: A preliminary study. Psychother- apy, 49, 241–250.

Becker, D. F., Grilo, C. M., Edell, W. S., & McGlashan, T. H. (2002).

Diagnostic efficiency of borderline personality disorder criteria

in hospitalized adolescents: Comparison with hospitalized

adults. The American Journal of Psychiatry, 159, 2042–2047. Bedics, J. D., Atkins, D. C., Comtois, K. A., & Linehan, M. M.

(2012a). Treatment differences in the therapeutic relationship

and introject during a 2-year randomized controlled trial of

dialectical behavior therapy versus nonbehavioral psychotherapy

experts for borderline personality disorder. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 80, 66–77.

Bedics, J. D., Atkins, D. C., Comtois, K. A., & Linehan, M. M.

(2012b). Weekly therapist ratings of the therapeutic relationship

and patient introject during the course of dialectical behavioral

therapy for the treatment of borderline personality disorder.

Psychotherapy, 49, 231–240. Berzins, L. G., & Trestman, R. L. (2004). The development and

implementation of dialectical behavior therapy in forensic

settings. The International Journal of Forensic Mental Health, 3, 93–103.

Bjarehed, J., & Lundh, L. G. (2008). Deliberate self-harm in 14-year-

old adolescents: How frequent is it, and how is it associated with

psychopathology, relationship variables, and styles of emotion

regulation. Cognitive and Behaviour Therapy, 37, 26–37. Bohus, M., Haaf, B., Simms, T., Limberger, M. F., Schmahl, C.,

Unckel, C., et al. (2004). Effectiveness of inpatient dialectical

behavioral therapy for borderline personality disorder: A

controlled trial. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 42, 487–499. Bohus, M., Haaf, B., Stiglmayr, C., Pohl, U., Bohme, R., & Linehan,

M. (2000). Evaluation of inpatient dialectical-behavioral therapy

for borderline personality disorder—A prospective study.

Behaviour Research and Therapy, 38, 875–887. Bradley, R. G., & Follingstad, D. R. (2003). Group therapy for

incarcerated women who experience interpersonal violence: A

pilot study. Journal of Traumatic Stress, 16, 337–340. Burke, J. D., & Stepp, S. D. (2012). Adolescent disruptive behavior

and borderline personality disorder symptoms in young adult

men. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 40, 35–44. Carlson, G. A., & Meyer, S. E. (2006). Phenomenology and diagnosis

of bipolar disorder in children, adolescents, and adults: Com-

plexities and developmental issues. Development and Psycho- pathology, 18, 939–969.

Carter, G. L., Willcox, C. H., Lewin, T. J., Conrad, A. M., & Bendit,

N. (2010). Hunter DBT project: Randomized controlled trial of

dialectical behaviour therapy in women with borderline person-

ality disorder. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychi- atry, 44, 162–173.

Chambless, D. L., Baker, M. J., Baucom, D. H., Beutler, L. E.,

Calhoun, K. S., Crits-Christoph, P., et al. (1998). Update on

empirically validated therapies II. The Clinical Psychologist, 51, 3–16.

Chambless, D. L., & Hollon, S. D. (1998). Defining empirically

supported therapies. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psy- chology, 66, 7–18.

Chambless, D. L., Sanderson, W. C., Shoham, V., Bennett, J. S.,

Pope, K. S., Crits-Christoph, P., et al. (1996). An update on

empirically validated therapies. The Clinical Psychologist, 49, 5–18.

Chanen, A. M., Jovev, M., & Jackson, H. J. (2007). Adaptive

functioning and psychiatric symptoms in adolescents with

borderline personality disorder. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 68, 297–306.

Chapman, A. L., Leung, D. W., & Lynch, T. R. (2008). Impulsivity

and emotion dysregulation in borderline personality disorder. Journal of Personality Disorders, 22, 148–164.

Charlton, M., & Dykstra, E. J. (2011). Dialectical behavior therapy

for special populations: Treatment with adolescents and their

caregivers. Advances in Mental Health and Intellectual Disabil- ities, 5, 6–14.

Christenson, G., & Mackenzie, T. (1994). Trichotillomania. In M.

Hersen & R. T. Ammerman (Eds.), Handbook of prescriptive treatments for adults (pp. 217–235). New York, NY: Plenum Press.

Clarkin, J. F., Levy, K. N., Lenzenweger, M. F., & Kernberg, O. F.

(2007). Evaluating three treatments for borderline personality

disorder: A multiwave study. The American Journal of Psychi- atry, 164, 922–928.

76 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

Coletti, D. J., Leigh, E., Gallelli, K. A., & Kafantaris, V. (2005).

Patterns of adherence to treatment in adolescents with bipolar

disorder. Journal of Child and Adolescent Psychopharmacology, 15, 913–917.

Comtois, K. A., Elwood, L., Holdcraft, L. C., Smith, W. R., &

Simpson, T. L. (2007). Effectiveness of dialectical behavior

therapy in a community mental health center. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 14, 406–414.

Crowell, S. E., Beauchaine, T. P., & Linehan, M. M. (2009). A

biosocial developmental model of borderline personality disor-

der: Elaborating and extending Linehan’s theory. Psychological Bulletin, 135, 495–510.

Dickstein, D. P., & Leibenluft, E. (2006). Emotion regulation in

children and adolescents: Boundaries between normalcy and

bipolar disorder. Development and Psychopathology, 18, 1105–1131.

Diefenbach, G. J., Tolin, D. F., Meunier, S., & Worhunsky, P. (2008).

Emotion regulation and trichotillomania: A comparison of

clinical and nonclinical hair pulling. Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry, 39, 32–41.

Dimeff, L. A., & Koerner, K. (Eds.). (2007). Dialectical behavior therapy in clinical practice. New York, NY: Guilford Press.

Esposito-Smythers, C., Goldstein, T., Birmaher, B., Goldstein, B.,

Hunt, J., Ryan, N., et al. (2010). Clinical and psychosocial

correlated of non-suicidal self-injury within a sample of children

and adolescents with bipolar disorder. Journal of Affective Disorders, 125, 89–97.

Evershed, S., Tennant, A., Boomer, D., Rees, A., Barkham, M., &

Watsom, A. (2003). Practice-based outcomes of dialectical

behaviour therapy (DBT) targeting anger and violence, with

male forensic patients: A pragmatic and non-contemporaneous

comparison. Criminal Behaviour and Mental Health, 13, 198–213.

Feigenbaum, J. D., Fonagy, P., Pilling, S., Jones, A., Wildgoose, A.,

& Bebbington, P. E. (2012). A real-world study of the

effectiveness of DBT in the UK National Health Service. British Journal of Clinical Psychology, 51, 121–141.

Fleischhaker, C., Böhme, R., Sixt, B., Brück, C., Schneider, C., & Schulz,

E. (2011). Dialectical behavioral therapy for adolescents (DBT-A):

A clinical trial for patients with suicidal and self-injurious behavior

and borderline symptoms with a one-year follow-up. Child and Adolescent Psychiatry and Mental Health, 5, 3.

Flessner, C. A., Woods, D. W., Franklin, M. E., Cashin, S. E., &

Keuthen, N. J. (2008). The Milwaukee inventory for subtypes of

trichotillomania-adult version (MIST-A): Development of an

instrument for the assessment of ‘focused’ and ‘automatic’ hair

pulling. Journal of Psychopathology and Behavioral Assessment, 30, 20–30.

Flessner, C. A., Woods, D. W., Franklin, M. E., Keuthen, N. J., &

Piacentini, J. (2009). Cross-sectional study of women with

trichotillomania: A preliminary examination of pulling styles,

severity, phenomenology, and functional impact. Child Psychi- atry and Human Development, 40, 153–167.

Flessner, C. A., Woods, D. W., Franklin, M. E., Keuthen, N. J.,

Piacentini, J., Cashin, S. E., et al. (2007). The Milwaukee

inventory for style of trichotillomania-child version (MIST-C):

Initial development and psychometric properties. Behavior Modification, 31, 896–918.

Fruzzetti, A. R., & Fruzzetti, A. E. (2008). Dialectics in cognitive and

behavior therapy. In W. T. O’Donohue & J. E. Fisher (Eds.),

Cognitive behavior therapy: Applying empirically supported techniques in your practice (2nd ed., pp. 132–141). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Glenn, C. R., & Klonsky, E. D. (2009). Emotion dysregulation as a

core feature of borderline personality disorder. Journal of Personality Disorders, 23, 20–28.

Goldstein, T. R., Axelson, D. A., Birmaher, B., & Brent, D. A. (2007).

Dialectical behavior therapy for adolescents with bipolar disor-

der: A 1-year open trial. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 46, 820–830.

Goldstein, T. R., Birmaher, B., Axelson, D., Ryan, N. D., Strober, M.

A., Gill, M. K., et al. (2005). History of suicide attempts in

pediatric bipolar disorders: Factors associated with increased

risk. Bipolar Disorders, 7, 525–535. Goldstein, T. R., Miklowitz, D. J., & Mullen, K. L. (2006). Social

skills knowledge and performance among adolescents with

bipolar disorder. Bipolar Disorders, 8, 350–361. Gratz, K. L., Rosenthal, M. Z., Tull, M. T., Lejuez, C. W., &

Gunderson, J. G. (2006). An experimental investigation of

emotion dysregulation in borderline personality disorder. Jour- nal of Abnormal Psychology, 115, 850–855.

Gross, J. J. (1998). The emerging field of emotion regulation: An

integrative review. Review of General Psychology, 2, 271–299. Groves, S., Backer, H. S., van den Bosch, W., & Miller, A. (2012).

Dialectical behavior therapy with adolescents: A review. Child and Adolescent Mental Health, 17, 65–75.

Harley, R., Sprich, S., Safren, S., Jacobo, M., & Fava, M. (2008).

Adaptation of dialectical behavior therapy skills training group

for treatment-resistant depression. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 196, 136–143.

Harned, M. S., Chapman, A. L., Dexter-Mazza, E., Murray, A.,

Comtois, K. A., & Linehan, M. M. (2008). Treating co-occurring

axis I disorders in recurrently suicidal women with borderline

personality disorder: A 2-year randomized trial of dialectical

behavior therapy versus community treatment by experts.

Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 76, 1068– 1075.

Hill, D. M., Craighead, L. W., & Safer, D. L. (2011). Appetite-

focused dialectical behavior therapy for the treatment of binge

eating with purging: A preliminary trial. International Journal of Eating Disorders, 44, 249–261.

Hirvikoski, T., Waaler, E., Alfredsson, J., Pihlgren, C., Holmström,

A., & Johnson, A. (2011). Reduced ADHD symptoms in adults

with ADHD after structured skills training group: Results from a

randomized controlled trial. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 49, 175–185.

Hughes, A. E., Crowell, S. E., Uyeji, L., & Coan, J. A. (2012). A

developmental neuroscience of borderline pathology: Emotion

dysregulation and social baseline theory. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 40, 21–33.

James, A. C., Taylor, A., Winmill, L., & Alfoadari, K. (2008). A

preliminary community study of dialectical behaviour therapy

(DBT) with adolescent females demonstrating persistent, delib-

erate self-harm (DSH). Child and Adolescent Mental Health, 13, 148–152.

James, A. C., Winmill, L., Anderson, C., & Alfoadari, K. (2011). A

preliminary study of an extension of a community dialectic

behaviour therapy (DBT) programme to adolescents in the

looked after care system. Child and Adolescent Mental Health, 16, 9–13.

Katz, L. Y., Cox, B. J., Gunasekara, S., & Miller, A. L. (2004).

Feasibility of dialectical behavior therapy for suicidal adolescent

inpatients. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 43, 276–282.

Keuthen, N. J., Rothbaum, B. O., Falkenstein, M. J., Meunier, S.,

Timpano, K. R., Jenike, M. A., et al. (2011). DBT-enhanced

habit reversal treatment for trichotillomania: 3- and 6-month

follow-up results. Depression and Anxiety, 28, 310–313. Keuthen, N. J., Rothbaum, B. O., Welch, S. S., Taylor, C.,

Falkenstein, M., Heekin, M., et al. (2010). Pilot trial of

dialectical behavior therapy-enhanced habit reversal for tricho-

tillomania. Depression and Anxiety, 27, 953–959.

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80 77

123

Keuthen, N. J., & Spirch, S. E. (2012). Utilizing DBT skills to

augment traditional CBT for trichotillomania: An adult case

study. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 19, 372–380. Klein, D. A., & Miller, A. L. (2011). Dialectical behavior therapy for

suicidal adolescents with borderline personality disorder. Child and Adolescent Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 20, 205–216.

Kliem, S., Kröger, C., & Kosfelder, J. (2010). Dialectical behavior

therapy for borderline personality disorder: A meta-analysis

using mixed-effects modeling. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 78, 936–951.

Koons, C. R., Robins, C. J., Tweed, J. L., Lynch, T. R., Gonzalez, A.

M., Morse, J. Q., et al. (2001). Efficacy of dialectical behavior

therapy in women veterans with borderline personality disorder.

Behavior Therapy, 32, 371–390. Kring, A. M., & Sloan, D. M. (Eds.). (2010). Emotion regulation and

psychopathology: A transdiagnostic approach to etiology and treatment. New York, NY: Guilford Press.

Kröger, C., Schweiger, U., Sipos, V., Arnold, R., Kahl, K. G.,

Schunert, T., et al. (2006). Effectiveness of dialectical behaviour

therapy for borderline personality disorder in an inpatient setting.

Behaviour Research and Therapy, 44, 1211–1217. Kröger, C., Schweiger, U., Sipos, V., Kliem, S., Arnold, R., Schunert,

T., et al. (2010). Dialectical behaviour therapy and an added

cognitive behavioural treatment module for eating disorders in

women with borderline personality disorder and anorexia

nervosa or bulimia nervosa who failed to respond to previous

treatments: An open trial with a 15-month follow-up. Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry, 41, 381–388.

Leibenluft, E., Charney, D. S., & Pine, D. S. (2003). Researching the

pathophysiology of pediatric bipolar disorder. Biological Psy- chiatry, 53, 1009–1020.

Linehan, M. M. (1993a). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of border- line personality disorder. New York, NY: Guilford Press.

Linehan, M. M. (1993b). Skills training manual for treating borderline personality disorder. New York, NY: Guilford Press.

Linehan, M. M. (1997). Validation and psychotherapy. In A. C. Bohart

& L. S. Greenberg (Eds.), Empathy reconsidered: New direc- tions in psychotherapy (pp. 353–392). Washington, DC: Amer- ican Psychological Association.

Linehan, M. M., Armstrong, H. E., Suarez, A., Allmon, D., & Heard,

H. L. (1991). Cognitive-behavioral treatment of chronically

parasuicidal borderline patients. Archives of General Psychiatry, 48, 1060–1064.

Linehan, M. M., Comtois, K. A., Murray, A. M., Brown, M. Z.,

Gallop, R. J., Heard, H. L., et al. (2006). Two-year randomized

controlled trial and follow-up of dialectical behavior therapy vs

therapy by experts for suicidal behaviors and borderline

personality disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 63, 757–766.

Linehan, M. M., Dimeff, L. A., Reynolds, S. K., Comtois, K. A.,

Welch, S. S., Heagerty, P., et al. (2002). Dialectal behavior

therapy versus comprehensive validation therapy plus 12-step for

the treatment of opioid dependent women meeting criteria for

borderline personality disorder. Drug and Alcohol Dependence, 67, 13–26.

Linehan, M. M., Heard, H. L., & Armstrong, H. E. (1993).

Naturalistic follow-up of a behavioral treatment for chronically

parasuicidal borderline patients. Archives of General Psychiatry, 50, 971–974.

Linehan, M. M., McDavid, J. D., Brown, M. Z., Sayrs, J. H. R., &

Gallop, R. J. (2008). Olanzapine plus dialectical behavior

therapy for women with high irritability who meet criteria for

borderline personality disorder: A double-blind, placebo-con-

trolled pilot study. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 69, 999– 1005.

Linehan, M. M., & Schmidt, H. (1995). The dialectics of effective

treatment of borderline personality disorder. In W. O’Donohue

& L. Krasner (Eds.), Theories of behavior therapy: Exploring behavior change (pp. 553–584). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.

Linehan, M. M., Schmidt, H., Dimeff, L. A., Craft, J. C., Kanter, J., &

Comtois, K. A. (1999). Dialectical behavior therapy for patients

with borderline personality disorder and drug-dependence. The American Journal on Addictions, 8, 279–292.

Linehan, M. M., Tutek, D. A., Heard, H. L., & Armstrong, H. E.

(1994). Interpersonal outcome of cognitive behavioral treatment

for chronically suicidal borderline patients. The American Journal of Psychiatry, 151, 1771–1776.

Lynch, T. R., Cheavens, J. S., Cukrowicz, K. C., Thorp, S. R.,

Bronner, L., & Beyer, J. (2007a). Treatment of older adults with

co-morbid personality disorder and depression: A dialectical

behavior therapy approach. International Journal of Geriatric Psychiatry, 22, 131–143.

Lynch, T. R., Morse, J. Q., Mendelson, T., & Robins, C. J. (2003).

Dialectical behavior therapy for depressed older adults: A

randomized pilot study. American Journal of Geriatric Psychi- atry, 11, 33–45.

Lynch, T. R., Trost, W. T., Salsman, N., & Linehan, M. M. (2007b).

Dialectical behavior therapy for borderline personality disorder.

Annual Review of Clinical Psychology, 3, 181–205. McDonell, M. G., Tarantino, J., Dubose, A. P., Matestic, P.,

Steinmetz, K., Galbreath, H., et al. (2010). A pilot evaluation

of dialectical behavioural therapy in adolescent long-term

inpatient care. Child and Adolescent Mental Health, 15, 193–196.

McLaughlin, K. A., Hatzenbuehler, M. L., Mennin, D. S., & Nolen-

Hoeksema, S. (2011). Emotion dysregulation and adolescent

psychopathology: A prospective study. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 49, 544–554.

McMain, S. F., Guimond, T., Streiner, D. L., Cardish, R. J., & Links,

P. S. (2012). Dialectical behavior therapy compared with general

psychiatric management for borderline personality disorder:

Clinical outcomes and functioning over a 2-year follow-up.

American Journal of Psychiatry, 169, 650–661. McMain, S. F., Links, P. S., Gnam, W. H., Guimond, T., Cardish, R.

J., Korman, L., et al. (2009). A randomized trial of dialectical

behavior therapy versus general psychiatric management for

borderline personality disorder. The American Journal of Psychiatry, 166, 1365–1374.

Miller, A. L., Glinski, J., Woodberry, K. A., Mitchell, A. G., & Indik,

J. (2002). Family therapy and dialectical behavior therapy with

adolescents: Part I: Proposing a clinical synthesis. American Journal of Psychotherapy, 56, 568–584.

Miller, A. L., Muehlenkamp, J. J., & Jacobson, C. M. (2008). Fact or

fiction: Diagnosing borderline personality disorder in adoles-

cents. Clinical Psychology Review, 28, 969–981. Miller, A. L., Rathus, J. H., DuBose, A. P., Dexter-Mazza, E. T., &

Goldklang, A. R. (2007a). Dialectical behavior therapy for

adolescents. In L. A. Dimeff & K. Koerner (Eds.), Dialectical behavior therapy in clinical practice: Applications across disorders and settings (pp. 245–263). New York, NY: Guilford Press.

Miller, A. L., Rathus, J. H., & Linehan, M. M. (2007b). Dialectical behavior therapy with suicidal adolescents. New York, NY: Guilford Press.

Miller, A. L., Rathus, J. H., Linehan, M. M., Wetzler, S., & Leigh, E.

(1997). Dialectical behavior therapy adapted for suicidal

adolescents. Journal of Practical Psychiatry and Behavioral Health, 3, 78–86.

Miller, A. L., Wyman, S. E., Huppert, J. D., Glassman, S. L., &

Rathus, J. H. (2000). Analysis of behavioral skills utilized by

78 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

suicidal adolescents receiving dialectical behavior therapy.

Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 7, 183–187. Neacsiu, A. D., Rizvi, S. L., & Linehan, M. M. (2010). Dialectical

behavior therapy skills use as a mediator and outcome of

treatment for borderline personality disorder. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 48, 832–839.

Nelson-Gray, R., Keane, S. P., Hurst, R. M., Mitchell, J. T.,

Warburton, J. B., Chok, J. T., et al. (2006). A modified DBT

skills training program for oppositional defiant adolescents:

Promising preliminary findings. Behaviour Research and Ther- apy, 44, 1811–1820.

Nock, M. K., & Prinstein, M. J. (2004). A functional approach to the

assessment of self-mutilative behavior. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 72, 885–890.

Nock, M. K., & Prinstein, M. J. (2005). Contextual features and

behavioral functions of self-mutilation among adolescents.

Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 114, 140–146. Nock, M. K., Prinstein, M. J., & Sterba, S. K. (2009). Revealing the

form and function of self-injurious thoughts and behaviors: A

real-time ecological assessment study among adolescents and

young adults. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 118, 816–827. Nolen-Hoeksema, S. (2012). Emotion regulation and psychopathol-

ogy: The role of gender. Annual Review of Clinical Psychology, 8, 161–187.

Orbach, I., Blomenson, R., Mikulincer, M., Gilboa-Schechtman, E.,

Rogolsky, M., & Retzoni, G. (2007). Perceiving a problem-

solving task as a threat and suicidal behavior in adolescents.

Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology, 26, 1010–1034. Pasieczny, N., & Connor, J. (2011). The effectiveness of dialectical

behaviour therapy in routine public mental health settings: An

Australian controlled trial. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 49, 4–10.

Peebles, R., Wilson, J. L., & Lock, J. D. (2011). Self-injury in

adolescents with eating disorders: Correlates and provider bias.

Journal of Adolescent Health, 48, 310–313. Pistorello, J., Fruzzetti, A. E., MacLane, C., Gallop, R., & Iverson, K.

M. (2012). Dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) applied to

college students: A randomized clinical trial. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology. Advance online publica- tion. doi:10.1037/a0029096.

Prendergast, N., & McCausland, J. (2007). Dialectic behaviour

therapy: A 12-month collaborative program in a local commu-

nity setting. Behaviour Change, 24, 25–35. Putnam, K. M., & Silk, K. R. (2005). Emotion dysregulation and the

development of borderline personality disorder. Development and Psychopathology, 17, 899–925.

Rathus, J. H., & Miller, A. L. (2000). DBT for adolescents:

Dialectical dilemmas and secondary treatment targets. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 7, 425–434.

Rathus, J. H., & Miller, A. L. (2002). Dialectical behavior therapy

adapted for suicidal adolescents. Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior, 32, 146–157.

Reeves, M., James, L. M., Pizzarello, S. M., & Taylor, J. E. (2010).

Support for Linehan’s biosocial theory from a nonclinical

sample. Journal of Personality Disorders, 24, 312–326. Rizvi, S. L., Steffel, L. M., & Carson-Wong, A. (2012). An overview

of dialectical behavior therapy for professional psychologists.

Professional Psychology: Research and Practice. Advance online publication. doi:10.1037/a0029808.

Robins, C. J., & Chapman, A. L. (2004). Dialectical behavior therapy:

Current status, recent developments, and future directions.

Journal of Personality Disorders, 18, 73–89. Robins, C. J., & Rosenthal, M. Z. (2011). Dialectical behavior

therapy. In J. D. Herbert & E. M. Forman (Eds.), Acceptance and mindfulness in cognitive behavior therapy: Understanding and applying the new therapies (pp. 164–192). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Ruuska, J., Kaltiala-Heino, R., Rantanen, P., & Koivisto, A. M. (2005). Psychopathological distress predicts suicidal ideation

and self-harm in adolescent eating disorder patients. European Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 14, 276–281.

Safer, D. L., Lock, J., & Couturier, J. L. (2007). Dialectical behavior

therapy modified for adolescent binge eating disorder: A case

report. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 14, 157–167. Safer, D. L., Robinson, A. H., & Jo, B. (2010). Outcome from a

randomized controlled trial of group therapy for binge eating

disorder: Comparing dialectical behavior therapy adapted for

binge eating to an active comparison group therapy. Behavior Therapy, 41, 106–120.

Safer, D. L., Telch, C. F., & Agras, W. S. (2001). Dialectical behavior

therapy for bulimia nervosa. The American Journal of Psychi- atry, 158, 632–634.

Salbach-Andrae, H., Bohnekamp, I., Pfeiffer, E., Lehmkuhl, U., &

Miller, A. L. (2008). Dialectical behavior therapy of anorexia

and bulimia nervosa among adolescents: A case series. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 15, 415–425.

Selby, E. A., & Joiner, T. E. (2009). Cascades of emotion: The

emergence of borderline personality disorder from emotional and

behavioral dysregulation. Review of General Psychology, 13, 219–229.

Shelton, D., Kesten, K., Zhang, W., & Trestman, R. (2011). Impact of

dialectical behavior therapy—Corrections modified (DBT-CM)

upon behaviorally challenged incarcerated male adolescents.

Journal of Child and Adolescent Psychiatric Nursing, 24, 105–113.

Shenk, C. E., & Fruzzetti, A. E. (2011). The impact of validating and

invalidating responses on emotion reactivity. Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology, 30, 163–183.

Shusterman, A., Feld, L., Baer, L., & Keuthen, N. (2009). Affective

regulation in trichotillomania: Evidence from a large-scale

internet survey. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 47, 637–644. Sim, L., & Zeman, J. (2005). Emotion regulation factors as mediators

between body dissatisfaction and bulimic symptoms in early

adolescent girls. The Journal of Early Adolescence, 25, 478– 496.

Simpson, E. B., Yen, S., Costello, E., Rosen, K., Begin, A., Pistorello,

J., et al. (2004). Combined dialectical behavior therapy and

fluoxetine in the treatment of borderline personality disorder.

Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 65, 379–385. Soler, J., Pascual, J. C., Campins, J., Barrachina, J., Puigdemont, D.,

Alvarez, E., et al. (2005). Double-blind, placebo-controlled study

of dialectical behavior therapy plus olanzapine for borderline

personality disorder. The American Journal of Psychiatry, 162, 1221–1224.

Soler, J., Pascual, J. C., Tiana, T., Cebrià, A., Barrachina, J., Campins,

M. J., et al. (2009). Dialectical behavior therapy skills training

compared to standard group therapy in borderline personality

disorders: A 3-month randomised controlled clinical trial.

Behaviour Research and Therapy, 47, 353–358. Steinberg, J. A., Steinberg, S. J., & Miller, A. L. (2011). Orienting

adolescents and families to DBT telephone consultation: Prin-

ciples, procedures, and pitfalls. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 18, 196–206.

Stepp, S. D., Burke, J. D., Hipwell, A. E., & Loeber, R. (2012).

Trajectories of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder and

oppositional defiant disorder symptoms as precursors of border-

line personality disorder symptoms in adolescent girls. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 40, 7–20.

Stingaris, A., Maughan, B., & Goodman, R. (2010). What is a

disruptive disorder? Temperamental antecedents of oppositional

defiant disorder: Findings from the Avon longitudinal study.

Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 49, 474–483.

Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80 79

123

Sunseri, P. A. (2004). Preliminary outcomes on the use of dialectical

behavior therapy to reduce hospitalization among adolescents in

residential care. Residential Treatment for Children and Youth, 21, 59–76.

Tamás, Z., Kovacs, M., Gentzler, A. L., Tepper, P., Gádoros, J., Kiss,

E., et al. (2007). The relations of temperament and emotion self-

regulation with suicidal behaviors in a clinical sample of

depressed children in Hungary. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 35, 640–652.

Telch, C. F., Agras, W. S., & Linehan, M. M. (2001). Dialectical

behavior therapy for binge eating disorder. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 69, 1061–1065.

Thompson, R. A. (1994). Emotion regulation: A theme in search of

definition. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, 59, 25–52.

Trautman, P. D., Stewart, N., & Morishima, A. (1993). Are adolescent

suicide attempters non-compliant with outpatient care? Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 32, 89–94.

Trupin, E. W., Stewart, D. G., Beach, B., & Boesky, L. (2002).

Effectiveness of dialectical behaviour therapy program for

incarcerated female juvenile offenders. Child and Adolescent Mental Health, 7, 121–127.

van den Bosch, L. M. C., Koeter, M. W. J., Stijnen, T., Verheul, R., &

van den Brink, W. (2005). Sustained efficacy of dialectical

behaviour therapy for borderline personality disorder. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 43, 1231–1241.

van den Bosch, L. M. C., Verheul, R., Schippers, G. M., & van den

Brink, W. (2002). Dialectical behavior therapy of borderline

patients with and without substance use problems: Implementa-

tion and long-term effects. Addictive Behaviors, 27, 911–923. Van Dijk, S., Jeffrey, J., & Katz, M. R. (2012). A randomized,

controlled, pilot study of dialectical behavior therapy skills in a

psychoeducational group for individuals with bipolar disorder.

Journal of Affective Disorders. Advance online publication. doi: 10.1016/j.jad.2012.05.054

Verheul, R., van den Bosch, L. M. C., Koeter, M. W. J., de Ridder, M.

A., Stijnen, T., & van den Brink, W. (2003). Dialectical

behaviour therapy for women with borderline personality

disorder: 12-month, randomised clinical trial in The Netherlands.

British Journal of Psychiatry, 182, 135–140. Wasser, T., Tyler, R., Mcllhaney, K., Taplin, R., & Henderson, L.

(2008). Effectiveness of dialectical behavior therapy (DBT)

versus standard therapeutic milieu (STM) in a cohort of

adolescents receiving residential treatment. Best Practices in Mental Health, 4, 114–125.

Welch, S. S., & Kim, J. (2012). DBT-enhanced cognitive behavioral

therapy for adolescent trichotillomania: An adolescent case

study. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 19, 483–493. Wisniewski, L., & Kelly, E. (2003). The application of dialectical

behavior therapy to the treatment of eating disorders. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 10, 131–138.

Wisniewski, L., Safer, D., & Chen, E. (2007). Dialectical behavior

therapy and eating disorders. In L. A. Dimeff & K. Koerner

(Eds.), Dialectical behavior therapy in clinical practice: Appli- cations across disorders and settings (pp. 174–221). New York, NY: Guilford Press.

Woodberry, K. A., Miller, A. L., Glinski, J., Indik, J., & Mitchell, A.

G. (2002). Family therapy and dialectical behavior therapy with

adolescents: Part II: A theoretical review. American Journal of Psychotherapy, 56, 585–602.

Woodberry, K. A., & Popenoe, E. J. (2008). Implementing dialectical

behavior therapy with adolescents and their families in a

community outpatient clinic. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 15, 277–286.

Zanarini, M. C., Frankenburg, F. R., Reich, D. B., & Fitzmaurice, G.

(2010). Time to attainment of recovery from borderline person-

ality disorder and stability of recovery: A 10-year prospective

follow-up study. American Journal of Psychiatry, 167, 663–667. Zanarini, M. C., Frakenburg, F. R., Reich, D. B., Silk, K. R., Hudson,

J. I., & McSweeney, L. B. (2007). The subsyndromal phenom-

enology of borderline personality disorder: A 10-year follow-up

study. American Journal of Psychiatry, 164, 929–935. Zlotnick, C., Donaldson, D., Spirito, A., & Pearlstein, T. (1997).

Affect regulation and suicide attempts in adolescent inpatients.

Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 36, 793–798.

80 Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev (2013) 16:59–80

123

Copyright of Clinical Child & Family Psychology Review is the property of Springer Science & Business

Media B.V. and its content may not be copied or emailed to multiple sites or posted to a listserv without the

copyright holder's express written permission. However, users may print, download, or email articles for

individual use.

family therapy and dbt.pdf

Treatment of Impulsive Aggression in Correctional Settings.pdf

Treatment of Impulsive Aggression in Correctional Settings

Deborah Shelton, Ph.D., R.N.*, Susan Sampl, Ph.D.

y ,

Karen L. Kesten, M.S. z ,

Wanli Zhang, Ph.D. x

and Robert L. Trestman, Ph.D., M.D.

Purpose. This article reports the implementation of Dialectical Behavioral Therapy —Corrections Modified (DBT-CM) for difficult to manage, impulsive and/or aggressive correctional populations. Methods. Partici- pants were English-speaking women (n ¼ 18) and men (n ¼ 45) of diverse cultural backgrounds between the ages of 16 and 59 years old retained in state-run prisons in Connecticut. Following consent, and a psychological assessment battery, twice-weekly DBT-CM groups were held over 16 weeks followed by random assignment to DBT coaching or case management condition, with sessions taking place individually for eight weeks. Data analysis. A mixed effects regression model was used to test the hypotheses: participants will show decreased aggression, impulsivity, and psychopathology, as well as improved coping, after completing the DBT-CM groups; and will show greater reduction in targeted behaviors than those receiving case management at the six month and 12 month follow-up assessment periods. Results. Significant reduction in targeted behavior was found from baseline to following the16 week DBT-CM skills treatment groups. Both case management and DBT coaching were significant at 12 month follow-up. A significant difference was found for adult men and women. Conclusions. The study supports the value of DBT-CM for management of aggressive behaviors in prison settings. Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.

Behavioral Sciences and the Law

Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009) Published online in Wiley InterScience

(www.interscience.wiley.com) DOI: 10.1002/bsl.889

*Correspondence to: Associate Professor Deborah Shelton, Ph.D., R.N., School of Nursing, Division of Medicine, University of Connecticut Health Center, The Exchange, Suite 246, 270 Farmington Avenue, Farmington, CT 06030-5386, U.S.A. E-mail: [email protected] y York Correctional Institution, Correctional Managed Health Care. z Department of Medicine, University of Connecticut Health Center, Department of Medicine. x Department of Psychiatry, University of Connecticut Health Center. � Correctional Managed Health Care; University of Connecticut Health Center, Department of Medicine.

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.

The management of mentally ill and behaviorally disturbed offenders is a major

public safety issue, involving not just correctional facilities, but the community at

large. By midyear 2000, there were over 300,000 mentally ill offenders in prisons and

jails throughout the nation (BJS, 2006). More than twice this number was estimated

to be either on probation or parole in the community (BJS, 1999). The Bureau of

Justice Statistics (2006) reported that, at midyear 2005, mental health problems, as

indicated by recent history or symptoms, were present in more than half of all prison

and jail inmates.

Inmates with mental illness who express impulsive aggressive behaviors can be a

management challenge in correctional settings. Current literature views aggressive

behavior as a dichotomous construct, conceptually defined as premeditated

aggression (often referred to as instrumental, predatory, or callous and unemotional)

or impulsive aggression (often referred to as affective, reactive, expressive,

emotional, or hostile). Those individuals who fall under the second category

express impulsive aggressive behaviors involuntarily, in a burst of rage, with no

weighing of potential consequences (Wakai & Trestman, 2008). These individuals

have been found to have lower verbal scores and executive cognitive functioning

impairments based upon neuropsychological testing (Villemarette-Pittman, Stan-

ford, & Greve, 2003), which allows them to become easily overwhelmed by

competing stimuli of the correctional environment.

Compared with prison and jail inmates without mental health problems, those

with mental health problems have substantially higher rates of being injured in a fight

or being charged with a physical assault, verbal assault, or violation of facility rules

during incarceration (BJS, 2006). Additionally, state prison inmates with mental

health problems spend on average a maximum sentence that is five months longer

(based upon total maximum sentence for all consecutive sentences) than state

prisoners without such problems (BJS, 2006).

Offenders with mental health disorders, whether incarcerated or in the

community, are at an increased risk for behavior problems that may cause harm

to self and others. In a study of 505 randomly selected male and female new

admissions to CT jails, Trestman, Ford, Zhang, and Weisbrock (2007) found a high

prevalence of mental illness, with 74.1% of females (N ¼ 199) and 47.0% of males (N ¼ 306) diagnosed with a least one Axis I disorder during their lifetimes. This sample showed a high lifetime prevalence of personality disorders, particularly for

antisocial personality disorder (39.5% of males, 27.0% of females) and borderline

personality disorder (12.9% of males, 23.2% of females). Borderline personality

disorder is among a group of disorders affecting inmates that are the most difficult to

manage. Individuals with this disorder exhibit behavior marked by emotional

impulsivity and self-injury, and often have limited responsiveness to treatment with

medications. There have been few therapeutic programs available to target these

behaviors in prison environments.

REVIEW OF LITERATURE

Cognitive–behavioral approaches for offenders have received empirical support for

effecting reduced behavioral problems and improved coping in diverse correctional

populations, including substance abusers, sex offenders, and juvenile offenders

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

788 D. Shelton et al.

(Milkman & Wanberg, 2007; Shingler, 2004; Trupin, Stewart, Beach, & Boesky,

2002). Cognitive Behavior Therapy (CBT) initiates changes in cognitions that affect

behavior and can reduce the risk of recidivism (Allen, Mackenzie, & Hickman, 2001;

Henning & Frueh, 1996; Husband & Platt, 1993; Scott, 1993; Valliant &

Antonowicz, 1991).

A version of CBT known as Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) was originally

developed to treat women in the community diagnosed with borderline personality

disorder (Linehan, 1993a; Linehan, Armstrong, Suarez, Allmon, & Heard, 1991).

DBT is similar to CBT with its use of core therapeutic procedures such as problem

solving, exposure, skill training, contingency management, and behavior therapy.

DBT departs from standard CBT in its emphasis of a ‘‘dialectical’’ approach to

behavior change, encouraging individuals to accept themselves as they are in the

present within the context of reshaping their cognitions and changing their future

behavior (Linehan, 1993b). As a general therapeutic framework, DBT attempts to

address maladaptive behaviors by teaching emotional regulation, interpersonal

effectiveness, distress tolerance, core mindfulness, and self-management skills. DBT

seeks to engage the individual in therapy, providing motivation and support for

change by emphasizing the management of therapy-interfering behaviors and the

relationship between the therapist and the client. DBT has been shown to

significantly reshape maladaptive cognitions and reduce the incidence of self-

destructive behaviors (i.e. self-mutilation, suicide, and parasuicidal behaviors), and

has become the first empirically supported treatment for borderline personality

disorder (Linehan et al., 1991; Linehan, Tutek, Heard, & Armstrong, 1994; Rathus

& Miller, 2000).

DBT has been recognized as a promising treatment for criminal justice

populations.

Studies (six of which involve randomized controlled trials) published on the

treatment of bipolar disorder using DBT in low security in-patient and out-patient

settings involved female samples (sizes ranged from 20 to 58) demonstrating

significant improvements in parasuicidal behavior, with significantly fewer in-patient

days and lower attrition in the DBT group than the treatment as usual group (Bohus

et al., 2000; Koons et al., 2001; Linehan et al., 1991; Linehan, Heard, & Armstrong,

1993; Linehan et al., 1999, 1994; Verheul et al., 2003).

Studies of inmates with more challenging behaviors are those studies in high

secure settings. Low, Jones, Duggan, Power, and MacLeod (2001) studied the use of

DBT with ten women offenders in a high security setting and found at six month

follow-up a sustained reduction in deliberate self-harm and dissociative experiences,

an increase in survival and coping beliefs, and improvements in depression, suicide

ideation, and impulsiveness. Nee and Farman (2005) tested the use of DBT in a

one year and 16 week program with a waiting list control group for 16 female

completers with BPD in high secure prisons. Despite small sample sizes, positive

outcomes are reported and sustained at the six month follow-up, demonstrating

improved emotional control and reduced impulsivity, with smaller improvements on

self-esteem and anger measures.

Evershed et al. (2003) conducted a study of 17 male inmates assigned to an

18 month adapted version of DBT or a treatment as usual comparison group.

Outcome measures reported from pre- to post-test demonstrated a non-significant

decrease in the frequency of violence-related behavior for both groups over time and

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

Treatment of impulsive aggression in correctional settings 789

a significant reduction in the seriousness of violence-related behaviors among the

DBT group. When changes between pre- and post-treatment were considered,

patients receiving DBT treatment were better able to reduce the cognitive, covert

and dispositional aspects of hostility and anger and were significantly better at

managing their overt or outward expression of anger and hostility.

In a study of female adolescent offenders, Trupin et al. (2002) adapted DBT for

those with the most difficult emotional and behavioral problems. In a pre–post-test

comparison of intervention group with treatment as usual, youth in the DBT group

demonstrated a significant reduction in behavior problems, and there was a lower

number of staff punitive responses than for a comparative period of time in the

pervious year. Berzins and Trestman (2004) described early DBT implementations

at six forensic facilities. The teams at each of those facilities modified DBT for use in

a correctional setting. As a result of these trials, modifications in DBT specific to the

correctional setting included reducing the extent of the individual therapy sessions,

adding and modifying current content of skill training to address criminal behaviors

and correctional situations, and modifying treatment parameters to include

inclusion/exclusion criteria for the group setting to increase safety and security.

As reflected by this review of literature, there is an accumulation of evidence

demonstrating the value of the use of DBT in correctional settings. This article

reports the outcomes of a study to test the correction-modified version of DBT

within three difficult to manage, impulsive and/or aggressive correctional populations

in Connecticut: adults in special management facilities, impulsive and aggressive

adolescents, and adult women. This study was approved by the University of

Connecticut Health Center IRB (three IRB approvals were required, one for each

facility: 04-156-2, 04-232-2, and 05-215-2).

METHODS

A non-equivalent control group design (Figure 1) was used to test the two

hypotheses: (1) participants will show reduced aggression, impulsivity, and

psychopathology, as well as improved coping, after completing the DBT-CM

groups, and (2) participants randomly assigned to receive DBT-CM coaching (DBT

group) will show greater reductions in aggression, impulsivity, and psychopathology

than those receiving case management (CM group) at the 6 month and 12 month

follow-up. Descriptive analyses were conducted using SPSS version 15.0. A mixed

effects regression model approach (Bryk & Raudenbush, 1992; this is a useful

methodology for dealing with missing data) by SAS PROC MIXED (Singer, 1998)

was utilized for multiple univariate analyses. An alpha of .05 was set as the level of

significance for the statistical analyses.

Sample

Participants with impulsive behavior problems were recruited for participation from

three facilities through a process of being recommended by correctional facility unit

majors and correctional mental health personnel. Impulsive behavior problems are

defined as affective, reactive, emotional, hostile, or expressive (Stanford et al., 2003;

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

790 D. Shelton et al.

Cornell et al., 1996). The aggressive behavior associated with this impulsivity is

typically a response to a perceived provocation with immediate and destructive

violence. Inmates who display these behaviors are perceived to be unpredictable and

short fused by corrections staff and were those inmates who were difficult to manage

as indicated by the high number of behavioral tickets they received.

Once voluntary participants were identified, a screening visit was conducted to

discuss eligibility for participation in the study protocol. Individuals were excluded

from participation if any of the following factors were evidenced: presence of any

unstable medical or neurological disorder that would interfere with participation in

the protocol or cause additional risk; non-English speaking; less than one year from

end of sentence; appearing not to understand the procedures and aims of the study as

described on the informed consent form; screening positive for psychopathy, as

evidenced by a score of more than 30 on the Hare Psychopathy Checklist —

Screening Version (PCL-SV) (Hare, 1991). Prior to participation in the DBT-CM

intervention, a psychological assessment of the participant’s current mental, physical,

and emotional state was conducted.

The sample enrolled during the study period (2004–2006) included 52 adult

males, 34 adult females, and 38 adolescent males, for a total of 124 participants.

Over the two year period, 61 participants were lost to the study. Reasons for attrition

are reflected in Table 1. A chi-square analysis was conducted to assess whether there

Figure 1. The research design highlights elements of subject selection and treatment comparisons between index and control groups.

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

Treatment of impulsive aggression in correctional settings 791

were any differences between those who remained in the study and those who did not

based on demographic variables, and there were no significant differences. Five of

those lost to study were removed by correctional officers for safety and security

reasons, which took precedence over research protocol. The inferential statistical

analyses focused on the 63 participants who completed 50% or more of the skill

training group sessions, and who also completed one or more follow-up assessments.

DBT Intervention

Highly structured DBT-CM groups (16 weeks) were co-led by a team of two

research clinicians. If an individual discontinued participation in the DBT-CM

protocol for any reason, they could still choose to continue with the research

interview sessions (at week 16 and again 6 and 12 months later). An individual had

the choice to drop out of DBT-CM and/or the interview sessions at any point

without penalty or effect on their current status within Connecticut Department of

Correction or medical or mental health care in that facility. As reflected in Figure 1,

upon completion of DBT skill training group sessions, participants had an equal

chance of being randomly assigned to one of two follow-up conditions: DBT-CM

coaching or case management, each of which was provided in weekly 30 minute

individual sessions. Each of these conditions was provided by one of the clinicians

who had provided the skill training groups (Trestman, Gonillo, & Davis,

unpublished treatment manual).

Measurements available for use in correctional settings are challenged by limited

validation studies on inmate populations. Those selected for this study included the

Life History of Aggression Scale (LHAS): assessed at baseline to measure life history

of aggressive behavior and trait aggression (Coccaro et al., 1989). Psychological

assessment interviews conducted by two researchers included use of the following

instruments and were completed at four points: week 0 (intake), week 16 (after

completing the DBT-CM skill training group sessions), six months and 12 months.

Table 1. Retention, exclusion and attrition of study participants

N Screened, consented, & completed baseline assessment 124 Not available for treatment due to

Release from incarceration 20 Never started group 10 Transfer to another facility 4 P-SCAN score > 30 1 Death (medical illness) 1 Never returned from hospitalization 1

Available for treatment 87 Did not complete treatment* due to

Dropped out 18 Transferred out of special treatment unit due to behavior 3 In segregation 2

Completed treatment & 1 or more follow-up interview 64 Completed treatment, but no follow-ups 1 Completed treatment & follow-up 63

*Completed treatment ¼ attended half or more group sessions.

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

792 D. Shelton et al.

The outcome of reduced impulsive aggression was measured by (1) the Buss–Perry

Aggression Questionnaire (BPAQ), to assess four dimensions including physical

aggression, verbal aggression, anger, and hostility (Buss & Perry, 1992), (2) the

Overt Aggression Scale — Modified (OAS-M), to assess the severity, type, and

frequency of aggressive behavior (Coccaro, Harvey, Kupsaw-Lawrence, Herbert, &

Bernstein, 1991); (3) the Brief Psychiatric Rating Scale (BPRS), to assess change in

severity of psychopathology (Overall & Gorham, 1962); (4) disciplinary ticket

information collected on participants 12 months prior to starting groups and six

months after completing groups (disciplinary tickets are given to inmates when an

offense has been made within the prison facility; disciplinary tickets are classified as

Class A —assault, fighting, destruction of property, Class B— causing a disruption,

disobeying a direct order, theft, and Class C—disorderly conduct, malingering);

(5) a basic demographic questionnaire containing questions about age, ethnicity,

and socio-economic status; (6) the Ways of Coping Checklist (WCCL), to measure

eight different coping styles — confrontational coping, seeking social support, planful

problem solving, self-control, distancing, positive reappraisal, accepting responsi-

bility, and escape/avoidance (Folkman & Lazarus, 1988); (7) Positive and Negative

Affect Scales (PANAS), to measure general positive and negative affect states

(Watson, Clark, & Tellegen, 1988).

RESULTS

There were 63 participants (ages 16–59 years old, mean ¼ 28 (SD ¼ 10.29), median ¼ 27 years old). Males (n ¼ 45) were recruited in two correctional facilities, one adult facility and one youth facility for male prisoners in the state correction

system, and women (n ¼ 18) were recruited in the one correctional institution for female prisoners in the state correction system. Participants’ self-reported races

included African-American (33.18%), Hispanic (20.54%), Caucasian (42.60%),

Asian (1.58%), and other (1.58%); Education level ranged from 6 to 14 years of

school (mean ¼ 11.4 years, SD ¼ 2.319). Seventy-four percent of participants reported being never married, 2% married, 6% cohabitating, 4.7% separated or

divorced, and 11% widowed. The demographic distributions are provided for review

in Table 2. The primary types of crime (offense classification) with which

participants were charged were violent, 72.16% (e.g., use of weapon, physical or

sexual assault, manslaughter, or murder), and nonviolent, 27.84% (e.g., drug

possession, larceny, probation violation, or breach of peace).

Hypothesis 1 sought to test whether Participants will show reduced aggression,

impulsivity, and psychopathology, as well as improved coping, after completing the DBT-

CM groups. The analysis included the BPA and OAS-M measures of aggression and

hostility, BPRS total score and Question 5 (for hostility), WCCL measures of

coping, and affect as measured by the PANAS as dependent variables. To control for

differences among the three facilities at which the research was conducted, the main

effect of ‘‘facility’’ was included in the analysis, as well as its interaction with the time

variable.

Of particular interest were the significant changes in behavior as measured by

number of disciplinary tickets from baseline (M ¼ .2653, SD ¼ .520 78) to following the16-week DBT-CM skills treatment groups (M ¼ .1349, SD ¼ .223 13)

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

Treatment of impulsive aggression in correctional settings 793

(t ¼ 2.292, p ¼ .025). At the six-month follow-up, the change in scores (M ¼ .1568, SD ¼ .293 70) was not significant (t ¼ 1.758, p ¼ .084), but of particular importance is the fact that there was no regression in the number of disciplinary tickets back

toward the higher number of tickets at the baseline.

No significant differences in standardized instrument scores were found when

examining all facilities included together. An examination of the main effects for

follow-up, however, found psychopathology significantly influenced as measured by

the PANAS negative symptom scale (F ¼ 11.86, p ¼ .001) and PANAS positive symptom scale (F ¼ 5.29, p ¼ .026). The PANAS negative symptom scale was also significant for the adult male facility (F ¼ 4.71, p ¼ .014). Main effects at follow-up found BPRS mean scores significant (F ¼ 3.89, p ¼ .05) and significant for the adult facility specifically (F ¼ 6.07, p ¼ .004). Additional main effects were found on BPA sub-scales. BPA physical aggression demonstrated a significant change from baseline

to follow-up (F ¼ 13.46, p ¼ .0005) and was significant for adult male (t ¼ 3.41, p ¼ .001) and young male (t ¼ 3.72, p ¼ .0004) facilities specifically. The main effect for BPA anger management was significant at follow-up (F ¼ 4.73, p ¼ .033) as well.

Table 2. Demographics of participants and non-participants*

Gender Participants Non-participants

Adult male Adult female Male youth Adult male Adult female Male youth

Race African

Am./Black 8 4 9 7 5 4

Hispanic 5 2 6 13 3 6 Native Hawaiian/ 2

Pacific Is. 10 11 6 9 8 Cauc./White 1 1 3 Asian 1 Other

Age M ¼ 29.78 (SD ¼ 7.804)

M ¼ 36.17 (SD ¼ 8.939)

M ¼ 17.86 (SD ¼ .834)

M ¼ 31.28 (SD ¼ 9.896)

M ¼ 36.06 (SD ¼ 8.729)

M ¼ 18.19 (SD ¼ .750)

Education M ¼ 11.71 (SD ¼ 2.327)

M ¼ 12.33 (SD ¼ 2.870)

M ¼ 10.36 (SD ¼ 1.255)

M ¼ 10.78 (SD ¼ 2.063)

M ¼ 11.19 (SD ¼ 2.136)

M ¼ 10.33 (SD ¼ 1.291)

Marital status Never married 18 11 18 20 5 15 Married

Cohabitating 1 5

Separated 1 1 2 2 4 Divorced 1 6 3 1 Widowed 2 2 2 Prefer not to

Respond 1 2

Employment Unemployed 10 4 12 12 9 13 Part-time

(<35 hrs) 2 3 8 3 3 1

Full-time (35þ hrs)

10 10 2 14 4 2

Disability/SSI 1 1 Offense classification

Violent 3 12 9 18 10 8 Non-violent 20 5 12 11 6 8

*Self-report.

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

794 D. Shelton et al.

Ways of coping subscales demonstrated some changes for main effects on four of

the eight subscales. Seeking social support demonstrated a significant change from

baseline to follow-up (F ¼ 4.62, p ¼ .037). Accepting responsibility also showed a significant change at follow-up (F ¼ 5.41, p ¼ .024) and specifically for the youth (t ¼ -3.02, p ¼ .013). The main effect for Planful problem solving (F ¼ 5.52, p ¼ .023) and Escape-avoidance (F ¼ 4.51, p ¼ .039) were also significant.

Hypothesis 2 sought to test whether Participants randomly assigned to receive DBT-

CM coaching (DBT group) will show greater reductions in aggression, impulsivity, and

psychopathology versus those receiving case management (CM group) at the six-month and

12-month follow-up. This analysis was conducted using the same dependent measures

as employed in the analysis of Hypothesis 1, and in addition the following

interactions: time � facility, time � group, facility � group, and time � facility � group. Also, participants’ baseline dependent measure scores were included as a covariate in

the model to control for baseline differences between the DBT-CM and case

management groups.

The mean scores on BPRS as a measure of psychopathology were significant at

follow-up (F ¼ 5.27, p ¼ .008). An examination of the differences of least squares showed a significant follow-up by group effect at six months (t ¼ 2.16, p ¼ .0347), but not at 12 months (t ¼ �1.88, p ¼ .0652). A significant finding was found at follow-up for group by facility (F ¼ 2.99, p ¼ .0263) as well, and a more detailed examination of this finding revealed that a difference between groups was found

between the adult men’s and women’s facilities (t ¼ 2.23, p ¼ .0298). A main effect was also found for facility (F ¼ 2.96, p ¼ .05). Both the adolescent male facility (t ¼ 2.06, p ¼ .0445) and the women’s facility (t ¼ 2.19, p ¼ .0327) were found to have significant tests.

Significant differences in total scores for positive symptoms on the PANAS were

noted between the DBT-CM coaching group and case management at follow-up

(F ¼ 3.07, p ¼ 05). This difference was significant at six months (t ¼ 2.75, p ¼ .0090). However, case management was found to be significant at both six (t ¼ 2.36, p ¼ .0236) and 12 month follow-up points (t ¼ �2.76, p ¼ .0088), and DBT-CM was found to be significant at 12 months (t ¼ 2.08, p ¼ .0493). A main effect was found for follow-up (F ¼ 3.64, p ¼ .0355) with the difference being between time one and time two (t ¼ 2.66, p ¼ .0113).

DISCUSSION

The results of this study provide beginning support for the usefulness of DBT-CM

skill training for aggressive and impulsive offenders in Connecticut. Aggressive and

impulsive inmates showed trends toward improvement following the 16-week skill

training groups as measured by disciplinary tickets, which are a system-wide measure

of behavior. Although the global hypotheses were not supported, exploration of main

effects indicate improvements through improved affect, reduced aggression, and

improved coping, particularly for adult males. These encouraging findings suggest

that program implementation would contribute to a decrease in problematic

behavior and improvement in quality of life for participating inmates. Decreasing

this risk factor may directly impact manageability within the prison environment and

also recidivism.

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

Treatment of impulsive aggression in correctional settings 795

With the added interventions (case management and DBT-CM coaching), some

additional improvements primarily in psychopathology were seen. Adolescent males

and females appeared to have made the most improvements over time. The small

improvements demonstrated statistically may be explained by the level of severity of

aggressive behaviors these individuals exhibited prior to their involvement in the

program. In addition, implementation of programming in correctional environments

is challenging, and outcomes are expected to improve as experience with the

program increases.

In addition to these statistical findings, there was much anecdotal evidence for the

beneficial effect of the DBT-CM intervention, both for the inmate participants and

for the correctional system as a whole. These benefits evolved from the collaborative

communication entailed in each step of the research implementation. It began with

the first step of asking administrators within each facility to conduct the study,

conveying a great deal of information to them about the research process, the study

intervention, and its likely benefits. Researchers and academic professionals have

been less likely to be active within the prison environment compared with non-

forensic settings; this is understandable given the additional safety and security

concerns raised by their presence. Yet academic–correctional partnerships have been

shown to facilitate improved treatment services and outcomes in corrections (Raimer

& Stobo, 2004). The study described here also appeared to result in such benefits.

Correctional officers and mental health staff reported that the training provided by

the research team was enjoyable and gave them additional skills for their work with

inmates. This benefit then translated to the inmates when the groups began. Many of

the incarcerated participants reported that they enjoyed attending the groups.

Correctional staff members commented about the positive changes they observed in

the behaviors of participating inmates. They described having a better understanding

of negative behaviors and were pleased to have alternative ways to help de-escalate a

frustrated inmate instead of using punitive measures.

Costs associated with implementation of this program include extensive up-front

training and fidelity monitoring of the quality of the curriculum, process evaluation,

and evaluation of clinical and program outcomes. Continued attention is needed

to address therapeutic challenges presented by the environment. These can be

addressed through quality improvement systems and supervision by unit managers.

The costs of programming are offset by the reduced assaults, potential reduced

workers compensatory time, and costs associated with physical injuries. Admin-

istrative support over time of the importance of such programming is important to

sustainability given the competing demands of these systems.

McCann, Ball, and Ivanoff (2000) aptly listed five arguments for the use of

dialectic behavior therapy approaches in forensic settings which justify the costs

associated with provision of these programs. First, the incidence of personality

disorder is high among the populations, and DBT for bipolar disorder and associated

symptoms is effective. Second, structured behavioral programs are more effective in

reducing recidivism than less structured programs. Third, there is a critical need

to manage aggressive or life threatening patient behaviors. Fourth, providing a

systematic and organized approach to treatment addresses staff burnout and

behavior that interferes with the conduct of effective treatment. Last, implementing

DBT-CM in a forensic setting assists in achieving and maintain accreditation by

accreditors (Joint Commission on Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations,

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

796 D. Shelton et al.

National Commission on Correctional Health Care) that value systematic and

empirically validated behavioral interventions. We are currently accredited by

NCCHC at one of the facilities where this program is provided.

In terms of limitations, there were many challenges encountered during the

implementation of this study, and these contributed to the limitations of carrying out

the research. Obtaining approvals from administrative Connecticut Department of

Correction personnel and gaining accessibility into the prison facilities were lengthy

processes that delayed the initiation of groups. This, in turn, resulted in fewer

groups being conducted overall, and a smaller n than originally anticipated. Other

challenges inherent to the correctional system were encountered, including

lockdowns, unanticipated early releases or transfers of the inmates, participants

removed from the study due to security risks by security personnel, and greater

rates of staff turnover. Researchers conducting previous comparable studies with this

population have reported similar challenges. For example, issues such as time

constraints during the funding period and staffing changes affected retention rates

and the ability to create a large sample size for the study by Nee and Farman (2005)

on female borderline personality disordered prisoners in Great Britain. It is

worthwhile, however, to discover some practical limitations of providing a structured

clinical intervention in a correctional environment, so that related plans and

modifications can be made. Offering a skills-based program that can be suited for

corrections will increase the likelihood that it is accepted and supported by those that

make programmatic decisions. Like the study by Nee and Farman (2005), a pilot

implementation with a small sample size is a preliminary step in program

development. They too had positive verbal responses by participants and prison

officers.

The results of this study will need to be replicated and extended. Random

assignment occurred following the DBT-CM skill training group, so there was no

randomization with the initial group nor was there a control for the group condition.

A more rigorous design with a larger sample may yield different outcomes.

Recruitment and retention of samples is always challenging in correction environments.

Implementation of the initial skill DBT-CM group with a single targeted sub-

population might have yielded stronger outcomes. Gender specific or age specific

testing and adaptations may be appropriate. Dosing (number of groups, or length of

time) may also have influenced outcomes. Continued study of these modifications is

needed to determine the effects.

The significant finding of case management compared with DBT-CM was

interesting. Case-management models vary, and this would need to be studied more

carefully. These findings indicate that the individual intervention was more effective,

but this may be an effect of these participants having had the benefit of the DBT-CM

skill training first, which prepared them, or made them ready and receptive to

treatment. This may explain why the improvement in psychopathology was seen.

Further, given the prison environment, advocacy, which is a strong component of

case management, may have a very useful function within prison environments

where inmates are provided little personal control.

Although outside the scope of this study, upon release, most of the released

inmates return to the same environments that contributed to their criminogenic

life choices. Maintenance of DBT-CM skills, like any program taught skills

for individuals with limited cognitive functioning or impairments, will need

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

Treatment of impulsive aggression in correctional settings 797

reinforcement. The literature supports maintenance of reduced aggressive or self-

harmful behaviors as targeted by the intervention while incarcerated (Eccleston &

Sorbello, 2002; Robins & Chapman, 2004); however, longitudinal studies on the

effects of DBT from the prison environment to the community are limited (Nee &

Farman, 2007). Given the known rates of reincarceration, although the causes of

reincarceration are complex, it would support common sense that these skills would

need ongoing supportive programming. The need for consistency across behavioral

programs and across environments has been a well known fact for many years.

In sum, additional testing of this promising intervention is needed to refine the

adaptation of this community-derived evidence-based practice for use in uniquely

demanding correctional environments. Refinements in the interventions we would

make at this point would include simplified language (fifth grade level or below);

expanded use of imagery (to enhance non-verbal learning and retention); repetitive

structure to support knowledge retention; close collaboration with all stakeholders

(most notably custody officials and staff in the implementation; recognition of the

resource-limited (both staff and fiscal) nature of correctional settings; the need for

ongoing support and supervision of the clinicians consistent with a correctional

environment and the need to incorporate correctional-setting-specific fidelity and

outcome monitoring.

CONCLUSION

The opportunities for advancing the field, and for improving the function and quality

of life for the participating inmates, are evident. As the program is further refined and

additional testing is conducted, we shall be better able to make informed decisions

regarding the dosing of DBT-CM, and which sub-populations within the prison

population to target, as well as the best time to deliver such services within the course

of incarceration. The positive benefits identified by staff were felt to be just as

important as the clinical benefits to inmates. The program provided a common

ground to focus clinical and correctional staff energies toward a mutually beneficial

outcome.

REFERENCES

Allen, L. C., Mackenzie, D. L., & Hickman, L. J. (2001). The effectiveness of cognitive behavioral treatment for adult offenders: A methodological, quality-based review. International Journal of Offender Therapy and Comparative Criminology, (45), 498–514.

Berzins, L. G., & Trestman, R. L. (2004). The development and implementation of dialectical behavior therapy in forensic settings. International Journal of Forensic Mental Health, 3(1), 95–105.

Bohus, M., Haaf, B., Stiglmayr, C., Pohl, U., Bohme, R., & Linehan, M. (2000). Evaluation of inpatient Dialectic Behavior Therapy for Personality Disorder—A prospective study. Behavior Research and Therapy, 38, 875–887.

Bryk, A. S., & Raudenbush, S. W. (1992). Hierarchical linear models: Applications and data analysis methods. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.

Bureau of Justice Statistics. (1999). Probation and parole in the United States, 2000. (NCJ 188208). Washington, DC: U. S. Department of Justice, Office of Justice Programs, Bureau of Justice Statistics.

Bureau of Justice Statistics. (2006). Special Report: Mental health problems of prison and jail inmates. (NCJ213600). Washington, DC: U. S. Department of Justice, Office of Justice Programs, Bureau of Justice Statistics.

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

798 D. Shelton et al.

Buss, A. H., & Perry, M. (1992). The aggression questionnaire. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 63, 452–459.

Coccaro, E. F., Harvey, P. D., Kupsaw-Lawrence, E., Herbert, J. L., & Bernstein, D. P. (1991). Development of neuropharmacologically based behavioral assessments of impulsive aggressive beha- vior. Journal of Neuropsychiatry, 3(2), S44–S51.

Coccaro, E. F., Siever, L. J., Klar, H. M., Maurer, G., Cochrane, K., Cooper, T. B., Mohs, R. C., & Davis, K. L. (1989). Serotonergic studies in patients with affective and personality disorder: Correlates with suicidal and impulsive aggressive behavior. Archives of General Psychiatry, 46, 587–599.

Cornell, D. G., Warren, J., Hawk, G., Stafford, E., Oram, G., & Pine, D. (1996). Psychopathy in instrumental and reactive violent offenders. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 64(4), 783– 790.

Eccleston, L., & Sorbello, L. (2002). The RUSH program—Real Understanding of Self-Help: A suicide and self-harm prevention initiative within a prison setting. Australian Psychologist, 37(3), 237.

Evershed, S., Tennant, A., Boomer, D., Rees, A., Barkham, M., & Watson, A. (2003). Practice-based outcomes of dialectical behaviour therapy (DBT) targeting anger and violence, with male forensic patients: A pragmatic and non-contemporaneous comparison. Criminal Behaviour and Mental Health, 13, 198–213.

Folkman, S., & Lazarus, R. S. (1988). Coping as a mediator of emotion. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 54, 466–475.

Hare, R. D. (1991). Manual for the Hare Psychopathy Checklist—Revised. Toronto: Multi-Health Systems. Henning, K. R., & Frueh, B. C. (1996). Cognitive–behavioral treatment of incarcerated offenders: An

evaluation of the Vermont Department of Correction’s Cognitive Self-Change Program. Criminal Justice and Behavior, 23, 523–541.

Husband, S. D., & Platt, J. J. (1993). The cognitive skills component in substance abuse treatment in correctional settings: A brief review. Journal of Drug Issues, 23, 31–42.

Koons, C. R., Robins, C., Tweed, J. L., Lynch, T. R., Conzalez, A. M., Morse, J. Q., Bishop, G. K., Butterfield, M. I., & Bastian, L. A. (2001). Efficacy of dialectical behavior therapy in women veterans with borderline personality disorder. Behavior Therapy, 32, 371–390.

Linehan, M. M. (1993a). Cognitive–behavioral treatment of borderline personality disorder. New York: Guilford.

Linehan, M. M. (1993b). Skills training manual for treating borderline personality disorder. New York: Guilford.

Linehan, M. M., Armstrong, H. E., Suarez, A., Allmon, D., & Heard, H. L. (1991). Cognitive–behavioral treatment of chronically parasuicidal borderline patients. Archives of General Psychiatry, 48, 1060–1064.

Linehan, M. M., Heard, H., & Armstrong, H. E. (1993). Naturalistic follow-up of a behavioral treatment for chronically parasuicidal Borderline patients. Archives of General Psychiatry, 50, 971–974.

Linehan, M. M., Schmidt, H., Dimeff, L. A., Craft, J. C., Kanter, J., & Comtois, K. A. (1999). Dialectic behavior therapy for patients with borderline personality disorder and drug dependence. American Journal on Addictions, 8, 279–292.

Linehan, M. M., Tutek, D. A., Heard, H. L., & Armstrong, H. E. (1994). Interpersonal outcome of cognitive behavioral treatment for chronically suicidal borderline patients. American Journal of Psy- chiatry, 151, 1771.

Low, G., Jones, D., Duggan, C., MacLeod, A., & Power, M. (2001). Dialectical behaviour therapy as a treatment for deliberate self-harm: Case studies from a high security psychiatric hospital population. Clinical Psychology and Psychotherapy, 8, 288–300.

McCann, R. A., Ball, E. M., & Ivanoff, A. (2000). DBT with an inpatient forensic population: The CMHIP forensic model. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 7, 447–4456.

Milkman, H., & Wanberg, K. (2007). Cognitive behavioral treatment: A review and discussion for corrections professionals (NIC# 021657). Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Justice, National Institute of Corrections.

Nee, C., & Farman, S. (2005). Female prisoners with borderline personality disorder: Some promising treatment developments. Criminal Behaviour and Mental Health, 15, 2–16.

Nee, C., & Farman, S. (2007). Dialectic behavior therapy as a treatment for borderline personality disorder in prisons: Three illustrative case studies. The Journal of Forensic Psychiatry and Psychology, 18(2), 160–180.

Overall, J. E., & Gorham, D. R. (1962). The brief psychiatric rating scale. Psychological Reports, 10, 799– 812.

Raimer, B. G., & Stobo, J. D. (2004). Health care delivery in the Texas prison system: The role of academic medicine. Journal of the American Medical Association, 292(4), 485–489.

Rathus, J. H., & Miller, A. L. (2000). DBT for adolescents: Dialectical dilemmas and secondary treatment targets. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 7, 425–434.

Robins, C. J., & Chapman, A. L. (2004). Dialectic behavior therapy: Current status, recent developments, and future directions. Journal of Personality Diorsders, 18(1), 73–89.

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

Treatment of impulsive aggression in correctional settings 799

Scott, E. M. (1993). Prison group therapy with mentally and emotionally disturbed offenders. Inter- national Journal of Offender Therapy and Comparative Criminology, 37, 131–145.

Shingler, J. (2004). A process of cross-fertilization: What sex offender treatment can learn from Dialectical Behavior Therapy. Journal of Sexual Aggression, 10, 171–180.

Singer, D. J. (1998). Using SAS PROC MIXED to fit multilevel models, hierarchical models, and individual growth models. Journal of Educational and Behavioral Statistics, 24, 323–355.

Stanford, M. S., Houston, R. J., Mathias, C. W., Villemarette-Pittman, N. R., Helfritz, L. E., & Conklin, S. M. (2003). Characterizing aggressive behavior. Assessment, 10(2), 183–190.

Trestman, R. L., Ford, J., Zhang, W., & Weisbrock, V. (2007). Current and lifetime psychiatric illness among inmates not identified as acutely mentally ill at intake in Connecticut’s jails. Journal of the American Academy of Psychiatry and the Law, (35), 490–500.

Trupin, E. W., Stewart, D. G., Beach, B., & Boesky, L. (2002). Effectiveness of a Dialectical Behavior Therapy program for incarcerated female juvenile offenders. Child and Adolescent Mental Health, 7(3), 121–127.

Valliant, P. M., & Antonowicz, D. H. (1991). Cognitive behaviour therapy and social skills training improves personality and cognition in incarcerated offenders. Psychological Reports, (68), 27–33.

Verheul, R., Van den Bosch, L. M. C., Koeter, M. W. J., de Ridder, M. A. J., Stijnen, T., & Van den Brink, W. (2003). Dialectical behavior therapy for women with borderline personality disorder. British Journal of Psychiatry, (182), 135–140.

Villemarette-Pittman, N. R., Stanford, M. S., & Greve, K. W. (2003). Language and executive function in self-reported impulsive aggression. Personality and Individual Differences, 34, 1533–1544.

Watson, D., Clark, L. A., & Tellegen, A. (1988). Development and validation of brief measures of positive and negative affect: The PANAS scales. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 54, 1063–1070.

Wakai, S., & Trestman, R. L. (2008). Impulsivity and aggression. In R. I. Simon, & K. Tardiff (Eds.), Violence assessment and management (pp. 211–234). Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric.

Copyright # 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Behav. Sci. Law 27: 787–800 (2009)

DOI: 10.1002/bsl

800 D. Shelton et al.

dbt and male juveniles.pdf

Impact of a Dialectic Behavior Therapy - Corrections Modified (DBT-CM) Upon Behaviorally Challenged Incarcerated Male Adolescents

Deborah Shelton, PhD, RN, NE-BC, CCHP, FAAN[Professor][Director], School of Nursing/Department of Medicine, Research & Evaluation-Correctional Managed Health Care, University of Connecticut, 231 Glenbrook Rd., Storrs, CT 06269

Karen Kesten, MS, University of Connecticut Health Center, Department of Medicine

Wanli Zhang, PhD, and University of Connecticut Health Center, Department of Psychiatry

Robert Trestman, MD, PhD University of Connecticut Health Center, Department of Medicine, Psychiatry & Nursing, Correctional Managed Health Care

Abstract Purpose—This article reports the findings of a Dialectical Behavioral Therapy- Corrections Modified (DBT-CM) intervention upon difficult to manage, impulsive and/or aggressive incarcerated male adolescents.

Methods—A secondary analysis of a sub-sample of 38 male adolescents who participated in the study was conducted. A one-group pretest-posttest design was used; descriptive statistics and t- tests were conducted.

Results—Significant changes were found in physical aggression, distancing coping methods and number of disciplinary tickets for behavior.

Conclusion—The study supports the value of DBT-CM for management of incarcerated male adolescents with difficult to manage aggressive behaviors.

Introduction According to a December 2009 Bureau of Justice Statistics report, there were 92,854 youth held in juvenile facilities as of the 2006 Census of Juveniles in Residential Placement, conducted by the Office of Juvenile Justice and Delinquency Prevention (Sabol, West & Cooper, 2009; Sickmund, Sladky, Kang & Puzzanchera, 2008). Of these, approximately 40% are held for violent crimes (criminal homicide, violent sexual assault, robbery, and aggravated assault) and 51% report symptoms of depression and anxiety (Sedlak & McPhersen, 2010).

Increasingly, over the past twenty years, youth exhibiting significant mental health and behavioral problems have come into contact with juvenile justice systems. Studies have

Corresponding Author: Deborah Shelton, PhD, RN, NE-BC, CCHP, FAAN, Professor, School of Nursing/Department of Medicine, Director, Research & Evaluation-Correctional Managed Health Care, University of Connecticut, 231 Glenbrook Rd., Storrs, CT 06269, 860-486-0409, [email protected].

NIH Public Access Author Manuscript J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

Published in final edited form as: J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. 2011 May ; 24(2): 105–113. doi:10.1111/j.1744-6171.2011.00275.x.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

shown that at least 20% of youth entering the justice system have a mental health problem, with a majority also experiencing a co-occurring substance abuse disorder (Skowyra & Cocozza, 2007; Trupin, Stewart, Beach & Boesky, 2002; Shelton, 2001). These youth pose particular management challenges, as these offenders have particular difficulty adjusting to the rules and routines and are more likely to incur violations and accumulate disciplinary consequences while incarcerated. These youth frequently receive behavioral tickets for how they act including verbal threats, self-harm, refusing to follow directions, disorderly conduct, destruction of property, at times assault; and when placed in segregation cells, will often regress to smearing feces or throwing urine (Quinn & Shera, 2009). Such reported violations are indicative of their emotional, behavioral, and cognitive difficulties. Authors and clinicians agree, that without appropriate treatment, these behaviors are likely to persist, causing distress to the adolescent and adding stress to the correctional environment (Fazel, Doll, & Langsrom, 2008; Berzins & Trestman, 2004).

This paper presents adolescent data from a larger study of adults and youth designed to test the implementation of a dialectic behavior therapy modified for a state correctional system. It was important to examine the data on the youth separately, based upon the belief that youth are different than the adult population and has unique developmental needs. Presented here is the limited literature regarding use of dialectic approaches with incarcerated youth, a description of the intervention, methods and the findings of this secondary data study.

Background The use of cognitive-behavioral approaches with youth who have challenging behaviors and who have become involved with juvenile justice systems is well supported (Quinn & Shera, 2009; Trupin, et.al., 2002; Skowyra & Cocozza, 2007). Among cognitive-behavioral approaches, dialectic behavior therapy (DBT), designed by Linehan (1993), has shown particular promise for application to corrections populations.

While similar to Cognitive-behavioral Therapy (CBT) with its use of core therapeutic procedures such as problem solving, exposure, skill training, contingency management and behavior therapy, DBT departs from standard CBT in a number of ways. It begins by emphasizing a “dialectical” approach to behavior change, encouraging an individual to accept his or herself as they are in the present within the context of reshaping their cognitions and changing their future behavior (Linehan, 1993). As a general therapeutic framework, DBT attempts to address maladaptive behaviors by teaching emotional regulation, interpersonal effectiveness, distress tolerance, core mindfulness and self- management skills. The application of these skills are coached, encouraged and reinforced. DBT also attempts to engage the individual in therapy, providing motivation and support for change by emphasizing the management of therapy-interfering behaviors and the relationship between the therapist and the client. DBT has been shown to significantly reshape maladaptive cognitions and reduce the incidence of self-destructive behaviors (i.e., self-mutilation, suicide and parasuicidal behaviors), and has become the first empirically supported treatment for borderline personality disorder (Linehan, Armstrong, Suarez, Allmon, & Heard,, 1991; Linehan, Tutek, Heard, & Armstrong, 1994; Rathus & Miller, 2000).

With its clear hierarchy of treatment targets and behavior modification (through functional analysis), DBT is well suited for treatment of many problems characterized by behavior dyscontrol. Individuals with borderline personality disorder have characteristics similar to other difficult-to-treat populations, such as emotional instability, anger management problems, aversive affect, interpersonal dysregulation, self-damaging behavior, cognitive disturbances and rigidity, and self-dysfunction (Linehan, 1993). Because this particular

Shelton et al. Page 2

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

treatment modality uses a specialized behavioral skills package to target the cognitions behind these behaviors, DBT can and has been successfully modified and adapted to other treatment areas, such as suicidality in adolescents (Rathus & Miller, 2000), substance abuse (Dimeff, Rizvi, Brown, & Linehan, 2000), and forensic inpatients (McCann, Ball, & Ivanoff, 2000).

Berzins and Trestman (2004) describe the application of DBT in the correctional environment which is frequently cited. As with DBT, the aim is to teach a form of dialectical thinking that enables incarcerated persons to problem-solve when in conflict. This protocol typically includes four core modules: mindfulness, interpersonal effectiveness, distress tolerance, and emotion regulation. The protocol addresses the underlying impaired executive cognitive functioning known to play an important role in the etiology of violent and aggressive behaviors (Morgan, & Lilienfeld, 2000).

Yet, there are limited studies in the literature demonstrating the use of DBT with incarcerated adolescents. In a report by Drake and Barnoski (2006), they have shown a 14% reduction in recidivism for their 70% white and 79% female sample (63 youth with 65 youth in the comparison group). In a second study of the effectiveness of DBT upon the behaviors of 22 female (50% white) offenders, Trupin, Stewart, Beach & Boesky (2002) found a significant decrease in serious behavior problems during their 10-month intervention; but suicidal acts, aggressive behavior and class disruptions were not significantly reduced throughout the year when compared to the year prior to the intervention.

Despite the limitations of the published data regarding the application of DBT to the adolescent offender population, and the uneven findings which, at present are in part due to small sample sizes and the challenges of implementing research within secure environments; there is support from studies of use of DBT outside of corrections with the adolescent population that offers impetus to continue in replicating these efforts (Quinn & Shera, 2009). As an example, Nelson-Gray et al. (2006) report 71% of their sample of 32 outpatient adolescent program completers demonstrated clinically significant improvement following use of Linehan’s (1993a) skills training manual for treating borderline personality disorder modules.

In a review of the literature conducted by Paschall and Fishbein (2002), these authors clearly demonstrate the relationships between impaired executive cognitive functioning and violent and aggressive behaviors. Because executive cognitive functioning is involved in the planning, initiation, and regulation of goal-directed behavior (Luria, 1980; Milner, 1995) deficits in its function often contribute to poor behavioral self-regulation, social skills, and judgment. Such a deficit or “clinical impairment” may be the result of an injury in the frontal lobes of the brain (Paschall & Fishbein, 2002). However, there are more problematic deficits, those referred to as “subclinical impairments” which are not readily observable or easily diagnosable. These less apparent deficits can be affected by a variety of hereditary, behavioral, and environmental factors such as poor nutrition, alcohol abuse, and exposure to violence which can impact youth physical and psychological development.

The Development Perspective. Several theories have emphasized a developmental trajectory of delinquency (Huizinga, Loeber, & Thornberry, 1993; Loeber et al., 1993; Elliot, Huizinga, & Ageton, 1985). Moffitt (1993) summarized two prototypes for the development of delinquency. The first, the life-course-persistent prototype, originates in childhood with neurodevelopmental variation manifested in cognitive deficits (difficult temperament and hyperactivity) and interact with inadequate parenting, poor family relations, and poverty. As the adolescent transitions to adulthood, the relationship between the individual and the environment gradually becomes characterized by aggression and antisocial behavior that

Shelton et al. Page 3

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

continues through midlife. The second type, adolescence-limited-offending originates in the social process, begins later in adolescence, and disappears in young adulthood (Moffitt, 2003). The main difference lies in the fact that the preadolescent development for this group was normal, reflecting psychological difficulties that arise from the gap between biological change and the lack of access to mature behavioral options.

The Risk and Protective Factors Perspective. One of the more influential approaches in understanding the reasons for delinquency focuses on identifying which risk factors are associated with elevated levels of delinquent and antisocial behaviors (Herrenkohl, Maguin, Hill et al., 2000). Simply defined, risk factors are those factors that increase the likelihood of a negative outcome, and protective factors reduce negative outcome by means of interacting with risk factors and moderating their effects or by means of direct influence protective factors decreased likelihood of negative outcome (DeMatteo & Marczyk, 2005). The ratio of protective and risk factors changes with age. For example, growing up with a low socioeconomic status or in a dangerous or violent neighborhood is associated with higher rates of offenses and convictions (Farrington, 1998; Loeber & Farrington, 2000). Further, growing up in large aggressive families, with parents with poor parenting skills, exposed to maltreatment and emotional deprivation have all been associated with increased risk for antisocial and delinquent behavior (Kumpfer & Alvarado, 2003; Loeber & Farrington, 1998).

It is particularly important to note that developmental factors rarely operate alone and tend to interact with other environmental factors. Individual risk factors include prenatal and perinatal complications. Psychological and behavioral characteristics that have been identified as risk factors include low I.Q., delayed language development, hyperactivity, impulsivity, restlessness, risk taking, antisocial beliefs, greater negative emotionality, and substance abuse (DeMatteo & Marczyk, 2005; Hawkins et al., 1998; Kashani et al., 1999; Loeber & Farrington, 1998). Despite the importance of the risk and protective factors approach to identifying indicators of delinquency, Rutter (2006) maintains that risk factors and threats alone do not lead to dysfunction and negative outcomes. As an example, growing up with a low socioeconomic status can be related to increased risk for delinquency because of a lack of opportunities for a solid education; because it is associated with parental psychopathology and substance abuse; because of increased risk to exposure to criminal activities; or through its association with negative psychological factors such as low self- esteem and depression. But, for some youth, they seem to beat the odds in the face of adversity.

Social, environmental, and biological risk factors have been identified that help to explain demographic and geographic variation in the prevalence of violent and aggressive behaviors among adolescent youth. Kann et al (2000) found the highest prevalence rates for fighting and weapons among Hispanic and African American high school students and among urban students in a national study. Snyder and Sickmund (1999) report higher rates of violence among males and ethnic minority groups, as well as similar urban geographic variations for weapon carrying, with juvenile murders concentrated in urban areas.

Importance of Coping. There is consensus that adolescence is a significant and distinct period of human development marked by the transition from childhood to adulthood. Between the ages of 11 and 18 a rapid sequence of physical, cognitive, social, and behavioral transformations occur (Friedman, 2000). Coping behaviors are particularly important, given the variety of stressors that may be experienced with achieving these developmental tasks. In addition to the normative changes with which all adolescents need to cope, a large proportion of adolescents cope with serious stressors such as parental divorce, life in poverty, serious medical conditions, abuse and neglect, and parental

Shelton et al. Page 4

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

substance abuse (Sandler, Wolchik, Mackinnon, Ayers, & Rossa, 1997). Understanding how adolescents cope with serious stressors in their immediate environment is particularly important because adolescents are at an increased risk for negative psychological outcomes such as depression, anxiety, suicide, and other health problems (Boekaerts, 1996) including increased violent and aggressive behaviors.

Like other psychological qualities, coping strategies follow a developmental trajectory (Eisenberg, Fabes, & Guthrie, 1997). Some indicators of coping, such as reactivity and inhibition control are present at birth (Davis & Emory, 1995) and shaped by learning. Learning strategies in adolescence include previous personal experience, peer modeling, perception of personal vulnerability, and social persuasion by others (Ireland, Boustead, & Ireland, 2005). Aldridge and Roesch (2008) developed a typology of minority adolescent coping, and found that three types of coping existed. The first group (44.6%) was those who minimally employed coping strategies and were referred to as low generic copers. Overall, these minority adolescents were psychologically healthy, and although they used their coping strategies sparingly, they were effective at reducing their stress. The second group (48.3%) was those who use active strategies such as planning and were labeled as active copers. Considered the most adaptive of the three groups, these adolescents primarily used acceptance, religion and humor as strategies which would lead to adaptive outcomes. The third group (7.3%) was those who were avoidant or used passive strategies most frequently and are labeled avoidant copers. Interestingly, adolescents within the avoidant coping typology were maladjusted in comparison to the other two groups, characteristically preferring to focus on and vent their emotions and engage is substance use. Although this could be considered adaptive in some circumstances, it is generally considered to result in worse adjustment outcomes and, when combined with substance use, likely to lead to negative health outcomes and risky consequences (Hofstein, 2009). These authors found adolescent avoidant copers engaged in more denial and behavioral disengagement, strategies that have been linked to maladjustment. Aldridge and Roesch (2008) found that the poor conditions of their communities and limitations within their families further supported the use of more avoidant/disengaging strategies relative to the other coping strategies.

Development of interventions for delinquent youth, then, shares the underlying assumption that because at-risk adolescents demonstrate certain less adaptive coping skills, they revert to aggressive or delinquent behaviors and exhibit other emotional and behavioral problems. Traditionally, coping is considered a mediator in the relationship between stressors and physiological and psychological outcomes (Carver et al., 1989). How stressors in the environment influence psychological functioning may depend on the interpretations and reactions of the individual to the stressors, environment or situation. DBT then, focuses onchanging the thoughts and emotions that precede problem behaviors, as well as solving the problems that contribute to problematic thoughts, feelings and behaviors.

Longitudinal studies examining the developmental pathways of youthful offenders have demonstrated that the behavioral manifestations of these exposures are unfortunately seen particularly among males (Hawkins et al., 2000), yet the literature found on use of DBT with incarcerated youth focus primarily upon female incarcerated offenders. This secondary data analysis examines the application of a corrections modified- dialectic behavior therapy among incarcerated adolescent males of mixed races and ethnicities. The need for mental health treatment in corrections for this population is very well documented (Fazel, et al., 2008; Rosenblatt, Rosenblatt, & Biggs, 2000).

Shelton et al. Page 5

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

Methods A secondary data analysis was conducted on a subsample of 38 adolescent males to test the hypothesis that participants will show reduced aggression, impulsivity, and improved coping after completing the Dialectic Behavior Therapy-Corrections Modified (DBT-CM) groups. A pretest-posttest one-group design was used. Descriptive analyses were conducted using SPSS version 15.0. A paired sample t-test was utilized to test for mean differences before and after the 16 week intervention with alpha set at p=.05. A chi-square analysis was conducted to assess whether there were any differences between those who completed the intervention (n=26) and those who did not (n=12) based on demographic variables. IRB approval was obtained through the University of Connecticut (IRB # 04-156-2).

Sample Participants with impulsive behavior problems were recruited for participation from the one facility in the state that holds male adolescent youth committed to the state Department of Correction. Youth were referred as potential participants by correctional facility unit majors and correctional mental health personnel. Those youth referred were those youth perceived by corrections staff to be unpredictable and were those inmates who were difficult to manage as indicated by the high number of behavioral tickets they received. Once voluntary participants were identified, a screening visit was conducted to discuss eligibility for participation in the study protocol. Individuals were excluded from participation if any of the following factors were evidenced: presence of any unstable medical or neurological disorder that would interfere with participation in the protocol or cause additional risk; non- English speaking; less than one year from end of sentence; appearing not to understand the procedures and aims of the study as described on the informed consent form; screening positive for psychopathy, as evidenced by a score of more than 30 on the Hare Psychopathy Checklist-Screening Version (PCL-SV) (Hare, 1991). An individual had the choice to drop out of DBT-CM and/or the interview sessions at any point without penalty or effect on their current status within the state Department of Correction or the care received in that facility. Prior to participation in the DBT-CM intervention, a psychological assessment of the participant’s current mental, physical, and emotional state was conducted.

The adolescent sample enrolled during the study period (2004–2006) included 38 adolescent males. Twelve participants were lost to the study. Reasons for attrition were: four withdrew from the group on their own; one was transferred to a different facility, and seven youth were released. A chi-square analysis was conducted to assess whether there were any differences between those who remained in the study. There were no significant differences based on race (χ 2 =5.336, df =4, p=.255), age (χ 2 =3.057, df=4, p=.548), or education level (χ 2 = 4.752, df=4, p=.314).

DBT-CM Intervention Extensive adaptations to the vocabulary and examples included in the DBT-CM treatment manual were required to increase the likelihood that participants would benefit from DBT (Trestman, Gonillo, & Davis, 2004). Given the higher incidence of reading and learning problems among incarcerated individuals (Samuelsson, Herkner, & Lundberg, 2003; Slaughter, Fann, & Ehde, 2003), the DBT vocabulary was adapted to make it easier to understand, and many pictures were added to increase iconic learning. Numerous examples were changed and added, to reflect the types of situations incarcerated individuals face. In addition to modifying the ‘content’ of clinical materials to make them appropriate for forensic settings, it was also necessary to tailor the ‘form’ of clinical materials. For example, participant workbooks were thermal bound, rather than being bound with any metal materials that participants could use to injure themselves or others. Additionally, whenever

Shelton et al. Page 6

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

the research clinicians required use of some type of object (such as pencils), that object had to be acceptable (approved) according to that correctional facility’s safety and security protocol.

The skills training group includes four core modules: mindfulness, interpersonal effectiveness, distress tolerance, and emotion regulation. The mindfulness module focuses on giving attention to the present moment and targets self dysregulation and identity confusion by emphasizing self-awareness. The interpersonal effectiveness module teaches assertiveness, interpersonal skills and conflict resolution. The distress tolerance module focuses on using strategies to tolerate distress, without making it worse by engaging in old impulsive and self-destructive behaviors by teaching distraction and self-soothing techniques. And, the emotion regulation module assists participants in identifying and describing their emotions, accepting their trauma experiences and focusing on being less reactive to them, and then how to increase positive emotions. These four skills modules are designed to increase adaptive behaviors and cognitive abilities while decreasing maladaptive behaviors and cognitions (Berzins & Trestman, 2004).

In teaching each of the DBT-CM skills to incarcerated participants, examples relevant to participants’ daily experiences in their correctional facility are used. DBT-CM skills are projected with plans for release to anticipate applications of the skills in their outside lives. The teaching of almost every skill was modified with examples and subtle adjustments to correspond to the correctional setting.

Highly structured DBT-CM groups (16 weeks) were co-led by a team of two research clinicians. If an individual discontinued participation in the DBT-CM protocol for any reason, they could still choose to continue with the research interview sessions (posttest). Prior to participation in the 16-week DBT-CM intervention, a study research assistant met with the participant to conduct an interview using a battery of psychological assessment tools that assessed the participant’s current mental, physical and emotional state.

Instruments The primary outcome was to measure a reduction in aggressive and impulsive behavior and improve coping as measured by pretest-posttest rating collected through semi-structured interview assessments (to eliminate literacy issues and security with pencils) to measure impulsive aggression: (1) the Buss–Perry Aggression Questionnaire (BPAQ), a 29-item, 5 point Likert scale designed to assess four dimensions including physical aggression, verbal aggression, anger, and hostility (Buss & Perry, 1992). Internal consistency for the four subscales and total score range from .72 for Verbal Aggression to .89 for the Total score. Retest reliability over nine weeks ranged from .72 for the Anger subscale to .80 for the Physical Aggression subscale and Total score. (2) Overt Aggression Scale-Modified (OAS- M), a 25-item to assess the severity, type, and frequency of aggressive behavior weighted by severity and frequency. Subtypes include: verbal aggression, physical aggression against objects, and physical aggression against self and physical aggression against others (Coccaro, Harvey, Kupsaw-Lawrence, Herbert, & Bernstein, 1991). Interrater reliability has been demonstrated to be .91 for ratings by two clinical raters for OAS–M Aggression and Irritability. Test-retest reliability within a 1 to 2 week period has been shown to have an intraclass correlation for aggression on Time 1 and Time 2 of .46 and .54, respectively (Suris, Lind, Kashner, Bernstein, Young & Worchel 2005). (3) Brief Psychiatric Rating Scale (BPRS), the Total Score and item 5 (Hostility) were used from this 18-item rating scale designed to assess in severity of psychopathology. Items address somatic concern, anxiety, emotional withdrawal, conceptual disorganization, guilt, tension, mannerisms and posturing, grandiosity, depressive mood, hostility, suspiciousness, hallucinatory behaviors, motor retardation, uncooperativeness, unusual thought content, blunted affect, excitement

Shelton et al. Page 7

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

and disorientation (Overall & Gorham, 1962). Interrater reliabilities ranged from .82 to .93 with the highest agreement on somatic concern and unusual thought content subscales. (Ligon & Thyer, 2000). (4) Disciplinary ticket information collected from records on participants 12 months prior to starting groups and six months after completing groups (disciplinary tickets are given to inmates when a behavioral offense has been made within the prison facility).

Additionally, a self-report basic demographic questionnaire designed for this study containing questions about age, ethnicity, and socio-economic status was collected. The Ways of Coping Checklist (WCCL), a 33 item Likert scale self-report checklist measures eight different coping styles-confrontational coping, seeking social support, planful problem solving, self-control, distancing, positive reappraisal, accepting responsibility, and escape/ avoidance (Folkman & Lazarus, 1988). The typical reliability across subscale scores ranges from .60 to .75 (Rexrode, Petersen & O’Toole, 2008). Lastly, the Positive and Negative Affect Scales (PANAS) were used to measure general positive and negative affect states (Watson, Clark, & Tellegen, 1988). This 20-item scale requires a self-report across five criterion measures: calmness, temperance, two scales of tolerance, and emotionality on a Likert scale. Watson, Clark, & Tellegen (1988) report internal consistency reliability for scales from .86 to .90 for positive affect and .84 to .87 for negative affect. Correlations between the two scales range from −.12 to −.23 indicating independence of the two factors (Huebner & Dew, 1995).

Results Thirty-eight participants agreed to volunteer and were consented, 12 were lost to the study. Of the 26 participants who remained in the study, all were male with their ages between 16 and 19 years (M=17.92, SD= .796). Participants’ self-reported races included African- American (38.5%), Hispanic (34.6%), Caucasian (23.10%), and other (3.8%); and their education level ranged from grade 8 to 12 (M=10.36, SD=1.254). Eighty-five percent of these youth reported that they were not married and the remaining 15% reported that they were cohabitating. The family and social networks of these youth were reported by these youth as having up to 7 relatives living in their homes (M=3.23, SD=1.728) and 2 friends (M=.23, SD=.587), and had up to 40 relatives within a 20 mile radius of where they lived. Sixty-one percent of youth were unemployed, 30.8% employed part-time, and the remaining worked 35 hours a week or more. Eighty-eight percent of youth claimed some religious connection.

Overall health, education and rehabilitation needs as measured by the state Department of Correction risk scores found almost all youth to have some need: 20% of youth with serious treatment need and highest level of supervision; 44% with moderate treatment needs; 32% with mild treatment need, and the remaining 4% with minimal or no needs. Six youth (23.1%) were referred for sex offense treatment. The breakout across needs categories is included in Table 1.

The primary types of crime (offense classification) with which participants were charged were violent, 60% (e.g., use of weapon, physical or sexual assault, manslaughter, or murder) with the remaining charged with nonviolent offenses (e.g., drug possession, larceny, probation violation, or breach of peace). Twenty-three youth (88.5%) were sentenced to less than 5 years, and the others sentenced between 5 to 10 years. None of the participants had a history of escape.

To test the hypothesis that participants will show reduced aggression, impulsivity, and improved coping, after completing the DBT-CM groups: physical aggression as measured

Shelton et al. Page 8

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

by BPAQ (t= 7.576, df=21, p=.000) and using distancing (WCCL subscale) as a coping strategy (t=2.529, df=9, p=.032) showed statistical differences at post-test. There was a significant change in disciplinary tickets from pre to posttest (t=2.753, df =24, p =.011), indicating that correctional officers observed an improvement in aggressive and impulsive behavior following the intervention. Improved scores, although not significant were found on PANAS Negative Affect, and the Self-Control subscale on the WCCL. Although not significant, these are worth exploring with a larger sample and more rigorous design.

Discussion As a result of the DBT-CM intervention, a reduction in aggression and a reduction in the number of disciplinary tickets received indicated improved adolescent behavior. The design of the corrections modified modules were designed to be relevant to the participants’ daily experiences in their correctional facility. The teaching of almost every skill was modified with examples and subtle adjustments to correspond to the correctional setting. At the same time, youth were helped with projected plans for release to anticipate applications of DBT- CM skills in their outside lives. This finding is similar to other studies of DBT in correctional environments with adolescent populations (Drake & Barnoski, 2006; Trupin et al, 2002). Aggressive and impulsive behaviors were the primary target behaviors for the intervention, and their reduction improves the safety of both the youth and staff and ultimately reduces cost to the system.

The use of distancing as a coping strategy was an interesting finding, particularly as coping strategies had been described in the literature as consisting of behaviors such as distraction, self criticism, substance abuse, blaming others, denial, and wishful thinking (Aldridge & Roesch, 2008). In thinking about the relationship between the high stress environments of the prison, however, the need to distance oneself from the pressure of a stressful situation may take on an adaptive function and may be effective in dealing with short-term stressors. Similarly, within the context of an extremely violent neighborhood; mental and behavioral disengagement coping may be particularly important in maintaining psychological and physical health (Grant et al., 2000). While the complexity of the relationship between the high stress environment, coping and outcome for youth at high risk is debated, the use of substances is not; nor are the effects of chronic exposure to violent environments toward development of negative coping strategies such as blaming others or self, doing nothing, or avoiding others, which act as a conduit to poor psychological outcomes such PTSD, anxiety, depression, and conduct disorder (Dempsey, 2002). Further, Kliewer, Lepore, Oskin, and Johnson (1998) suggested that the use of avoidant coping behaviors at a young age may influence and prevent youth from engaging in positive coping behaviors.

The lack of significant finding for self-control and accepting as ways of coping, and negative symptoms are of interest, as it would be expected that youth would feel better as a result of the intervention. Adolescence under the best of circumstances is a stressful life event, as their biologic and psychological selves attempt to integrate into the whole adult person they are to become. Added to the cumulative effects of the stressors leading to adolescent incarceration, the measures and secondary analytic design may not have been sufficient to detect change on all the variables of interest in this study.

Conclusion The preliminary results of this study provide support for the continued study of DBT-CM skills training for aggressive and impulsive male adolescent offenders. The improvement seen in physical aggression, distancing coping style and disciplinary tickets are a positive

Shelton et al. Page 9

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

indication that the 16-week skills training groups continue to be implemented as the evidence based is developed to support the intervention.

Given the limitations of this study, the small sample size, the lack of control group and there is a need to consider use of instruments designed specifically for adolescent populations. Such modifications are likely to increase sensitivity and yield stronger results. Despite these limitations, these findings were encouraging and suggest that program implementation would contribute to a decrease in problematic behavior and improvement in quality of life for participants. Decreasing impulsive and aggressive behavior clearly has indications for youth behavior management within the prison and reduced injury to the workforce. Further, implications for post-incarceration self-management of behavior are long-term outcomes of interest.

Acknowledgments Funding provided by National Institutes of Mental Health Grant # 2002-IJ-CX-K009.

References Aldridge AA, Roesch SC. Developing coping typologies of minority adolescents: A latent profile

analysis. Journal of Adolescence. 2008; 31(4):499–517. [PubMed: 17904631] Berzins LG, Trestman RL. The development and implementation of dialectical behavior therapy in

forensic settings. International Journal of Forensic Mental Health. 2004; 3(1):93–103. Boekaerts, M. Coping with stress in childhood and adolescence. In: Zeidner, M.; Endler, NS., editors.

Handbook of coping: Theory, research, applications. John Wiley & Sons; Oxford, England: 1996. p. 452-484.

Buss AH, Perry M. The aggression questionnaire. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology. 1992; 63:452–459. [PubMed: 1403624]

Carver CS, Scheier MF, Weintraub JK. Assessing coping strategies: A theoretically based approach. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology. 1989; 56:267–283. [PubMed: 2926629]

Constantine M, Alleyne V, Caldwell L, McRae M, Suzuki L. Coping responses of Asign, Black, and Latino/Latina New York City residents following the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks against the United States. Cultural Diversity and Ethnic Minority Psychology. 2005; 11(4):293–308. [PubMed: 16478350]

Coccaro EF, Harvey PD, Kupsaw-Lawrence E, Herbert JL, Bernstein DP. Development of neuropharmacologically based behavioral assessments of impulsive aggressive behavior. Journal of Neuropsychiatry. 1991; 3(2):S44–S51.

Davis M, Emory E. Sex differences in neonatal stress reactivity. Child Development. 66(1):14–27. 1005. [PubMed: 7497822]

DeMatteo, D.; Marczyk, G. Risk factors, Protective factors, and the prevention of antisocial behavior among juveniles. In: Heilbrun, K.; Sevin-Golstein, NE.; Redding, RE., editors. Juvenile Delinquency: Prevention, assessment and intervention. Oxford University Press; NY: 2005. p. 19-44.

Dempsey M. Negative coping as mediator in the relation between violence and outcomes: Inner city African American youth. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry. 2002; 72:102–109. [PubMed: 14964599]

Dimeff L, Rizvi SL, Brown M, Linehan MM. Dialectical behavior therapy for substance abuse: A pilot application to methamphetamine-dependent women with borderline personality disorder. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice. 2000; 7:457–468.

Drake, EK.; Barnoski, R. Recidivism findings for the juvenile rehabilitation administration’s Dialectic Behavior Therapy program: Final report. Washington State Institute for Public Policy; Olympia, WA: 2006. (Doc. # 06-07-1201)

Shelton et al. Page 10

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

Eisenberg, N.; Fabes, RA.; Guthrie, IK. Coping with stress: The roles of regulation and Development. In: Wolchik, SA.; Sandler, IN., editors. Handbook of children’s coping: Linking theory and intervention. Plenum Press; NY: 1997. p. 41-70.

Elliott, Delbert S.; Huizinga, David; Ageton, Suzanne. Explaining Delinquency and Drug Use. Sage; Beverly Hills, CA: 1985.

Farrington, DP. Predictors, causes, and correlates of male youth violence. In: Tonry, M.; Moore, MH., editors. Youth Violence, Crime and Justice: A Review of the Research. Vol. 24. University of Chicago Press; Chicago: 1998. p. 421-475.

Fazel S, Doll H, Langsrom N. Mental disorders among adolescents in juvenile detention and correctional facilities: A systematic review and meta-regression analysis of 25 surveys. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. 2008; 47(9):1010–1019. [PubMed: 18664994]

Folkman S, Lazarus RS. Coping as a mediator of emotion. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology. 1988; 54:466–475. [PubMed: 3361419]

Friedman HS. Long-term relations of personality and health: Dynamism, mechanisms, tropisms. Journal of Personality. 2000; 68(6):1089–1107. [PubMed: 11130733]

Grant KE, O’Koon JH, Davis TH, Roache NA, Poindexter LM, Armstrong ML, Minden JA, McIntosh JM. Protective factors affecting low-income urban African American youth exposed to stress. Journal of Early Adolescence. 2000; 20:388–417.

Hare, RD. Manual for the Hare Psychopathy Checklist-Revised. Multi-Health Systems; Toronto: 1991. Hawkins, DJ.; Herrenkohl, TI.; Farrington, DP.; Brewer, D.; Catalano, RF.; Harachi, TW.; Cothern, L.

Juvenile Justice Bulletin. U.S. Department of Justice, Office of Justice Programs, Office of Juvenile Justice and Delinquency Prevention; Washington, DC: 2000. Predictors of Youth Violence. NCJRS 179065

Hawkins, JD.; Herrenkohl, TL.; Farrington, DP.; Brewer, D.; Catalano, RF.; Harachi, TW. A review of predictors of youth violence. In: Loeber, R.; Farrington, DP., editors. Serious and Violent Juvenile Offenders: Risk Factors and Successful Interventions. Sage Publications; Thousand Oaks, CA: 1998. p. 106-146.

Herrenkohl TI, Maguin E, Hill KG, Hawkins JD, Abbott RD, Catalano RF. Developmental risk factors for youth violence. Journal of Adolescent Health. 2000; 26(3):176–86. [PubMed: 10706165]

Hofstein, Y. Coping in court-involved adolescents and the relationship with stressors, delinquency, and psychopathology. 2009. University of Massachusetts – Amherst: Open Access Dissertations. Retrieved April 28, 2010 from http://scholarworks.umass.edu/cgi/viewcontent.cgi? article=1049&context=open_access_dissertations

Huebner ES, Dew T. Preliminary validation of the Positive and Negative Affect Schedule with adolescents. Journal of Psychoeducational Assessment. 1995; 13:286–293.

Huizinga D, Loeber R, Thornberry T. Delinquency, Drug Use, Sex, and Pregnancy Among Urban Youth. Public Health Reports. 1993; 108(suppl.1):90–96. [PubMed: 8210279]

Ireland JL, Boustead R, Ireland CR. Coping style and psychological health among adolescent prisoners: a study of young and juvenile offenders. Journal of Adolescence. 2005; 28:411–123. [PubMed: 15925691]

Kann L, Kinchen SA, Williams BI, Ross JG, Lowry R, Grunbaum JA, Kolbe LJ, State and Local YRBSS Coordinators. Youth risk behavior surveillance—United States, 1999. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report CDC Surveillance Summary. 2000; 49:1–96.

Kashani JH, Husain A, Shekim WO, Hodges KK, Cytryn L, McKnew DH. Current perspectives on childhood depression: an overview. Clinical Child Psychology and Psychiatry. 1999; 4(4):493– 504.

Kliewer W, Lepore SJ, Oskin D, Johnson PD. The role of social and cognitive processes in children’s adjustment to community violence. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology. 1998; 66:199– 209. [PubMed: 9489275]

Kumpfer KL, Alvarado R. Family strengthening approaches for the prevention of youth problem behaviors. American Psychologist. 2003; 58(6/7):457–465. [PubMed: 12971192]

Shelton et al. Page 11

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

Ligon J, Thyer BA. Interrater reliability of the Brief Psychiatric Rating Scale used at a Community – based inpatient psychiatric crisis stabilization unit. Journal of Clinical Psychology. 2000; 56(4): 583–587. [PubMed: 10775051]

Linehan MM, Tutek DA, Heard HL, Armstrong HE. Interpersonal outcome of cognitive behavioral treatment for chronically suicidal borderline patients. American Journal of Psychiatry. 1994; 151:1771. [PubMed: 7977884]

Linehan, MM. Cognitive–behavioral treatment of borderline personality disorder. Guildford Press; New York: 1993.

Linehan, MM. Skills training manual for treating borderline personality disorder. Guilford Press; New York: 1993a.

Linehan MM, Armstrong HE, Suarez A, Allmon D, Heard HL. Cognitive-behavioral treatment of chronically parasuicidal borderline patients. Archives of General Psychiatry. 1991; 48:1060–1064. [PubMed: 1845222]

Loeber R, Farrington DP. Young children who commit crime: Epidemiology, developmental origins, risk factors, early interventions, and policy implications. Development and Psychopathology. 2000; 12:737–762. [PubMed: 11202042]

Loeber R, Farrington DP. Never too early, never too late: Risk factors and successful interventions for serious and violent juvenile offenders. Studies on Crime and Crime Prevention. 1998; 7:7–30.

Loeber R, Wung P, Keenan K, Giroux B, Stouthamer-Loeber M, Van Kammen WB, Maughan B. Developmental pathways in disruptive child behavior. Development and Psychopathology. 1993; 5:103–133.

Luria, AR. Higher cortical functions in man. Basic Books; New York: 1980. McCann RA, Ball EM, Ivanoff A. DBT with an inpatient forensic population: The CMHIP forensic

model. Cognitive and Behavioral Practice. 2000; 7:448–456. Milner B. Aspects of human frontal lobe function. Advances in Neurology. 1995; 66:67–84. [PubMed:

7771312] Moffitt TE. Adolescent-limited and life-course-persistent antisocial behavior: A developmental

taxonomy. Psychological Review. 1993; 100:674–701. [PubMed: 8255953] Morgan AB, Lilienfeld SO. A meta-analytic review of the relation between antisocial behavior and

neuropsychological measures of executive function. Clinical Psychology Review. 2000; 20:113– 136. [PubMed: 10660831]

Myers WC, Scott K, Burgess AW, Burgess AG. Psychopathology, biopsychosocial factors, crime characteristics, and classification of 25 homicidal youths. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. 1995; 4:1483–1489. [PubMed: 8543516]

Nelson-Gray RO, Keane SP, Hurst RM, Mitchell JT, Warburton JB, Chok JT, Cobb AR. A modified DBT skills training program for oppositional defiant adolescents: promising preliminary findings. Behaviour Research and Therapy. 2006; 44:1811–1820. [PubMed: 16579964]

Overall JE, Gorham DR. The brief psychiatric rating scale. Psychological Reports. 1962; 10:799–812. Pashall MJ, Fishbein DH. Executive cognitive functioning and aggression: a public health perspective.

Aggression and Violent Behavior. 2002; 7:215–235. Preski S, Shelton D. The role of contextual, child and parental factors in predicting criminal outcomes

in adolescence. Issues in Mental Health. 2001; 2:197–205. Quinn A, Shera W. Evidence-based practice in group work with incarcerated youth. International

Journal of Law and Psychiatry. 2009; 32:288–293. [PubMed: 19647875] Rathus JH, Miller AL. DBT for adolescents: Dialectical dilemmas and secondary treatment targets.

Cognitive and Behavioral Practice. 2000; 7:425–434. Rexrode KR, Petersen S, O’Toole S. The Ways of Coping Scale. Educational and Psychological

Measurement. 2008; 68(2):262–280. Rosenblatt JA, Rosenblatt A, Biggs EE. Criminal behavior and emotional disorder: Comparing youth

served by the mental health and juvenile justice systems. The Journal of Behavioral Health Services and Research. 2000; 27(2):227–337.

Shelton et al. Page 12

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

Rutter, M. Promotion of resilience in the face of adversity. In: Clarke-Stewart, A.; Dunn, J., editors. Families Count: Effects on child and adolescent development. Cambridge University Press; NY: 2006. p. 26-52.The Jacobs Foundation Series on Development

Sabol, WJ.; West, HC.; Cooper, M. Prisoners in 2008. U.S. Department of Justice, Office of Justice Programs, US Bureau of Justice Statistics; Washington, DC: 2009. NCJ 228417

Samuelsson S, Herkner B, Lundberg I. Reading and writing difficulties among prison inmates: A matter of experiential factors rather than dyslexic problems. Scientific Studies of Reading. 2003; 7(1):53–73.

Sandler, IN.; Wolchik, SA.; MacKinnon, D.; Ayers, TS.; Roosa, MW. Handbook of children’s coping: Linking theory and intervention. Wolchik, SA.; Sandler, IN., editors. Plenum Press; New York: 1997. p. 3-40.

Sedlak, AJ.; McPherson, KS. Juvenile Justice Bulletin. U.S. Department of Justice, Office of Justice Programs, Office of Juvenile Justice and Delinquency Prevention; Washington, DC: 2010. Youth’s needs and services: Findings from the survey of youth in residential placement. NCJ227728

Seiffge-Krenke I, Klessinger N. Long term effects of avoidant coping on adolescents’ depressive symptoms. Journal of Youth and Adolescence. 2000; 6:617–630.

Shelton D. Emotional disorders in young offenders. Journal of Nursing Scholarship. 2001; 33(3):259– 263. [PubMed: 11552553]

Sickmund, M.; Sladky, TJ.; Kang, W.; Puzzanchera, C. Census of Juveniles in Residential Placement Databook. 2008. Online. Available: http://www.ojjdp.ncjrs.gov/ojstatbb/cjrp/

Sickmund, M. Juvenile Residential Facility Census, 2002: Selected Findings. Office of Justice Programs, Office of Juvenile Justice and Delinquency Prevention; Washington, DC: 2006. NCJ 211080

Skowyra, K.; Cocozza, J. Blueprint for Change: A Comprehensive Model for the Identification and Treatment of Youth and Mental Health Needs in Contact with the Juvenile Justice. Policy Research Associates, Inc.; Delmar, NY: 2007.

Slaughter B, Fann JR, Ehde D. Traumatic brain injury in a county jail population: Prevalence, neuropsychological functioning and psychiatric disorders. Brain Injury. 2003; 17(9):731–741. [PubMed: 12850940]

Snyder, HN.; Sickmund, M. Juvenile offenders and victims: 1999 national report. U.S. Department of Justice, Office of Justice Programs, Office of Juvenile Justice and Delinquency Prevention; Washington, DC: 1999. NCJ 178257Retrieved July 2, 2010 from http://www.ncjrs.org/html/ojjdp/nationalreport99/toc.html

Suris AM, Lind LM, Kashner MT, Bernstein IH, Young K, Worchel J. Aggression and impulsivity instruments: An examination in Veterans. Military Psychology. 2005; 17(4):283–297.

Trestman, RL.; Gonillo, C.; Davis, K. Dialectical Behavior Therapy-Corrections-Modified (DBT-CM) Skills Training Manual. University of Connecticut Health Center; Farmington, CT: 2004. Unpublished treatment manual

Trupin EW, Stewart DG, Beach B, Boesky L. Effectiveness of a Dialectic Behavior Therapy program for incarcerated juvenile female offenders. Child and Adolescent Mental Health. 2002; 7(3):121– 127.

Watson D, Clark LA, Tellegen A. Development and validation of brief measures of positive and negative affect: The PANAS scales. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology. 1988; 54:1063– 1070. [PubMed: 3397865]

Shelton et al. Page 13

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript N

IH -P

A A

uthor M anuscript

N IH

-P A

A uthor M

anuscript

Shelton et al. Page 14

Ta bl

e 1

R is

k Sc

or es

fo r T

re at

m en

t P la

nn in

g N

ee ds

R is

k Sc

or e

M ed

ic al

M en

ta l

H ea

lt h

Su bs

ta nc

e A

bu se

Sa fe

ty /

V io

le nc

e E

du ca

ti on

V oc

at io

na l

M in

im al

/n on

e 42

.3 %

N =1

1 3.

8% N

=4 11

.5 %

N =3

M ild

53 .8

% N

=1 4

3. 8%

N =4

23 .1

% N

=6 84

.6 N

=2 2

38 .5

% N

=1 0

23 .1

% N

=6

M od

er at

e 80

.8 %

N =2

1 34

.6 %

N =9

15 .3

% N

=4 53

.8 %

N =1

4 65

.3 %

N =1

7

Se ri

ou s

11 .5

% N

=3 30

.8 %

N =8

7. 6%

N =2

11 .5

% N

=3

N =2

6

J Child Adolesc Psychiatr Nurs. Author manuscript; available in PMC 2012 May 1.

dbt-adapted-for-suicidal-adolescents.pdf